JP5935059B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a so-called ball-type game machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), and is particularly suitable for application to a game machine that displays effects.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a decorative symbol (special symbol) fluctuates when a gaming ball enters a start opening provided on a gaming board. The player can obtain a privilege of enjoying the production and receiving a payout of the game ball by causing the game ball to enter the start opening and changing the decorative design (special design).

  For example, in Patent Document 1, when a game ball enters a start port installed on a game board, a random number is acquired by control of the main control board, and an effect control board that receives the determination result of the acquired random number A gaming machine in which a speech effect is performed is disclosed. When the acquired random number matches a predetermined jackpot random number, the symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped on the display screen on the game board and the game ball is paid out by shifting to the jackpot gaming state. A gaming machine is disclosed.

JP 2011-139804 A

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, there is a possibility that the interest in games will be reduced.

Then, an object of this invention is to suppress the fall of the interest with respect to a game.

[Constitution]
A specific operation means for performing a specific operation by the player;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the reception of the game ball at the start port;
Jackpot determination means for performing jackpot determination processing based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means;
A jackpot game executing means for performing a jackpot game in which a privilege is given to the player based on the result of the jackpot determination process by the jackpot determination means;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a game holding means for waiting for the jackpot determination processing by the jackpot determination means corresponding to the acquired random number until the execution condition is satisfied,
When the execution condition related to the jackpot determination process is established and the hold state is released, the fluctuation display control means for performing control related to the symbol fluctuation,
Preceding effect determination means for performing an effect determination for a specific preceding effect that causes a specific aspect to be shown before the execution condition is satisfied, with respect to the jackpot expectation process for the jackpot determination process that is put on hold by the game holding means;
When the first determination result is obtained by the effect determination by the preceding effect determination means, the special operation image that can cause the special image display to appear at the hold display timing of the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect Display means;
A first preceding effect control unit capable of performing control related to execution of the specific preceding effect when the specific operation with respect to the specific operation unit is received while the special operation image display by the special operation image display unit appears. and,
When the second determination result is obtained by the effect determination by the preceding effect determination means, the control related to the execution of the specific preceding effect is performed at a predetermined effect timing without accepting the specific operation for the specific operation means. Second predecessor effect control means,
Production design control means for performing production that suggests the result of the jackpot determination process according to the display mode when the production design is confirmed and stopped in a predetermined display area ,
The special operation image display means includes:
When there are a plurality of jackpot determination processes whose digestion order precedes the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect, the special operation image display is changed to the plurality of jackpot determination processes that exist. A plurality of variable specific prompting display means capable of executing a control that can identify and appear which is the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect in a plurality of corresponding symbol variations. And
The first preceding effect control means includes
Even if the specific operation is performed on the specific operation means in spite of the fact that the plurality of symbol variations in which the special image display appears is within the period in which digestion has not yet been completed, the specific operation is accepted. Having non-acceptance control means capable of executing control to prevent
The multiple variation specific prompting display means is
Control that the special operation image display is not displayed after all the symbol variations according to the jackpot determination process whose digestion order is ahead of the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect is digested. Is feasible,
The Tokumisao Tokumisao image display by the image display means, as said, which can be output as a particular display mode in any of the absence in the period and when in the period in which the specific operation is not accepted by the non-reception control means Because
further,
The position where the special image display appears is different from the position where the effect symbol is confirmed and stopped in the predetermined display area,
When the specific preceding effect is performed by the control by the first preceding effect control means and when the specific preceding effect is performed by the control by the second preceding effect control means, both of the special modes are special. A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect of the above can appear .

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games .

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame and door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. BB sectional view (A) of FIG. 10, CC sectional view (B) of FIG. 12 (A), DD sectional view (C) of FIG. 12 (A), and E--section of FIG. 12 (A). It is E sectional drawing (D). It is a perspective view which shows attachment / detachment with the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view (A) of the lock member provided in the back surface of an outer frame, and the perspective view (B) which looked at the lock member from the downward direction. It is a rear view of the upper support metal part which shows the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is the front perspective view (A) and back perspective view (B) of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is a disassembled perspective view of the left unit of a side speaker electrical decoration unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 26 from back. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right unit of a side speaker electrical decoration unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 28 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a ball | bowl feeding unit. It is the perspective view (A) which expands and shows the part of a joint unit, and the disassembled perspective view (B) which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. It is the front perspective view (A) and back perspective view (B) of a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. It is a disassembled perspective view (B) which shows an exploded perspective view (A) and FIG. 34 (A) of a top lamp electrical decoration unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view of a top lamp reflector unit. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is a disassembled perspective view of the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electric decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view which shows the dish back plate of a dish unit, and a ball rental unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 46 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a plate unit main body. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 48 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the operation button unit board | substrate of an operation button unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of an operation button unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launching apparatus. It is sectional drawing explaining the connection state of a handle apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launching apparatus. It is explanatory drawing (A) which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, and explanatory drawing (B) which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a horizontally long sphere inflow port and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is a perspective view of the state which supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut by a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to a removal prevention mechanism. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a game board in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 83 from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which fixed the main control board box to the board holder for boards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles FIG. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is the fragmentary view which looked at the function display sticker of the game board through the game window. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and the perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device which is not operated, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device and the firing rail which are operating. FIG. 96 is a plan view, a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a cross-sectional view (A) taken along the line A-A in FIG. 95 (B) of a slide member provided in the ball hitting device. They are a perspective view (A), a top view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is a top view (A) which shows the pressure state of the ball of the conventional prize ball tank, a top view (B), and a top view (C) which shows the pressure state of the prize ball tank concerning this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side between a prize ball tank and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side between a prize ball tank and a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) of a tank rail member and a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view which shows the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a cross-sectional view of the bottom rocking plate portion provided in the full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the position a little lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the perspective view (B) seen from the side view (A) and front side of a locking device. It is the perspective view (A) seen from the back side of a locking device, and the perspective views (B) and (C) of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main body frames of a locking device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view which shows the effect | action of the sliding gutter for glass doors, and the sliding gutter for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the substrate holder for frames of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of rear view which shows the wiring etc. of a delivery control board | substrate and a board | substrate unit. FIG. 139 is a front view of a game board for illustrating a cross-sectional location in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 138. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine which opened the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a side view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the cover body concerning a second embodiment from the open side. It is the perspective view which looked at the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment from the axial support side. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which attached the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which removed the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box concerning a second embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body concerning a second embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the effect | action of the cylinder lock which concerns on 2nd embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left rear. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structural member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at what was decomposed | disassembled from diagonally behind. It is a disassembled perspective view of each apparatus with which a game panel is mounted | worn. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the side winning opening member from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the frame member of the center accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the base plate of the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the start opening unit of a center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the starting port unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive mechanism part of the starting port unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the principal part of the drive mechanism part from back diagonally. It is the perspective view which looked at the sub liquid crystal unit from diagonally forward. It is the side view which looked at the mounting state of a sub liquid crystal unit from the right side. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the sub liquid crystal unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is a front view which shows the state which shielded the front of the sub liquid crystal unit. It is a front view which shows the state by which the front of the sub liquid crystal unit was open | released. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st accessory unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right movable part unit of a 1st accessory unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a right view which shows the movable part unit of a 2nd accessory unit. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable part unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive part of the 2nd accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive part from the back. It is a right view which shows operation | movement of a movable part unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the shutter type | mold character of a back unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the shutter type | mold accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view of the left inner shutter of the shutter type accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the left inner shutter from diagonally behind, and its principal part enlarged view. It is the perspective view of the decoration board of a left inner shutter, and its principal part enlarged view. It is the perspective view which looked at the right inner shutter of a shutter type accessory from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view of the left outer shutter of the shutter type accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the right outer shutter of a shutter type accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the drive part of the shutter type | mold accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which opened each shutter of a shutter type | mold accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower side accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower side accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view of the lower drive part unit of a lower side accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the distribution effect apparatus of a lower drive part unit. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the distribution part of the distribution production apparatus and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the rocking drive part of the distribution production device from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the rocking drive part from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism of the lower drive part unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism and was seen from diagonally behind. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which supplies a game ball. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which raised the distribution production device. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which made the distribution production | presentation apparatus incline to the left. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which made the distribution production | presentation apparatus incline to the right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game-medium supply mechanism of a lower side accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game medium supply mechanism and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game media supply mechanism and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the channel | path formation unit of the lower side accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the channel | path formation unit from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the operation | movement by the return channel | path of a channel | path formation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the operation | movement by the discharge channel of a channel | path formation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the other structure in the back box unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the other structure and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the horizontal decoration unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable decoration part of the horizontal decoration unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the horizontal base member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a flowchart of the main system process which main control MPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st and 2nd start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows the process step of a 2nd special symbol advance process. It is a flowchart which shows the process step of a 2nd special symbol advance process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface which shows distribution of a hit fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows a high disappointment fluctuation pattern table setting process It is a table | surface which shows distribution of a high anticipation fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows a low expectation variation pattern table setting process It is a table | surface which shows distribution of a low disappointment fluctuation pattern table. It is a list of fluctuation patterns. It is a list of fluctuation patterns. It is a list of fluctuation patterns. It is a list of fluctuation patterns. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of small hit establishment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory small hit control process. It is a front view of the game board in a normal game state. It is a front view of a game board when a sub liquid crystal unit becomes visible. It is a front view of a game board when the front of a liquid crystal display device is closed. It is a front view of a game board when a distribution production device raises to a production position. It is a figure which shows the content of the main liquid crystal screen of a normal mode, and a sub liquid crystal screen. It is a flowchart which shows the process step of a pending | holding display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the part of the hold display displayed on a main liquid crystal screen. It is a figure explaining the kind of special hold display. It is a flowchart which shows the process step of the production | presentation process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation display regarding the special lottery corresponding during a fluctuation | variation. It is a figure which shows the example in which several button hold display HRB is displayed simultaneously. It is a figure which shows the example in which several button hold display HRB is displayed simultaneously. It is a figure explaining a button reservation step-up production. It is a figure explaining an unspecified reservation effect. It is a figure explaining special reservation search production. It is a figure explaining the 1st pending | holding effect according to position. It is a table used in the holding effect over a plurality of symbol variations. It is explanatory drawing explaining a raising / lowering effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process step of a raising / lowering effect completion | finish process. It is a figure which shows that a distribution production apparatus did not fall normally by a malfunction. It is a figure which shows an example of a selection screen. It is a figure explaining the jackpot classification notification effect using the distribution effect device. It is a figure explaining the jackpot classification notification effect using the distribution effect device. It is a figure explaining the jackpot classification notification effect using the distribution effect device. It is a figure explaining the jackpot classification alerting | reporting performance using the distribution production | presentation apparatus. It is a figure which shows the content of the main liquid crystal screen of a special mode, and a sub liquid crystal screen. It is explanatory drawing explaining a special effect. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation at the time of reach establishment of the pachinko machine of this Embodiment. It is a flowchart of a battle production 1st time process. It is a flowchart of a battle production second time process. It is a flowchart of a battle effect 3rd time process. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image of a battle effect inclusion effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image of a battle effect inclusion effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image of a battle effect inclusion effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image of a battle effect inclusion effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image of a battle effect inclusion effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image of a battle effect inclusion effect. It is a figure which shows the frame image which comprises the moving image of a battle effect inclusion effect. It is a time chart which shows the aspect of production control. It is a figure which shows the external appearance structure of a game board. It is a figure which shows the opening / closing pattern of a normal electric accessory. It is a figure which shows a normal symbol fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the random number table for symbols. It is a figure which shows the opening / closing pattern of a special electric accessory. It is a figure which shows the external appearance structure of a game board and a counter. It is a figure which shows the external appearance structure of the game board at the time of a decoration symbol change, and a counter. It is a figure which shows the external appearance of the game board and counter after progress for a fixed time. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of an effect execution necessity determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a provision condition determination process. It is a figure which shows the external appearance structure of the game board by which the point provision effect was displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a launch direction suggestion effect process. It is a figure which shows the external appearance structure of the game board on which the execution suggestion effect was displayed. It is a figure which shows the external appearance structure of the game board by which the launch direction suggestion effect was displayed. It is a figure which shows the external appearance structure of the game board in which the end effect was displayed.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. 4, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and a game area 605 that is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing a ball to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side thereof. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the hitting ball launcher 650 (see FIG. 5) and the door frame 5 and the main body excluding the game board 4 are provided at the lower part of the back surface thereof. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical components provided in the frame 3 are collectively provided is attached, and covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3. A cover body 1250 is detachably provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, and the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 10, a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 12A, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD. , E-E sectional view (D). FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 shows a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view (A) which shows an attachment state, and the perspective view (B) seen from the downward direction. Further, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the action of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes an upper and lower upper frame plate 10 and a lower frame plate 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. , 13 are connected in a square shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 formed on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right lowered by one step of the connecting member 19. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left-right width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  As shown in FIGS. 12B and 12D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. A groove portion 29 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12B, the recessed portion 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The concave portion 30 of the plate 13 is formed as shown in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. A mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. An attachment hole 40 for attaching the projection 41 with the attachment screw 42 is formed, and an attachment hole 43 for attaching the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing bracket 14 with the fastening screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 121) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As shown in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are connected to each other. The main body frame 3 can be released from the outer frame 2 by disengagement.

  Further, the cover reinforcing bracket 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is such that the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface when the cover reinforcing bracket 14 is closed. The front and side surfaces of the cover are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support metal 45 and the cover reinforcement metal 14 which also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support flange 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support holes formed in (see FIG. 72) are inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  A hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 is provided on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53. Are fastened with fastening screws 32 to fix the upper support fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support fitting 45. .

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Further, when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

  Incidentally, a lock member 80 is pivotally supported on the back surface of the upper support fitting 45 for pivotally supporting the body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed as shown in FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45 is formed as an arc-shaped flat plate at the tip and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46. A drooping wall 46a is formed. The drooping wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support fitting 45, and when viewed from the front, the lock member 80, which will be described below, cannot be visually recognized to improve the appearance. Then, the lock member 80 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 described below comes into contact, or as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not jump out of the support protruding piece 46. Further, the support hole 47 formed in the support projecting piece 46 is formed to be bent so as to be inclined slightly toward the inside from the side on the opposite side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed. Has been. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

  The hanging wall 46 a described above is formed by being bent at right angles along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 46 and the upper support fitting 45 from the entrance end portion in front of the support pothole 47, and the support pothole 47. A stop drooping portion 47a is formed by being bent inward at the entrance end portion of the front. A mounting hole 46 b is formed in the approximate center of the support projecting piece 46, and a lock member 80 is rotatably supported by a rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46 b. The lock member 80 is molded from a synthetic resin. The stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in an L-shaped base portion formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b. Thus, in a state where the lock member 80 is attached to the attachment hole 46b by the rivet 81 and is rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support protruding piece 46, as shown in FIG. The portion is in contact with the inner side surface of the hanging wall 46 a, and the stopper portion 80 a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip end portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space in which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support rod hole 47.

  By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a at the inlet end portion (in this state) In a normal shaft support state in which there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop drooping portion 47a, the support hole 47 is formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 and the tip end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a that are located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion are opposed to each other while being shifted in an oblique direction. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support rod hole 47. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that it smoothly rotates when the distal end surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is rotated by operating the operation portion 80b. . In the illustrated case, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80).

  For this reason, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is The component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip end surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip end face 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support flange 47 Since the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 81 (rotation center of the lock member 80) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side, the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment that rotates the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protrusion 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 and the support flange 47. Clamped between one side inner surface of the hole To hold. Therefore, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, and the elasticity formed integrally with the synthetic resin. The plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c can be prevented, and the shaft support pin 504 can be prevented from falling off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a of the locking member 80 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 46 (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a Does not rotate in such a direction that it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 47a and disengages further, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46.

  Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arcuate tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the rotation center of the lock member 80), so Although the description has been given of the case in which no rotational moment is generated in the lock member 80 even when the acting force F in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 is applied, as shown in FIG. When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position by the rivet 81 of the lock member 80 is set to the inside of the support protrusion 46, the shaft support pin 504 is inclined with respect to the support collar hole 47. When the acting force F is applied in the direction of coming off along the inclination of the hole, and abuts against the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F is brought into contact with the pivot pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. Component force F1 acting on the component (normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and one side inner surface of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47 In the case of dividing into F2, the rotational moment is exerted by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure (clockwise rotation direction). Since the side only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

  That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiment shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force is such that the shaft support pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47. When F is applied and abuts against the end faces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the abutting portion between the pivot pin 504 and the end faces 80e and 80f of the acting force F. By positioning the rotation center (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) of the lock member 80 at a position where no rotation occurs or a position where a rotational moment is generated where the lock member 80 rotates its tip end toward the outside of the support protrusion 46. In addition, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a is stopped. Since only abuts against the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 80 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. The present applicant confirms that the locking member 80 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 46 because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a even when the 80 rotates. doing.

  The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in a frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80, thereby pushing the figure. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), the lock member 80 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 80 c, so that the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support rod hole 47. Then, when the pivot pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c and rotates in the clockwise direction. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 80 a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support rod hole 47. This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 504 from the support hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 80a is retracted from the support rod hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 47. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and releasing the engagement between the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 and the support protrusions 68 of the lower support fitting 66. .

  As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be very easily attached to the back surface of the upper support fitting 45, and since it has a very simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 504 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 47 and comes into contact with the front end surfaces 80e, 80f, the shaft supporting pin 504 of the acting force F is applied. And a position where no rotational moment is generated to rotate the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the front end surfaces 80e and 80f, or the front end portion of the lock member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the axis fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic piece 80c to be formed, and to prevent the pivot pin 504 from coming off from the support hole 47 over a long period of time. Since the locking member 80 is only towards the distal end on one side of the stopper portion 80a also rotates and abuts against the stop drooping portion 47a, the lock member 80 nor protrudes to the outside of the support protruding piece 46.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 as seen from the back. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view in which the right unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit is exploded and seen from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which FIG. 28 is seen from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. FIG. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to a lower left decorative board 190 fixed to the lower left side of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and a ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball extraction path cover 191 that closes the ball extraction path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door decoration drive. A door decoration drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, a handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed immediately above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body on the lower side of the game window 101 The wiring receiving groove 110b formed on the rear side of 110 and capable of receiving wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal board 194 is closed from the rear side. The wiring cover 195, and a stop lever 196 which is pivotally supported on the rear side of the respective arranged door frame base body 110 in the upper left and right of the game window 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 in which metal sheets are assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has sufficient strength to sufficiently support the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The lower left decorative substrate 190 in the door frame base unit 100 has a plurality of LEDs 190a mounted on the front surface thereof, so that the left end portion of the later-described dish unit 300 can be decorated with light emission. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, such as an electrical component and an electrical component provided on the door frame 5 (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board and the like, speakers 121 and 391). Wiring from the switch, the ball rental unit 301, the operation button unit 370, etc. are connected together and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated into the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of the main control board box 624 attached to the prize ball payout control board 1186 and the game board 4 through 1102 and the like.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin, as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, a shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of a reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates at the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, is inserted further toward the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e projecting a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side are formed, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed in a body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light-emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically elongated illumination part 122 and an acoustic part 130 having a side speaker 121 disposed above and below the illumination part 122 in each of the left and right units. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view in FIGS. 26 to 29, the illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123, and the side illumination lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end of the side illumination lens 124 from the front side, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side electric decoration flash cover 127 which supports the side electric decoration reflector 124, and the side electric decoration flash cover A flash lens 128 having translucency to close the 27 flash openings 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination part 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination board 126, and high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. Each white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side electric decoration board 126 in the side electric decoration reflector 124 and the side electric decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126 a and 126 b mounted on 126 can be irradiated forward through the opening 125 a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124 a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  In addition, a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side is formed in the side electric decoration reflector 124 at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens is formed in the lens concave portion 124c from the front side. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is inserted. The electrical decoration part 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit light strongly before the LED 126a emits light by the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect that lights only after both ends shine.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker decoration 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and have a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in a front view includes a decoration 131b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 in the upper right acoustic section 130 in front view. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and the head of the player who plays the game is more or less. Are also arranged at the top, bottom, left and right positions, so that each side speaker 121 has independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and 2.1ch surround including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. In addition, the side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the middle to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with a screw or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on its upper surface, and its lower surface. A lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed. The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 that is bent rearward (see FIG. 25), and both upper side edges of the upper long side edge are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 that are bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusions 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes open side outward bent protrusions 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later is attached to the rear lower portion of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the pivotal support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the upright wall 165 is for preventing the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171 a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110 c of the door frame base body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction, and the joint unit 180 is housed in the state where the slide body 182 is housed. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface. In addition, a pair of attachment holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c that is positioned substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 31B, only the lower abutment protrusion 110g is shown, and the upper abutment protrusion 110g is not shown).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, the rear face wall has two guide protrusions 182a that project a predetermined amount rearward and are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and the lower guide protrusion 182a on the right side in rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a that guide the movement of the slide body, an insertion lateral hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and in this state, the cover body 184 is covered from the front. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the coating, by screwing into the mounting hole 110f with the screw through the mounting hole 184d, the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 34A is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 34B is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the center rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 and to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 34)

  Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224, 226, 231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a, motors 245, 265, 285 of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280 and boards 248 in the top lamp lighting unit 200. , 268, 288, 296, LED 453a of a glass unit 450 described later, and the like, for supplying power from a power supply board 1136 (described later) via a relay. Further, the top lamp decoration drive board 206 emits light from the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotary lamp unit 280, the motors 245, 265, 285, etc. of the rotary lamp units 240, 260, 280, etc. The driving is for driving based on a control signal from a peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221 i protruding from the front side to the rear from the top lamp reflector unit 220 while the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side through the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front, and the connector 205a is inserted through the connector opening 213. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition, a board attachment portion 214 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, and the top lamp decoration driving board 206 is attached to the board attachment portion 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and is open at the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical part 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined part 221b (see FIG. 33). ). The reflector base 210 is provided with a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. The reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e as shown in the figure. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed). Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening portion 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially horizontal center. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i protruding rearward that fit with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210, and a plurality of mounting bosses 212 fitted to the fixed boss portion 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protruding rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. LED226a on the front Mounted and a pair of partition decorative substrate 226.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and can emit light in a mode different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side can be emitted even when light is not emitted. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a sandwiched between upper and lower protruding pieces, and a protruding piece 222e protruding rearward from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. The LED 226a mounted on the partition decoration board 226 is an ultra-bright LED, and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens retainer 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 221 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. A base part 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshes with the rotating lamp base gear 243, covers the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 from above, and covers the rotating lamp base gear 243 from the rotating portion base 242. The rotating unit holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and supported on the lower surface of the rotating unit holder 247 is coaxial with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-luminance color LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. A mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d disposed on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The mounting step portion 241b rotates from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support opening 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft tube is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft tube into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. In other words, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of this example, the rotating lamp base 242a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 247 are provided by the rotating lamp base 242a. A gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 252 disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 as shown in the figure. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 has an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h on the left side of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp mounting of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward at an upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided, and the attachment step portion 261b is rotated from above. The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of this example, the rotating lamp base 262a, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating section holder 267 are used as the rotating lamp base. A gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 is provided with a substrate supporting part that supports the upper end of the right rotating position detecting substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting part 262b of the rotating part base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection substrate 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 262 and the rotation unit holder 267.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the figure, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 273a, an opening portion 273b drilled in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, so that the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 273 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotating axis of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 that is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward. And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having high-luminance color LEDs (not shown) that can emit light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a for fixing the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this example, the rotating lamp base 282a of the rotating part base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287 are used. A gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the center rotation position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotation unit base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 294 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the grooved lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decoration board 296 to emit light.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the dish unit. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the dish unit with the dish back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the dish unit and the ball rental unit after removing the dish unit. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit in an exploded view from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the rear. FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit board removed, and FIG. FIG. 55 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame, and FIG. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tray unit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the tray unit. It is. Moreover, FIG. 63 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long spherical inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish unit 300 covers a front surface of the dish body 310 and a dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open at the top and rear and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-like dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 capable of discharging a part of the game balls stored in the storage tray of the plate 310, and a ball lending machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball rental unit 301 that operates, a control button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the plate 310 and that can be operated by the player in accordance with a game state (game situation), and a plate unit main body 320 below the plate 310 dish A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 disposed between the plate 340 and the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. A handle base 303 to be arranged and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for performing a game ball driving operation are mainly provided. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the later-described dish unit main body 320. Further, as shown in the drawing, a lower left decorative board 190 for illuminating and decorating the left end of the dish unit main body 320 is disposed on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) that is arranged between the lending button 301a and the returning button 301b and displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the lending machine. When the ball rental unit 301 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 with cash or a prepaid card and the ball lending button 301a is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and when the return button 301b is pushed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes.

  Further, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when the player participates in the game content (game effect) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[1-2C-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage tray 312 to be connected to the storage tray 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is arranged on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340 and is lower in the right side and the front side in a plan view, and the right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear portion of the second portion and decreases toward the right side and the rear side, and a third inclined surface that is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with a front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b, and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; A fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end portion of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between the partition wall 311f where the rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage plate 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e and It distribute | circulates on the 5 inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. In other words, the storage tray 311 of this example causes the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 to once detour to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flow into the third inclined surface 311c that serves as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is like that.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. Note that a stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls and to prevent static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion is slanted to the lower right and then is dropped downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 is configured such that the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. As desired for the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is inserted and arranged to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a first sphere described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere extraction path 313 across the slide groove 316a. A flange portion 316b for locking the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base attachment port 321d for attaching the handle base 303 to the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e disposed above the handle base attachment port 321d and facing a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A section-shaped duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front side on the left side of the handle base mounting opening d, and a section-shaped ball discharge opening 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 through the speaker opening 322a. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punched metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and four corners cut off, and is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been subjected to plating, a right decoration 325 that is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324 and is smaller than the right decoration base 324, and a main body of the front back plate 322 A plate-like plate made of punching metal and disposed at the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321. A left cover 326, a plate-like left decoration base 327 disposed substantially at the center of the front surface of the left cover 326, which is smaller than the left cover 326 and plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and a front surface of the left decoration base 327 A frame shape that is arranged substantially at the center and decorates the periphery of the left decoration 328 that is smaller and plate-like than the left decoration base 327, the speaker opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball release button opening 321c of the main body 321. The main body 329 is mainly provided. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to penetrate the speaker openings 321a of the main body 321 as desired. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  The plate unit main body 320 of the present example has a main body left decoration base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190, and a front surface of the main body left decoration base 330 and a metallic luster plating on the surface. And a main body left decoration 331 that has been processed. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by the LEDs 190 a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 disposed on the rear side of the main body left decoration base 330.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 and a duct notch 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right decoration 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to a metallic luster plating process on the surface.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 whose surface is plated with metallic luster, An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decoration board 336 having a plurality of color LEDs 336a mounted thereon. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is in a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inlet 341 that penetrates the ball, a ball supply port 342 that is arranged at a predetermined distance from the ball inlet 341 in a lower right direction and passes in a shape that allows a game ball to pass through, and a rear that communicates with the ball inlet 341. And a prismatic prize ball contact bar 343 extending to the main. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is a predetermined amount behind the ball inlet 341, and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and allows game balls to circulate. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf portion 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the back plate 340 has a spherical flow path opening 345 corresponding to a ball extraction path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 to be described later and penetrating in a substantially L shape. A latch opening 346 disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrating in a section shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of a second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted; In addition, the wire insertion port 347 that is disposed in the upper right corner portion when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially section shape, and the ball rental unit 301 that is disposed on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inflow port 341 and the wire insertion port 346 are attached. A ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351, which are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, and a dish on the upper portion of the first ball release button base 352 The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The lower end of the plate body 311 and supported by the first ball removal mechanism support 316 of the plate body 311 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game ball that has circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in a direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the urging force of the first ball release spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313 together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage dish 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position for closing the second ball outlet 312 and an open position for opening the second ball outlet 312 The second ball removal shutter 364, the second ball removal spring 365 that urges the second ball removal shutter 364 to the closed position where the second ball removal port 312 is closed, and the second ball removal spring 365. A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that pivotally supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing part 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar part that extends from the closing part 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 51). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P-shape as a whole. Further, the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball removal spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball removal shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Thus, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  In addition, the second ball removal base 367 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball | bowl extraction shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shallow dish shape so that it can show in figure, and the accommodation space which accommodates the 2nd ball removal shutter 364 with the plate body 310 can be formed now. Yes. In addition, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removal shutter 364 is rotated to turn the second ball removal port 312. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the urging force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. Thus, the game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the second projection of the second ball removal slide 362 is pushed by the second ball removal button 361 so that the pair of engagement protrusions 362b in the latch unit 366 are a pair. Contact between the two engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball removal spring 365 is resisted against the biasing force of the second ball removal spring 365. The state where the button 361 is pressed, that is, the second bulb outlet 312 can be held in the open (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second bulb shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of octagonal main buttons 371 obtained by cutting off the four corners of a square in plan view, and a left base button 372L and a right sub button 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371. The sub button 372, the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are slidably held in the vertical direction, and the operation button unit base 373 inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate body 310, and the operation button unit base 373 A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface and an operation button unit Color LED375a which is fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 Tobesu 373 is provided with an operation button unit substrate 375 in which a plurality mounted on an upper surface, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in a plan view, and a main button housing recess 373a that can house the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the vertical direction to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and the sub A pair of sub button housing recesses 373e capable of housing the button 372 from above, and formed at the diagonal upper corner of the long axis A plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and a plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall part 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having a lower surface opened by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. A main button housing recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a is formed with a thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and is also formed by the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical light guide opening 373d. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

  As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape with an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. The light is emitted from the LEDs 375a of the operation button unit board 375 so that the entire surface of the main button 371 can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal outer shape similar to that of the main button lens 371, whereas the main button base 371b is a cone whose lower end is narrowed downward from a substantially middle portion in the vertical direction. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation unit button base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this example pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The main button sensor 376 detects the operation after entering. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371 c is activated. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodating recess 373e in the operation button unit base 373, and the sub button lens 372a is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b and the bottom surface of the sub button accommodating recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs down in the front-rear direction across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall 372e that hangs down from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure, and the main button lens 371 a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c into which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the diagonal of the long axis. The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. In addition, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctioned, The plate body 310 can be easily detached and replaced from above. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, and a lower portion. A box-like speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position to the rear of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 at a position on the right side of the front face in a front view. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320. It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it has become possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in previous gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball that has been played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by a ball passage cover 191 that closes the ball passage passage opening 110. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the plate unit main body 320 to the lower side of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left portion in front view, A second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotation shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotation motion of the rotation shaft 415 to a slide motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Inserted and fixed to 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko machine 1, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1 so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to 5. Thus, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410 and can easily perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable in the rotation operation. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 passes is formed at the center. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the single button 421 is supported in a swingable manner. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

  Further, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a slanted ball shape, and the cam contact portion of the slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the retracted state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanted cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the state described above, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 also rotates accordingly, so as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 moves in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (outer front surface). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 by the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. Then, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650 as shown in FIGS. The tension of the hitting ball desired by the player can be obtained by adjusting the tension shown in FIG. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 62 and FIG. In this example, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball communication rod 343 of the back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position that substantially faces the spherical inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h moves rightward in front view. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper portion (right end portion in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f from the right end portion, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e The outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f are surrounded by the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to return to the fourth inclined surface 311d disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. Once entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored effectively using the entire storage tray 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop paying out the game ball, or the game ball launching operation at the ball launcher 650 is stopped, and the game is interrupted. Can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of this example, so that the ball inlet 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and a prize ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 is awarded. When a game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 arranged between the ball unit 800 and the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800 is stopped. The ball launching device 650 stops the game ball launching operation. In particular, when the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to distribute the game balls from the storage tray 311 below the tray unit 300. The container (for example, dollar box) needs to be discharged to. In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is operated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so that there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves and the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311 moves. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes through the ball outlet path 393 from the ball outlet 321g to the dish unit. It can discharge | emit below 300 (refer FIG. 62 (B)). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Accordingly, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 111) is activated and the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball is stopped even though the hitting operation is stopped, and the game may not be continued. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game that is in big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal port 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and there are almost no game balls on the first inclined surface 311a, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b, which is reflected from the outer peripheral wall 311h and flows in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launch operation of the ball launcher 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without paying attention to the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state where game balls are continuously paid out, such as during a big hit game.

  In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. The ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower as viewed in the right direction (sphere supply port 342). Thus, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step becomes larger as it goes to the right in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the game ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced to cause clogging of the balls. Since it has an elongated rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62B).

  In addition, in the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341, the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage dish 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. In addition to being able to prevent the lowering, the game balls flowing in from the top promote the lateral movement of the lower game balls (especially the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340), and naturally Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, the storage tray 300 of the present example allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the shelf of the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are caused to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game ball in the plate 311 and the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the front-rear direction of the unit frame 451, a terminal plate support portion 451d that protrudes leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery that is above the center in the vertical direction Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decorative substrate and is supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and the end of the glass decorative substrate 453 is fixed to the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454. And a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

  In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451 a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 can appropriately decorate the light emission between the two glass plates 452 by causing the LED 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453 to emit light appropriately, and has an atmosphere different from conventional pachinko machines ( A pachinko machine 1 having a gaming window 101 (with a mood) can be provided.

[1-2E. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before a crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the lower side, but the half of the open side of the post-crime projection 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the pre-crime projection piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 452.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back side of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 75 is a perspective view as seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. .

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame excluding the game board 4 Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in 3 and a power supply board 1136 are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 71) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the upper sides and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower sides and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side portion of the front surface is bent with the long side ends of the upper reinforcing metal plate 141 attached and fixed to the rear surface of the upper side portion of the door frame 5 facing rearward. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back toward the rear at both long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also works well, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 for allowing a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in a lock device 1000 (described later) attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 to protrude forward is opened. In addition, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projection piece 157 of the pivot side reinforcement sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the lower side position of the panel positioning projection 576 on the front side pivot side side part. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side flat portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement section 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed at the approximate center of the game board placement section 512, the game board 4 is provided with a passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in the base plate 4. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 71) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76) which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 at a side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. In other words, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided so as to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connection window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) that is linked to the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end surface of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle through opening 521. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed extending from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then going downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward from the above-described launcher mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is formed in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball removal connection opening 530 which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full unit 900 (see FIG. 71), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper side of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear side of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 75) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided at 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 in a rearward direction substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and that is provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the periphery of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to protrude inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 67), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably mounted on the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the projecting width dimension to the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 has a width dimension that forms the cover body supporting cylinder portion 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear protruding portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 68) into which a locking projection 1004 (described later) of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above, below, and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only by the upper and middle screws, but also by a screw fixing portion 1003 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the locking device 1000 can be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the pivot support side rear wall 546 on the pivot support side rear wall 546, and the spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 104). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engaging protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 106) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546, and the rear end of the shaft support side by the engagement protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The surface wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 of the cover body 1250 (see FIGS. 74 and 139), and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in the figure. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the responsible person having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 67) into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 25) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base main body 110 bent rearward are formed. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 110d with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that the unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protruding piece 110d and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 are formed to invade. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

[1-3A. Schematic configuration of game board]
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the front component member, the game panel, and the panel holder in the game board in the assembled state, and is a cross-sectional view shown in FIG. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel, the panel holder, and the like exploded and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed obliquely from the rear. Further, FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board through the game window.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment includes a transparent plate-like gaming panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the gaming panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and the gaming panel 600 through the panel holder 630. The front component 601 is attached to the front so as to surround the game area 605, and the function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) is fixed to the rear side of the front component 601. On the surface of the gaming panel 600, various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 605. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630 after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 is formed with a connecting passage portion 609 connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end portion thereof, and a foul port adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. In addition, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop portion 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. The security protrusion 608 overlaps with the rear end protrusion 475 of the security rear end projecting on the security cover 470 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 474 protruding from the security cover 470 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlaps vertically. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to be fitted into a board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, after inserting the positioning recess 611 from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576, The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, the game board stopper 614 that is free in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end portion is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. . Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the gaming board 4 in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the gaming board 4 (more precisely, A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component 601.) A fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for hanging the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 81). reference).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the game board 4 has an outer shape in which notch portions 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted obliquely below the side of the foul port 610. A passage notch 613 is formed. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for applying a certificate check certificate is provided. Further, a function display seal 649 is affixed to the upper side of the lower right certificate stamp affixing portion 615 of the front component 601.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various gaming devices (for example, general winning ports 2004, 2101, starting ports 2001, 2002, grand winning ports 2003, etc.) provided in the gaming area 605 are located downstream A liquid crystal control board 3181 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151, etc.) as a display device arranged substantially at the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 which can be guided in alignment with A peripheral board box 622 in which the peripheral control board 4140 is accommodated is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction that is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. Formed), and a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  The board substrate holder 623 has a main control board box 624 for storing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186, a power board 1136, and the like provided in a board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal plate 625 for connection is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component / game panel / panel holder / panel back plate]
Next, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 600 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 630, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball into the game area 605 and defining the outer periphery of the game area 605 disposed on the front side of the panel holder 630. It mainly includes a front component member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

  As shown in the figure, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 630, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 600 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 600 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . The gaming panel 600 is thinner than the panel holder 630 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when a failure nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 600 includes a plurality of fitting holes 600a that are formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and are formed of round holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 600b that is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b are disposed outside the game area 605 and are positioned with respect to the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 600c each having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step portion 600c is formed by cutting out substantially half of the thickness of the game panel 600, and is disposed outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

  The game panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 601b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 600d.

  Further, the gaming panel 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with the center accessory 2300, the attacker unit 2000, and the like (see FIGS. 159 and 160). In addition, fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. Note that the openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and since the outer periphery of the gaming panel 600 is connected, the strength of the gaming panel 600 is determined by the opening 600e. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

  The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. The panel holder 630 has a thickness of a member (for example, a game board base) made of wooden plywood in the game board of a conventional pachinko machine. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 630 includes a holding step portion 630a that holds the gaming panel 600 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. It mainly includes a through-hole 630b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 600, and the front surface of the gaming panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding inner side 630a has a front inner peripheral surface of a size that allows a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) to be formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600. This clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 600 expands and contracts relatively due to a temperature change or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the long hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, and forwards from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. A plurality of protruding pins 630c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the game panel 600 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the long holes 600b of the gaming panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the gaming panel 600 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that are engaged with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claws 630d are disposed on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 and correspond to the upper engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. The holding step 630a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engagement piece 630e is disposed in the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. In a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 600c of the panel 600 to be inserted is formed, the panel 600 extends along the front surface of the panel holder 630 toward the upper side (center side) by a predetermined amount. The game panel 600 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630 by engaging the engagement step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engagement claws 630d and the engagement pieces 630e.

  Further, the panel holder 630 includes a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 630f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so that the center in the vertical direction is slightly below the lower side and the outer peripheral edge. Is provided. The mounting support portion 630g causes the rear surface of the panel holder 630 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 630g. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  Further, the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. And a locking portion 630i that is disposed so as to penetrate through the receiving recess 630h in the front-rear direction and that can lock a locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. The holder 630 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j that are arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recessed portion 630h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding forward from a fixing portion 621a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 621) formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 630j. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  The mounting hole 630j has a large diameter and a small diameter so that the inner diameter of the hole is mixed, and depending on the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be fixed, 630j may be used.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 630l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 630 is reduced by the thinned portions 630l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these thinning portions 630l are not formed in a predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 630 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 630 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface. The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 630 is formed with a thinned portion 630 l so that the mounting holes 630 j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 630. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 630 is formed with a obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning portion 630m corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, an opening 630n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 630o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided at the lower portion of the panel holder 630.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 so as to cover the thinned portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing back portion 635 are accommodated in the housing recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. A positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a weight-reducing concave portion 635d that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Similarly to the panel holder 630, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 630n of the panel holder 630, the communication hole 630o, and the boss insertion hole 630f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 630 h of the panel holder 630, and the locking claw 635 c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 630 i of the panel holder 630, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 630. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 630b over substantially the entire circumference. An attachment hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes allows a predetermined member to be attached and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the gaming panel 600 in the present example, the gaming panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claws 630d and the engaging pieces 630e, By engaging the engagement step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the gaming panel 600, and the gaming panel 600 and the front side of the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 600 in the state where the game panel 600 is held in the panel holder 630 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting apparatus, and to install the obstacle nail planting apparatus. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component member 601, the position of the obstacle nail, the prize opening, etc. is changed depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing gaming panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 630 and the front constituent member 601 can be used as common parts. The panel holder 630, the front constituent member 601 and the like can be made recyclable and the gaming panel 600 can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a game board 4 that can be used for various types of machines by simply replacing them.

  Further, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various mounting units such as the back unit 2000 and the board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear side of the panel holder 630 depending on the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 630 is designed so as to correspond to the position of the mounting hole 630j, so that the panel holder 630 is common to the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model. It can be made into parts.

  In the present embodiment, in the game board 4, a transparent game panel 600 that forms the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630. However, in the same manner as a conventional pachinko machine, 600 may be integrated with the panel holder 630 and may be formed of wooden plywood such as a veneer board.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for panel]
Next, the detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. This board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630. As shown in the figure, the board holder 623 has a box shape with the front and upper sides open, and the bottom is the front side at the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this case, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600 can be received and discharged downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and beside the main control board box mounting portion 623a (on the right side in the rear view). A sealed portion 623b corresponding to the sealed portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 is formed. A drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is the main control board box mounting portion 623a. It is sealed to the horizontal sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 It can be visually confirmed whether or not it has been illegally removed.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display board 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and a second special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment SEG2. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and graphics, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and graphics as special symbols, the first start of the attacker unit 2000 described later When a game ball wins the mouth 2001, the segment indicator SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. When a game ball wins the second start port 2002, the segment indicator SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. It has become.

  LED 1 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643a, LED 2 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643b, LED 3 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, and LED 4 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball won to the first starting port 2001 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights or blinks with the number of the game balls won as the number of reserves. Yes. Specifically, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both the indicators 643 are lit and the number of the holding balls is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the first special symbol memory display Both devices 643 flash. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second starting port 2002 is not used in the special symbol change display, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. It has become. Specifically, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both of the indicators 644 are turned on and the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the second special symbol memory display Both units 644 flash.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lighting color as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through a gate 2201A of the gate member 2200A or a gate 2201B of the gate member 2200B, which will be described later, a predetermined normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Yes.

  Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. When the game balls that have passed through the gates 2201A and 2201B are not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 645 and the blade 2337 is opened / closed) For the game balls that are not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display immediately after passing through the gates 2201A and 2201B), the normal symbol memory display 646 is turned on with the number of the game balls passed as the holding number. . Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the color to be lit as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability variation or a small hit.

  Further, the LED 11 is assigned a first security lamp 648a, and the LED 12 is assigned a second security lamp 648b. These security lamps are configured to notify that a certain security abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol storage display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol storage display 646, a game status display 647, and a security display 648 are allocated to each segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage A configuration in which the display 646, the game status display 647, and the security display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. Going on. In addition, these LEDs 1 to LED may be assigned different functions depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, for example, a round display for notifying the number of times (number of rounds) that the grand prize winning opening 2003 is opened when winning a jackpot A lamp may be assigned.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 each variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the game status display 647, and the security display 648, the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned thereto are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol storage display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the security display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). The front component 601 is provided with segment display openings 601c at positions corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, so that the contents displayed by these segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front component member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver, into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 649. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface by grouping it into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display, and in the non-game area of the game board 4. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing portion 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. The first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol change display by winning the game ball to the first start port 2001 are displayed. For example, when a winning prize is received at the first starting port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the first special symbol memory display 643 sets the number of winning game balls as a holding number. Lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the display of variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644. These second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2002 are displayed. For example, when a game ball starts winning a prize at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or displays the number of winning game balls as the number of reserves in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display due to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002 are shown. As a result, the player can visually observe the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649, thereby changing the special symbol display by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002. Various information regarding can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 to be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 variably displays the presence / absence of opening / closing of the blade 2337 as a predetermined normal symbol. It becomes easy. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. A star is printed so as to be distinguished from the game status display 647, the game status display 647, and the security display 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gates 2201A and 2201B can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gates 2201A and 2201B, the normal symbol display 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol variably, or the normal symbol memory display 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. To do. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information related to the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the security indicator 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be seen by the game status indicator 647 and the security indicator 648, respectively, as shown in FIG. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the security indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the security indicator 648 can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display 647 and the security display 648.

  As described above, the function display seal 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. 88 and 89, this seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. In addition, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker pasting portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIGS. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the recess 601f.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from erroneously attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. Thereby, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko machine, the development period of the pachinko machine has been shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, when adding a 5-round display lamp that lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the special winning opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is five, The specification change of the pachinko machine 1 when the number is reduced from two to one can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. Thereby, for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 determines whether the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. The seal management number 649a can be confirmed by visual observation, and the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being attached. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[1-3B. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the ball hitting device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. FIG. 90 is an overall perspective view (A) of the hit ball launching device 650, a perspective view (B) with the launch motor portion removed, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hit ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 93 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball hitting device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is being operated. 95 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) from the front, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball hitting device 650. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at the approximate center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. In addition, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In this working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. Is provided on a mounting portion 660 that protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the working piece opening 657 by a stop pin 659. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner at 690, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a protruding manner is provided at the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hit ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through-holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the swinging piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed in the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back side thereof, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front side. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and an enlarged motor mounting boss 661 that extends forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 that are integrally formed and are accommodated inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor contact protrusion 691 mesh with each other and the ball hitting device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main structure of the ball hitting device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided at the lower back of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts against the front side wall in the slide direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one space inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92A, the left space inner wall Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described. 93, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when moved toward the left inner wall in FIG. 92A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 94) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide in the slide member storage space 656 of the slide member 710.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the hitting ball launching device 650. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanting cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, a player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is determined. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. It is.

[1-3C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is protruded. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 74, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 97, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball collapse projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to this embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which spheres flow down in two rows by a partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-described ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two paths 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed at the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball path unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball path unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball path unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connection structure of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is an easy-to-understand illustration of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841, and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of this example, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface (the surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. Left and right bent passage portions 772b bent in the direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back), and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body. Since it is in a position away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 of the frame 3 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 to the back surface side, a winning ball guide projection protruding from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546 561 and the ball dropping passage 772 are bent in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 inserts a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to prevent clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, in order to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in a circular arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 105B). The state shown in FIG. 105 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 105A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800, FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member, and FIG. FIG. 109 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  106, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, an intra-prize ball relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear side region) of the unit sub-plate 825. And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. In other words, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 formed at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but on the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  In the distribution space 805, a sprocket 807 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 to be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction path 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 The guided sphere is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In this engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attachment / detachment button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the other vertical side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted at one end to the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and a shaft that is drilled in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is provided on the unit sub-plate 825 above the second gear 844. A shaft 848 press-fitted into the formed shaft hole 849 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end portion of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with each other about the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detection means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. It is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted into the gear cover 866 side. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later) is provided. A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked up and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Furthermore, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824, an engaging protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. Thus, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 113 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the main body of the box is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  Further, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 that opens over the entire bottom surface is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905, and the bottom surface swinging plate 907 is closed so that the bottom surface swinging plate 907 can swing freely. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivot projection 911 as viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 projects downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Accordingly, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 114, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. Therefore, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. In addition, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance path 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball that collides with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920, and The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the exit 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. When the number of payout balls is about the normal, the spring 913 has a strong resilience, so that the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock. As shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational drive of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 120 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 121 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and Fig. 124 is for a door frame. Is a front view for explaining the action of Do杆 1040 and the main frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 125 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, a locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a locking base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment by making the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. A screwing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the upper and middle sides 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540 and is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking projections 1004 are formed so as to project from the upper end portion and the intermediate portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. Can be fixed. The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment board 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It has come to be able to do. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 125B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protrusion 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the protruding piece 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. It is intended to prevent sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet slot in the rivet slot 1042 is formed. A guide protrusion 1043 protrudes below 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding motion of the upper hook member 1051 is smooth and smooth. It is for making.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connection hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper side and the lower side are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with screws 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the locking device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are raised by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as that shown in FIG. 124A), but the hook portion 1054 is in the raised state. , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, since the hook state 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 forward. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 124A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the door frame 5 is forcibly pressed against the main body frame 3, so that the lower side inclined part of the door frame hook part 1041 becomes the hook cover 158. Since the door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked again again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 close the closed space Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hooks 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed near the upper portion of the lock mounting piece 1008 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. A structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

[1-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. 126 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 130 is a front view as seen from the front side of the substrate holder for the frame which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a plan view showing the connection relationship between the boards provided in the board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 136 shows the payout control board and the board unit. of FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is removed as shown in FIGS. 76 to 80). FIG. 138 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIGS. Various substrates such as a door relay substrate 1102, a power supply substrate box 1103, a terminal substrate box 1104, a payout control substrate box 1105, a main drawer relay substrate 1107, and a sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the resin-molded frame substrate holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 overlapping in the front-rear direction, and the main drawer relay The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high-temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 that houses the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 in order to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 according to the present embodiment has a shield heat dissipation function, as shown in FIGS. The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. Heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat sink 1106 can be kept small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat sink 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, since the influence of the noise by electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, the malfunctioning of the payout control board 1186 accommodated in the payout control board box 1105 by the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat sink 1106 is not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as that of the present embodiment between the lower and upper substrate boxes.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 130). A relay board portion 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102, and on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 1110, the back surface of the door relay substrate 1102 is formed. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. Also, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed at one end of the power supply board box 1103 and are fastened with screws (not shown). Projected.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, a space is formed between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and hold the accommodated wirings together.

  Note that a large amount of rearward protrusion is formed from the other end side of the region to which the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 130). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of the one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed in the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hung on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (the left end side in FIG. 127) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball path 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop opening 629 (see FIG. 75). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed to be spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and provided. The junction guide hole 1126 and the guide hole 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate position of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. Insertion guide protrusions 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 are inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the attachment hole portion 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has a multi-pin connector type internal connection terminal. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power board box 1103 attached to the power board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with engagement locking holes 1135 that engage with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, on the portion of the power supply board 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side portion and the lower left portion in FIG. 133), as shown in FIG. A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electrical devices of the pachinko machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The ground connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic ground wires provided in the pachinko machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko machine 1 is grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector to do. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the frame ground. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board (for example, a liquid crystal control board 3181 housed in the peripheral board box 622 or a main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and a region having a high step is an attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long payout control board box 1105 together with the above-mentioned payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower part of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the payout control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  Further, in the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 132, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and payout control board terminals 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a are used for various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal. The information signal is mainly sent from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connection of the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. The The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko machine 1, for example. . The power ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power board 1136, and the other connector is the power board 1136. The wiring from one earth connector 1140 of the plurality of earth connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal plate 1150b to be relayed are accommodated, and these are conventionally accommodated in separate substrate boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In FIG. 4, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. Reference will be made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 132), and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Accordingly, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking projection 1117. Can be installed easily. In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Further, the dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (the right side in FIG. 132). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (the left side in FIG. 132).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when the dispensing control board 1186 is inspected, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

  In addition, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) enters the various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are provided in the drawer mounting area 1120 so as to protrude. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed in rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 127) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  Although the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, in the case of the present embodiment, of the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board that is exchanged with the change of the game board 4 is used. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 3181, a power board 1136 housed in the power board box 1103, an external terminal board 1150 housed in the terminal board box 1104, and a delivery control board box 1105. The dispense control board 1186 thus assembled is preassembled into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3 by a simple operation. Improve work efficiency compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of frame 3. It can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 138, as shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is removed from the main body frame when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The count switch connector 830a is connected to the wiring from the count switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. The harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed in the approximate center on the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1303, the standing wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It performs the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are matched and fixed with a screw (not shown), whereby the cover body 1250 is attached to the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

[1-6A. Other embodiments of cover body]
The cover body 1250 (hereinafter referred to as “the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 74 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 as is apparent from FIG. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment, viewed from the back in a state in which the cover body is opened, and FIG. 140 is attached with the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached, and is a perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the present invention is attached and is viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body. FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body according to the second embodiment removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the dispensing control board box that is in contact with the lower side of the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 146 shows the second It is the perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body which concerns on embodiment, FIG. 147 is a rear view for demonstrating the effect | action of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd embodiment, FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. Note that in FIGS. 139 to 150, the same reference numerals are given to configurations that exhibit the same functions as the configurations displayed in the previous drawings.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above. The shape of the provided dish unit 300 is also slightly different. Furthermore, the structure of the main body frame 3 is also a point of a locking wall 569 having a later-described locking hole 568, locking hole 569a, and guide hole 569b formed on the open end side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 (see FIG. 144), and The third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 constituting the rear side wall are different in that the positions of the cutout portions 221 extend downward (see FIG. 140). Also in the configuration, the only difference is that the contact lower step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIG. 139 and FIG. 144 is attached to the board substrate holder 623 attached to the lower back of the game board 4 as in the embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 139 and FIG. 144, illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

  First, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The cover body 1300 is formed of a synthetic resin in a dish shape with a slightly vertically long peripheral side wall standing up (a large number of air holes are formed in the upper half of the side wall portion and the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (four in the illustrated case) pivot pins 1301 are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side and inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on the main body frame 3 and pivotally supported. An engagement piece 1302 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is integrally formed slightly closer to the upper side of the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. As with the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment, the shaft support pin 1301 and the engagement piece 1302 are inserted into the cover body support cylinder 575 to insert the cover body 1300 into the main body. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by being pivotally supported by the frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engaging piece 1302 is locked in the cover body engaging groove 785. The back surface of various components including the main control board box 624 can be protected. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not simply provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be illegally opened in the closed state. Since the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the main control board box 624 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered, the RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 is connected to a test terminal for testing. The contact operation opening 1303 is provided at a position corresponding to 624b and 624c, and the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is contacted with the front end side of the lower side wall of the cover body 1300 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, a characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to these second embodiments will be described below.

  First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape at the upper part of the lower contact side wall 1306 of the lower side of the cover body 1300, and the size thereof is as shown in FIG. The RAM clear switch 624a provided exposed to the outside of the main control board box 624 and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection equipment is connected are opened. In addition, a standing wall 1304 and an abutting protrusion 1305 that project against the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state project from the inside of the connection operation opening 1303. The standing wall 1304 is formed to be relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the contact protrusion 1305 is provided to be relatively low along the one side opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the standing wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent unauthorized actions on the main control board box 624 by inserting an unauthorized tool from the connection operation opening 1303.

  Next, the contact lower side wall 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall 1306 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact. Therefore, on the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached, as shown in FIG. A contact low step surface 1181a is formed which is formed to be lower than the surface. Accordingly, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in the payout control board box attachment region of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 as shown in FIG. In a state of being attached over the attachment region 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the attachment region 1143, and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. For this reason, the abutting low step surface 1181a which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 is abutted and covered by the abutting lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300, so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Next, a configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an elliptical lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is opened near the lower side of the cover body 1300. A threaded portion 1310 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 1309 is passed through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 in the lock hole 1308. The cylinder lock 1309 has a lock shaft 1311 projecting from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is a screw that is drilled in a lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by passing through the hole 1314 and fastening with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the locking piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting and rotating a key (owned by a manager in charge of the game hall) into the cylinder lock 1309. Yes. In addition, a guide projection 1316 for guiding opening and closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is provided on the lower portion of the lock hole 1308 so as to project inward. Furthermore, a screwing hole 1307 for screwing a screw is formed in the upper part on the open side of the cover body 1300 and above and below the engagement piece 1302.

  On the other hand, a stop hole 568, a lock hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the above-described screw stop hole 1307, lock piece 1313, and guide protrusion 1316. This configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As described above, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower portions of 567 (up and down with the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770 sandwiched). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the vertical center line direction of the main body frame 3 at a lower portion of the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569. A locking hole 569a and a guide hole 569b are formed on the upper and lower sides. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 passes therethrough, and the reinforcing wall 569 around the front side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

  Thus, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the guide protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b and the lock piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked as shown in FIG. It will be in the state which penetrated the hole 569a. In this state, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1309 and turning it, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), the locking piece 1313 rotates 90 degrees, and one end of the locking piece 1313 is connected to the front side of the locking wall 569. Engage. For this reason, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, the screw holes that match in the closed state are used to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3. The upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing screws (not shown) in 1307 and the retaining holes 568. In addition, a cylinder lock may be provided also in the upper part of the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder lock up and down.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of this embodiment, the rear of the discharge port 730). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 and the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. It is easy to grasp, so it is easy to load and stack, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, it protrudes from the back of the opponent's pachinko machine on the back of the pachinko machine 1 lined up It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about wiring to be performed. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment has the same effect as shown in FIG.

  In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is that the cover body 1300 is the same as the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, the upper and lower portions may be deformed by heat if the closed state is maintained only at the center of the cover body 1300. It was configured to hold. As a second reason, as described above, the lower side wall 1306 of the cover body 1300 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the dispensing control board box 1105. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower part of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper part of the cover body 1300 must be closed. For this second reason, in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion in particular, a locking device such as the cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, any locking device that can be unlocked only by a game hall administrator may be used. ) Is desirable.

  The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above. The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is configured such that the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the abutting lower side wall 1306 abuts and covers the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the dispensing control board box 1105 attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, the dispensing control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The substrate box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame substrate holder 1101. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, not only an illegal act on the main control board box 624 covered by the cover body 1300 but also an illegal action on the dispensing control board box 1105 not covered by the cover body 1300 is prevented. be able to. Even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when software or the like runs out of control and recovers. Further, a standing wall 1304 and a contact protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back of the game board 4.

  Furthermore, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the same vertical plane when viewed from the rear end wall of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely refreshing. Because it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and superimpose, and when it is actually installed on the island base of the amusement hall, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is lined up behind the back of the opponent's pachinko machine It can be installed very smoothly without worrying about the wiring that protrudes from the top.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. 151 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally right front, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally left front, and FIG. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the left rear, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a frame-shaped front component 601 that defines an outer periphery of a game area 605 into which a game ball is driven. A gaming panel 600 arranged to close the gaming area 605 on the rear side of the front constituent member 601, and a function display arranged on the outer side of the gaming area 605 and below the front constituent member 601 on the right side of the out port 606. A unit 640, an attacker unit 2000 that is disposed approximately at the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 605, above the out port 606 and supported by the front surface of the gaming panel 600, and along the outer periphery of the gaming area 605 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 The side decoration member 2100 that is arranged and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 600, and a slight increase from the center in the vertical direction in the gaming area 605 A gate member 2200A disposed on the right side and provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 600; a gate member 2200B disposed on the left side slightly above the center in the vertical direction in the gaming area 605; A frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged at a substantially central portion of 605 and supported by the game panel 600, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and the game panel 600 and center on the rear side of the back unit 3000 It mainly includes a liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means that is attached so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the accessory 2300 and can display a predetermined effect image. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 600 will be described in detail. The center accessory 2300 can also be called a frame-shaped decorative body.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
First, the attacker unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a perspective view in which each device mounted on the game panel is disassembled for each member and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from the oblique front. The attacker unit 2000 of this example is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed at the lower portion of the game panel 600 at the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of entrances (winning ports) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, a first start port 2001 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a rectangular large winning port 2003 disposed on the right side of the first start port 2001 and extending greatly in the left-right direction, and a large winning port 2003 And three general winning ports 2004 arranged on the left side of the first start port 2001 and the left side of the first start port 2001, respectively.

  The first start port 2001 is open on the upper side, and game balls can be received (winning) at all times. The special winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported at the lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, closes the special winning opening 2003 to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and rotates so that the upper side is inclined forward ( In the state shown in FIG. 158, the special winning opening 2003 is opened so that game balls can be received. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is received (starts winning) at the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002 described later. According to the lottery special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), it opens and closes by driving the attacker solenoid 2016 (see FIG. 220). As shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2004 is opened upward, so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

[2-2. Side decoration member]
The side decoration member 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 159. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the side decorative member as viewed obliquely from the front. The side decoration member 2100 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e in which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 600. Thus, the game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. In addition, a decorative portion 2103 having a light transmissive (semi-transparent) window portion is provided on the front side (player side) of the side decorative member 2100, and a light emitting decorative substrate (not shown) disposed behind the decorative portion 2103 is provided. ) Can be decorated with light.

[2-3. Gate member]
As shown in FIG. 157, the gate member 2200A is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600f formed on the right side of the game panel 600 in the right and left direction and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. The game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. The gate member 2200A has a gate 2201A having a width that allows only one game ball to pass therethrough, and a gate sensor 2202A disposed in the gate 2201A detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201A. ing. On the other hand, the gate member 2200B is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600g formed on the left side of the game panel 600 from the left and right center and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front. The gate member 2200B has a gate 2201B having a width that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the gate sensor 2202B arranged in the gate 2201B detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201B. ing.

[2-4. Center character]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 157 and 160 to 182. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the diagonally front exploded for each main member, and FIG. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of an object frame member disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 163 is a perspective view of a base plate of the center accessory viewed obliquely from the front; and FIG. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the starting port unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the driving mechanism of the starting port unit. FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the main part of the drive mechanism section viewed obliquely from behind.

  In addition, FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the sub liquid crystal unit as viewed obliquely, FIG. 169 is a side view of the sub liquid crystal unit as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 170 is an exploded view of the sub liquid crystal unit. FIG. 171 is a front view showing a state in which the front of the sub liquid crystal unit is shielded by the first accessory unit and the second accessory unit, and FIG. 172 is a sub liquid crystal unit. It is a front view which shows the state by which the front of was open | released.

  Further, FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the first accessory unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the first accessory unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the right movable unit of the single-function unit being disassembled and viewed from an oblique front; FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the second functional unit from an oblique front; and FIG. FIG. 178 is a right side view showing the movable unit of the second accessory unit, and FIG. 179 is an exploded front view of the drive unit. 180 is a perspective view in which the movable part of the second accessory unit is disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 181 is a perspective view in which the drive part is seen obliquely from the rear. FIG. 182 is a right side view showing the operation of the movable unit with respect to the sub liquid crystal unit. .

  As shown in FIG. 157, the center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the frame occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. The gate members 2200 </ b> A and 220 </ b> B described above are arranged between the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2300 and the outer periphery of the game area 605.

  As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the center accessory 2300 includes a frame-shaped decorative frame unit 2310, a start port unit 2330 having a second start port 2002 disposed at the lower right thereof, and a decorative frame unit 2310. A frame shape having a sub liquid crystal unit 2350 mounted on the upper surface of the rear surface and visible through the opening window 2310a, and a left movable unit 2378 and a right movable unit 2379 disposed on the rear side of the decorative frame unit 2310 and visible through the opening window 2310a. Display of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 in cooperation with the first accessory unit 2370, the transparent protective plate 2360 for closing the back side of the first accessory unit 2370, the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379. And a second accessory unit 2400 capable of shielding the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the decorative frame unit 2310 includes a frame-shaped base plate 2311 and a plurality of decorative members 2309 arranged on the front surface or the back side of the base plate 2311. As shown in FIG. 163, the base plate 2311 has a substantially annular shape, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the base plate 2311 through a warp passage, which will be described later, is rotated in the left-right direction on the lower inner peripheral surface. A lower rolling surface 2311a that can be moved is formed. Further, below the lower rolling surface 2311a, a game ball that has entered a chance opening 2372a (see FIG. 173) formed in the lower part of the first accessory unit 2370 is placed in a game area 605 below the center accessory 2300. A chance outlet 2311b is provided penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, a pedestal portion 2311c for mounting the start port unit 2330 is provided on the lower right side of the base plate 2311 so as to protrude obliquely downward to the right. A passage 2311d for guiding the game ball won in the second starting port 2002 to the rear is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. An arc-shaped upper base plate 2322 (see FIG. 162) is provided on the upper portion of the base plate 2311 so as to protrude to the upper left.

  162, the decorative member 2309 disposed on the base plate 2311 includes a central front ornament 2312 disposed on the upper front surface of the base plate 2311 and a lower side of the lower rolling surface 2311a (the back side of the base plate 2311). Shelf left ornament 2313 and shelf right ornament 2314 arranged on the left side, blue left blue ornament 2315 arranged on the left front surface of the base plate 2311, upper left covering ornament 2316 arranged on the upper side, and a warp to be described later A warp passage decoration 2317 arranged on the lower front side of the passage, a shelf right decoration 2318 arranged on the lower right front of the base plate 2311, an upper right decoration 2319 arranged on the upper right front of the base plate 2311, and a shelf right decoration 2318 and an upper right blue ornament 2320 arranged on the upper side of 2318. The decorative members other than the back left ornament 2313 and the back right ornament 2314 are on the front of the game panel 600. Also it provided to project the player side. That is, the game ball is configured not to enter the decorative frame unit 2310 from a portion other than the warp passage. The right side surface of the upper right blue ornament 2320 is provided with a second out port 606a into which a game ball rolling in the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 can enter. The game ball that has entered the mouth 606a is discharged from the game area 605 in the same manner as the out mouth 606 provided at the lower end of the game area 605. Also, on the upper side of the warp passage decoration 2317, a warp entrance 2321 into which a game ball rolling in the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300 can be placed is disposed. It is configured to guide backwards.

  In addition, the decorative frame unit 2310 includes a plurality of lenses 2323 arranged in an arc shape and a left LED substrate 2324 that is arranged behind the lens 2323 and emits light in order to illuminate and decorate each decorative member 2309. An LED substrate 2325 and an upper LED substrate 2326 are provided. Further, on the rear side of the upper right LED board 2325, a relay board 2327 for relaying drive signals to these light emitting boards is disposed. In addition, a reflection plate 2328, a diffusion sheet 2329, and the like are also provided so that light is emitted from the entire decorative member 2309.

  Next, the start port unit 2330 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the start port unit 2330 is mounted on a pedestal portion 2311 c of a base plate 2311 (see FIG. 163), and includes a front decoration 2331 having a second start port 2002 opened on the right side. ing. The second starting port 2002 can be opened and closed by a single blade 2337, whereas when the blade 2337 rises substantially vertically, the second starting port 2002 cannot receive a game ball by the blade 2337. When the blade 2337 is expanded rightward (clockwise) (see FIG. 164), the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2002. That is, the second start port 2002 is a variable winning port that can be opened and closed by the blade 2337. A blade decoration 2338 is provided on the front surface of the blade 2337.

  In addition, a decoration base 2332 is provided on the rear side of the front decoration 2331. The decoration base 2332 includes a light transmissive red lens 2334, a base diffusion sheet 2335, and a lens diffusion sheet 2336, and the light emitted from the LED substrate 2333 disposed on the rear side is transmitted to the front decoration 2331. By irradiating, the front decoration 2331 is decorated with light emission. On the rear side of the LED board 2333, a driving mechanism 2339 for guiding the game ball that has entered the second out port 606a (see FIG. 160) and driving the blade 2337 is provided with the pedestal 2311c interposed therebetween. ing. As shown in FIG. 166, the drive mechanism portion 2339 includes an out ball passage base 2340 that forms a passage 2340a of a game ball that has entered the second out port 606a, and an out ball passage cover 2341 that closes the front surface of the passage 2340a. And. Further, on the rear side of the out ball passage base 2340, a start port solenoid 2344 attached by a solenoid base 2342 and a solenoid metal plate 2343, and a transmission portion 2345 for transmitting the operation of the start port solenoid 2344 to the blade 2337 are provided. Yes. As shown in FIG. 167, the transmission portion 2345 is connected to the plunger 2344a of the start port solenoid 2344, and is connected to the crank 2345a whose one end is rotatably supported, and a link connected to the other end of the crank 2345a. 2345b and a blade shaft 2345c supported rotatably and provided with a rotational force by the link 2345b. The blade 2337 attached to the tip of the blade shaft 2345c is rotated within a predetermined range. It is possible to make it. As shown in FIG. 166, the rear side and the lower side of the transmission portion 2345 are covered with a back cover 2346, and the left side of the start port solenoid 2344 is covered with a lower decoration 2348.

  In addition, a substrate cover 2347a is suspended from the lower front surface of the drive mechanism portion 2339, and a relay substrate 2347b is disposed on the back surface of the substrate cover 2347a. In addition, a second start port sensor 2349 is disposed in front of the out ball passage base 2340 so that a game ball won in the second start port 2002 can be detected.

  Next, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 includes a rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 2351 a and a liquid crystal including a support bar portion 2351 b that extends in the left-right direction from the upper end of the frame portion 2351 b and is attached to the upper part of the back surface of the base plate 2311. A holder 2351, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped liquid crystal body 2352 which is accommodated from the rear side in the frame portion 2351a and is visible through the opening window 2351c, and a liquid crystal cover 2353 which is disposed on the back surface of the frame portion 2351a and supports the back side of the liquid crystal body 2352. And a liquid crystal fastener 2354 that supports the lower portion of the liquid crystal main body 2352. In addition, a decoration 2355 is provided in the lower part of the front surface of the liquid crystal holder 2351, and a relay board 2356 that relays a drive signal to the liquid crystal main body 2352 is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal cover 2353. As shown in FIG. 169, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is disposed so as to be inclined so that the display screen (sub liquid crystal screen PNS) of the liquid crystal main body 2352 faces obliquely downward (player side).

  As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 includes the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 of the first accessory unit 2370 and the movable of the second accessory unit 2400. It is shielded by the unit 2401. That is, as shown in FIG. 171, in a state where the left movable unit 2378, the right movable unit 2379, and the movable unit 2401 are assembled in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is shielded and the player side On the other hand, when the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 and the movable unit 2401 are separated from each other as shown in FIG. 172, the front of the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is opened and the game It can be seen from the person side. Next, the first accessory unit 2370 and the second accessory unit 2400 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the first accessory unit 2370 includes a frame-like rear cover 2371 made of a transparent synthetic resin member, and a shelf arranged at the lower part on the front surface of the rear cover 2371. An upper stage 2372, a warp passage 2374 disposed on the upper left side of the upper shelf stage 2372, a left decoration 2375 disposed on the upper side of the warp passage 2374, and a right decoration 2376 disposed on the upper right side of the upper shelf stage 2372. Is provided. Here, on the shelf upper stage 2372, an upper stage rolling surface 2372b capable of rolling the game ball that has entered the inside of the first accessory unit 2370 through the warp passage 2374 in the left-right direction, and the upper stage rolling surface A substantially arc-shaped middle-stage rolling surface 2372c that is located on the front side of 2372b and is one step lower is formed. That is, the shelf upper stage 2372 forms a so-called stage. The middle rolling surface 2372c is higher than the lower rolling surface 2311a of the base plate 2311 (see FIG. 163) arranged on the front side thereof, and rolls on the upper rolling surface 2372b or the middle rolling surface 2372c. It is possible to make the game ball after flowing down to the lower rolling surface 2311a. Further, a chance opening 2372a into which a game ball can enter is provided in the wall portion on the back side of the interrupted rolling surface 2372c, and the game ball that has entered the chance opening 2372a is a chance outlet 2311b of the base plate 2311. Is to be released from. Further, an LED substrate 2373 that irradiates light toward the shelf upper stage 2372 is disposed on the back side of the shelf upper stage 2372, and the shelf upper stage 2372 can be decorated with light emission. The warp passage 2374 communicates with the warp inlet 2321 (see FIG. 161), and is configured to feed game balls that have entered the warp inlet 2321 from the left end side of the upper rolling surface 2372b.

  Also, a substantially arcuate cylindrical guide portion 2371a projecting forward is formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371 so as to face the left and right, and the left movable portion unit 2378 and the right movable portion unit are formed by the pair of guide portions 2371a. 2379 are supported so as to slide in an arc along the inner peripheral edge of the rear cover 2371, respectively. A flat protective plate portion 2371b is formed on the rear cover 2371, and the liquid crystal main body 2352 is protected by covering the sub liquid crystal screen PNS from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 175, the right movable unit 2379 disposed on the upper right side of the rear cover 2371 is provided with a front ornament 2384 having a pointed tip toward the center side of the rear cover 2371 and a rear side of the front ornament 2384. Back cover 2387, lens 2385 and diffusion sheet 2386 housed inside back cover 2387, lower member 2389 disposed below back cover 2387, and LED attached to the back surface of back cover 2387 And a substrate 2390. In other words, the back cover 2387 is provided with a plurality of openings (not shown), and light emitted from the LED substrate 2390 irradiates the front decoration 2384 through the diffusion sheet 2386 and the lens 2385, and thereby the front decoration 2384. Can be decorated with light emission. Further, an arc-shaped rack 2387a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the back cover 2387, and a shaft portion 2387b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed on the inner side thereof. In particular, the rearward extension portion of the shaft portion 2387b is fitted and inserted into a guide portion 2371a formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371 (see FIG. 174), and movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the push 2388. That is, the right movable unit 2379 is supported so as to move in an arc shape by sliding the shaft portion 2387b of the back cover 2387 along the inner peripheral surface of the guide portion 2371a. Note that the left movable unit 2378 has a symmetrical shape with the right movable unit 2379, but the configuration is the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 174, the rear cover 2371 is engaged with the rack 2387a of the left movable part unit 2378 and the right movable part unit 2379 on the outside of the guide part 2371a, and is supported rotatably in the axial direction. The gears 2381 are connected to motors 2380 fixed to the upper rear surface of the rear cover 2371, respectively. That is, when the motor 2380 is operated, power is transmitted to the rack 2387a of the back cover 2387 through the gear 2381, and the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 can be moved individually. Note that the front decoration 2384 in the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 has a sloping slope on the inner side surface, and when it moves to the shielding position (upper stop position), the sub liquid crystal in the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 The vicinity of the lower corner of the screen PNS is shielded (see FIG. 171). Moreover, the upper part of these inner side surfaces protrudes toward the inner side, and has a "<" shape when viewed from the front.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the second accessory unit 2400 includes an appearance position (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 182) in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 (see FIG. 182), and the sub liquid crystal unit. A movable unit 2401 that is supported so as to be rotatable between a retreat position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 182) above 2350, and a movable unit that houses the drive mechanism of the movable unit 2401 and has moved to the retreat position. A motor cover 2402 that can accommodate the latter half of the unit 2401, a drive unit 2403 that is a drive mechanism of the movable unit 2401, and a relay board that is disposed on the rear side of the motor cover 2402 and relays a drive signal to the drive unit 2403 2404.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the movable unit 2401 has a generally flat shape, and a front decoration 2406 having a decorative surface 2406 a on the front surface (the upper surface in the retracted position), A decorative frame 2407 in which a fitting recess 2407a for the front decoration 2406 is formed on the front surface, and a substrate cover 2410 disposed on the rear side (lower side in the retracted position) of the decorative frame 2407; Between the board cover 2410, there are an LED board 2409 that irradiates light toward the decorative frame 2407, and a reflector 2408 that limits the light emission direction so that the light emitted from the LED board 2409 does not leak from the surroundings. Is provided.

  A pair of arms 2411 are disposed on the back surface 2410 a of the substrate cover 2410. As shown in FIG. 178, these arms 2411 include an attachment portion 2411a attached to the upper end portion (the rear end portion in the retracted position) of the back surface 2410a, and a first arm portion extending perpendicularly to the back surface 2410a. 2411b, a second arm portion 2411c that is continuous with the first arm portion 2411b and bends with respect to the first arm portion 2411b to form a "<" shape, and an inner side from the tip (lower end) of the second arm portion 2411c. And a rotating shaft portion 2411d projecting in the direction. In addition, a through-hole penetrating in the left-right direction is provided at the center of the rotating shaft portion 2411d, and a pin 2420 (see FIG. 180) of the driving unit 2403 described later is inserted therein. Further, an engaging shaft 2411e that protrudes outward is formed at a boundary portion (that is, a bent portion) between the first arm portion 2411b and the second arm portion 2411c, and the second arm portion 2411c has a length that penetrates in the left-right direction. A hole 2411f is formed along the second arm portion 2411c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 and FIG. 181, the drive unit 2403 includes a motor holder 2415, a motor 2416 attached to the motor holder 2415, and a gear 2418 coupled to a rotation shaft of the motor 2416 via a shaft portion 2417. A pin 2419 fitted in a through hole 2418a provided at a position eccentric from the center of the gear 2418, a long pin 2420 provided through a cylindrical part 2415a provided at the lower part of the motor holder 2415, It has. Here, the pin 2419 is inserted into the long hole 2411f of the arm 2411, and the pin 2420 passes through the rotating shaft portion 2411d and the push 2421 of the arm 2411 and is provided on both sides of the motor cover 2402 (FIG. 177). The hole 2402a is inserted from the inside. As a result, when the motor 2416 operates, the gear 2418 rotates, and the arm 2411 (the entire movable unit 2401 including the arm 2411) is rotated around the pin 2420 by the pin 2419 provided eccentrically to the gear 2418. It is like that. Note that the engagement shaft 2411e formed on the arm 2411 is inside the arc-shaped long hole 2402b (arc-shaped long hole centering on the hole 2402a) provided on both side surfaces of the motor cover 2402 (FIG. 177). Thus, the arm 2411 is smoothly rotated, and the rotation range of the arm 2411 is restricted. Note that the gear 2418 is provided with a protruding piece 2418b protruding outward, and the position of the protruding piece 2418b is detected by the photosensor 2422 so that the movable unit 2401 is the appearance position (origin position). It is possible to grasp.

  By the way, as a general pachinko machine equipped with a movable decorative body, the movable decorative body is arranged behind the game panel, and an appearance position where the movable decorative body is visible through the opening window of the center frame and the outside of the opening window of the center frame ( Conventionally, a movable decorative body is moved up and down between a retreat position that is shielded by a game panel and disappears. However, according to this, it is necessary to secure a large space for shielding or retracting the movable decorative body in the game panel outside the center frame. As a result, the opening of the game panel, and the center frame inserted into the game panel are inserted. The size becomes relatively small, and for example, it is difficult to visually recognize various effects through the opening window of the center frame.

  On the other hand, in the second accessory unit 2400 of the present example, the movable unit 2401 is formed in a flat shape, the arm 2411 is extended from the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401, and the end of the arm 2411 It is configured to move (that is, rotate) along an arc around a rotation shaft portion 2411d formed on the side. For this reason, even if the size of the movable unit 2401 is relatively large, when the movable unit 2401 is moved to the retracted position (see the solid line in FIG. 182), the movable unit 2401 becomes long in the front-rear direction, and is a relatively thin surface. The lower surface (tip surface) portion of the unit unit 2401 faces the game panel 600. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the area necessary for shielding the movable unit 2401.

  In addition, when the movable unit 2401 moves from the appearance position (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 182) to the retracted position, the decorative surface 2406a changes from the front side to the upper side, that is, the movable unit 2401 It changes to lie down from the suspended state. Therefore, the player's viewing angle with respect to the decorative surface 2406a (that is, the angle at which the decorative surface 2406a is viewed) changes relatively gradually, and the visual interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, the pair of arms 2411 extended from the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401 is located at the rear end side of the movable unit 2401 when the movable unit 2401 is in the retracted position, and Since it is located at the end on the moving direction side (retreat position side), the arm 2411 is shielded by the movable unit 2401 during the rotation of the movable unit 2401 and is difficult to see from the player side, and the arm 2411 is exposed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in appearance due to the fact.

  The shape of the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 is a curved shape along the movement locus of the movable unit 2401. For this reason, the movement (rotation) of the movable unit 2401 becomes a movement that matches the shape of the decorative surface 2406a, and unnaturalness is not aroused with respect to the rotation operation of the movable unit 2401.

  By the way, in the case where the movable unit 2401 is disposed horizontally in the retracted position, the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401 and the arm 2411 extending from the back surface 2410a may be visible from the player side. According to the above, there is a concern that the appearance of the movable unit 2401 at the retracted position may be impaired. On the other hand, according to this example, the movable unit 2401 is arranged so as to be inclined so that the decorative surface 2406a can be seen at the retracted position, and thus it is difficult to see the back surface 2410a and the arm 2411 of the movable unit 2401. Is possible. In particular, since the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 is formed in a curved surface shape, the shape and pattern of the decorative surface 2406a can be seen relatively clearly even in an inclined state, and the decorative effect can be maintained. It is.

  Further, since the sub liquid crystal screen PNS faces obliquely downward, when the movable unit 2401 is moved to the appearance position, the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 can also be directed obliquely downward in accordance with the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. (Refer to the two-dot chain line in FIG. 182.) As a result, the movable range of the movable unit 2401 between the retracted position and the appearance position can be increased. That is, the movement of the movable unit 2401 is increased, and the impact when moving the movable unit 2401 can be increased.

  In addition, the rotation shaft portion 2411d of the arm 2411 is disposed behind the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Therefore, the movable unit 2401 can be brought close to the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 regardless of whether the movable unit 2401 is in the appearance position or the retracted position. Therefore, it becomes easier to secure a space necessary for disposing the movable unit 2401, and the sense of unity between the movable unit 2401 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is further enhanced.

  In addition, the arm 2411 has a substantially “<” shape, and a first arm portion 2411 b extending substantially perpendicularly from the back surface 2410 a of the movable unit 2401 and a first arm portion 2411 b bent with respect to the first arm portion 2411 b. Since the second arm portion 2411c is provided, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 can be avoided and disposed. That is, the movable unit 2401 can be rotated without interfering with the sub liquid crystal unit 2350.

  Further, since the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is shielded by the cooperation of the movable part unit 2401, the left movable part unit 2378, and the right movable part unit 2379, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is surely shielded even when the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is relatively large. Is possible. In particular, when the front surface of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is opened, the movable unit 2401, the left movable unit 2378, and the right movable unit 2379 move in different directions, so that they are formed in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It is possible to arouse an image in which a single shielded wall is dispersed, and it is possible to further enhance visual fun.

  In particular, the movable unit 2401 has a pentagonal shape with the left and right side surfaces protruding outward, and at the appearance position, the protruding portions are “ku” in the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379. It joins so that it may fit with the character-shaped side surface (refer FIG. 171). For this reason, the image in which the movable part unit 2401, the left movable part unit 2378, and the right movable part unit 2379 are integrally formed can be aroused. Therefore, when the front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is opened, the player can be surprised by an unexpected operation that the plurality of members are dispersed, and the impact can be further increased.

  Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 183 to 219. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the rear unit as seen from an oblique front. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the shutter-type accessory of the back unit as seen from an oblique front. FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the shutter-type accessory as seen from an oblique front. FIG. FIG. 188 is a perspective view of the left inner shutter of the shutter-type accessory disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 188 is a perspective view of the left inner shutter viewed from the oblique rear, and an enlarged view of the main part thereof FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the decorative plate of the left inner shutter as viewed obliquely from the front and an enlarged view of the main part thereof. FIG. 190 is a perspective view of the right inner shutter of the shutter-type accessory as viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the left outer shutter of the shutter-type accessory disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the shutter type accessory viewed from the diagonally front, and FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a shutter-type accessory driving unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. 4, in the shutter-type combination thereof, is a perspective view of the opened state of each shutter obliquely from the front.

  Further, FIG. 195 is a perspective view of the lower accessory unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 198 is a perspective view of the lower driving unit of the side accessory unit disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective view of the lower drive unit and the distribution effect device viewed from diagonally forward; FIG. 199 is a perspective view of the distribution effecting device as seen from an oblique front view, and FIG. 200 is a perspective view of the swing drive portion of the distribution performance device as seen from an oblique front. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the swing drive unit as viewed obliquely from behind, FIG. 202 is an exploded perspective view of the lower drive unit unit ascending and descending, and FIG. 203 is an elevation mechanism. FIG. 204 is a perspective view seen obliquely from the rear side, and FIG. 204 shows a state in which game balls are supplied to the distribution effect device 205 is a front view of the lower drive unit, FIG. 205 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing the state where the distribution effect device is raised, and FIG. 206 is a left view of the distribution unit of the distribution effect device. FIG. 207 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing an inclined state, FIG. 207 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing a state where the distribution unit of the distribution effect device is inclined to the right, and FIG. FIG. 209 is a perspective view of the lower accessory unit game medium supply mechanism as viewed from diagonally forward, FIG. 209 is an exploded perspective view of the game medium supply mechanism as viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 210 is a game medium. FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the supply mechanism disassembled and viewed obliquely from the rear, FIG. 211 is a perspective view of the passage forming unit of the lower accessory unit viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 212 is an oblique rear view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 213 is a perspective view of the passage forming unit. Is a perspective view showing the operation of the over down passage, FIG. 214 is a perspective view showing an operation of the discharge passage of the passage forming unit.

  Further, FIG. 215 is a perspective view of another configuration of the back box unit as viewed from an oblique front, FIG. 216 is an exploded perspective view of the other configuration as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 218 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative unit as seen from the diagonal front, FIG. 218 is an exploded perspective view of the movable decorative portion of the horizontal decorative unit as seen from the diagonal, and FIG. 219 is an exploded perspective view of the horizontal base member. And it is the perspective view seen from diagonally forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001, in the back box 3001, a shutter-type accessory 3002 disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a lower accessory unit 3003 disposed in front lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a liquid crystal display A horizontal decoration unit 3004 disposed on the front left side and the front right side of the device 1400.

  As shown in FIG. 184, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end. The game panel 600 is fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening 3001c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side can be seen through the opening 3001c. . Further, the back box 3001 is formed with an attachment portion for attaching and fixing the shutter-type accessory 3002, the lower-side accessory unit 3003, each substrate, and the like at appropriate positions.

  The shutter type accessory 3002 will be described in detail. The shutter-type accessory 3002 is a sliding door-like accessory arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The shutter type accessory 3002 is in a closed state (see FIG. 183) and an open state (see FIG. 194). It is possible to switch.

  As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the shutter-type accessory 3002 includes four shutters, that is, a left inner shutter 3010, a right inner shutter 3030, a left outer shutter 3050, and a right outer shutter 3070, and above these shutters. And a lower support portion 3110 for slidably supporting the shutters.

  As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the left inner shutter 3010 includes a decorative plate 3011 made of a transparent synthetic resin member and having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an upper power supply separated from the upper and lower portions of the decorative plate 3011. A decorative body 3012 and a lower electrical decoration body 3013.

  By the way, as described above, if the left inner shutter 3010 which is a shielding member is composed of the transparent decorative plate 3011 and the electric decorations 3012 and 3013 disposed on the front surface or the back surface thereof, a liquid crystal display is provided by the shielding member. Even in a state where the front of the device 1400 is shielded, the electric bodies 3012 and 3013 and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be viewed in the front-rear direction, and a three-dimensional and realistic presentation can be enjoyed. Is possible. However, in the case where a transparent decorative plate 3011 is used as a shielding member, it is difficult to separate and provide the upper electric body 3012 and the lower electric body 3013. This is because an electric wire for electrically connecting the upper electric body 3012 and the lower electric body 3013 is required. This is because even when wiring is performed on the back side of the plate 3011, the electric wire can be visually recognized from the player side through the decorative plate 3011, and the appearance may be impaired.

  On the other hand, in this example, a belt-like flat cable 3014 (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 189) is used as the electric wire, and the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. For this reason, the thickness portion (that is, the side surface) of the flat cable 3014 faces the player, and the thickness portion overlaps the left edge of the decorative board 3011. It has become. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in appearance due to the electric wire. In particular, the width of the flat cable 3014 is shorter than the thickness of the decorative plate 3011 (that is, the width of the side surface) so that the end of the flat cable 3014 in the width direction does not protrude forward from the front surface of the decorative plate 3011. It has become.

  Moreover, the upper side electrical decoration body 3012 and the lower side electrical decoration body 3013 are arrange | positioned so that the left edge part of the decorating board 3011 may be touched, and, thereby, the flat cable 3014 wired along the left side surface is connected to the decorating board. It is possible to connect to the upper electrical body 3012 and the lower electrical body 3013 without passing through the front surface or the back surface of the 3011.

  Further, the upper electrical decoration body 3012 and the lower electrical decoration body 3013 include an upper LED board 3015 and a lower LED board 3016 disposed on the back surface of the decorative board 3011, and the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016 Are connected by a flat cable 3014. In particular, the flat cable 3014 is connected to the back surface of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 (see FIG. 188). Thereby, even if the flat cable 3014 is connected to any part of the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016, the flat cable 3014 at the connection part can be shielded. The decorative plate 3011 in front of the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016 is provided with a diffusely reflecting surface 3018a. It is possible to decorate the light uniformly. Moreover, according to this, the external appearance of the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016 also becomes unclear, and it is possible to enhance the production effect by the light emitting decoration.

  As shown in FIG. 188, a recess 3017 for accommodating the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 is formed on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011, and light is emitted from the interior of the decorative plate 3011. It is like that. That is, it is possible to make the decorative plate 3011 itself appear to shine. Further, on the surface of the decorative plate 3011 corresponding to the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016, a protrusion 3018 protruding toward the player side is formed, and an upper frame shape surrounding the protrusion 3018 is formed. A decorative body 3019 and a lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020 are provided. For this reason, even when the plate thickness of the decorative plate 3011 is relatively thin, it is possible to form the concave portion 3017 for accommodating the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 on the back surface side, and the upper frame-shaped decoration. By the body 3019 and the lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020, it is possible to emphasize the light emitting portion and enhance the effect of the light emission effect.

  By the way, when the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011, the flat cable 3014 is a portion (bent portion) extending from the left side toward the upper electric body 3012 and the lower electric body 3013. Since the direction of the surface of the flat cable 3014 changes, the flat cable 3014 is twisted. For this reason, there exists a possibility that the flat cable 3014 may be conspicuous in the twisted part. On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 188, the end portions of the upper frame-shaped decorative body 3019 and the lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020 protrude outward from the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. Thus, the twisted portion of the flat cable 3014 is shielded.

  By the way, if the flat cable 3014 leaves | separates from the left side surface of the decoration board 3011, the flat cable 3014 will be in the floating state and there exists a possibility that it may stand out. On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 189, a groove forming portion 3021 for holding the flat cable 3014 is formed on the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. The groove forming portion 3021 is formed integrally with the decorative plate 3011. By forming the groove-shaped gap S between the side surface of the decorative plate 3011, the groove forming portion 3021 is flat simply by inserting the flat cable 3014 into the gap S. The cable 3014 can be held. By the way, when adopting a configuration in which the flat cable 3014 is inserted into the gap S formed by the groove forming portion 3021, it is necessary to pull out the end side portion of the flat cable 3014 from the gap S to the outside. If the flat cable 3014 is pulled out toward the front or rear of the 3011, the flat cable 3014 is twisted at that portion, so that a relatively large gap S is required to accommodate the flat cable 3014. However, when the width of the gap S increases, it becomes difficult to stably hold the flat cable 3014 and the appearance of the flat cable 3014 may be conspicuous. On the other hand, in this example, since the outlets 3021a of the flat cable 3014 are formed at both ends of the groove, the flat cable 3014 can be drawn straight, and the width of the gap S is adjusted to the thickness of the flat cable 3014. It is possible to set it to the minimum size. In addition, the gap S into which the flat cable 3014 is inserted has an open front side and a closed back side. For this reason, it becomes possible to insert the flat cable 3014 into the gap S from the front, and when wiring the flat cable 3014 after assembling the decorative plate 3011, it is possible to perform wiring work from the front. Further, the back surface side of the gap S is closed, and the flat cable 3014 can be wired to the correct position by simply pushing the flat cable 3014.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 187, a rack 3023 is arranged above the decorative plate 3011 with an upper holder 3022 in the longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction. In addition, a cable presser 3024 for supporting a cable (not shown) for supplying electricity from above the left inner shutter 3010 to the upper electrical decoration 3012 is provided on the back surface of the upper holder 3022. The upper electric body 3012 is formed so as to be in contact with the upper end of the decorative plate 3011, so that a cable connected to the upper electric body 3012 from the outside is not visible from the player side. In addition, a pair of lower rollers 3026 is provided below the decorative plate 3011 via a lower holder 3025 so as to be rotatable with the axial direction as a vertical direction.

  On the other hand, the right inner shutter 3030 is disposed on the right side of the left inner shutter 3010 and can have its side face abutted against the left inner shutter 3010. Note that the configuration of the right inner shutter 3030 is the same as that of the left inner shutter 3010, and as shown in FIG. 190, the upper decorative body 3031 disposed above and below the transparent decorative plate 3031 and the decorative plate 3031 is disposed. 3032 and the lower electrical ornament 3033, and the flat cable 3034 which electrically connects the upper electrical ornament 3032 and the lower electrical ornament 3033. In addition, the upper electric body 3032 and the lower electric body 3033 include an upper LED board and a lower LED board (both not shown) disposed on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011. Further, on the decorative plate 3031 in front of the upper LED board and the lower LED board, a protrusion 3038 having an irregular reflection surface 3038a is formed, and an upper frame-shaped decorative body 3039 and a lower frame surrounding the protrusion 3038 are formed. A shaped decorative body 3040 is provided. Note that the upper electric body 3032 and the lower electric body 3033 are arranged on the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010 when the left inner shutter 3010 and the right inner shutter 3030 are brought into contact with each other. In addition, a series of patterns is formed on each of the lower electrical ornament 3013.

  A rack 3043 is disposed above the right inner shutter 3030 via an upper holder 3042 with the longitudinal direction as the horizontal direction. In addition, a cable presser (not shown) for supporting a cable (not shown) for supplying electricity from above the left inner shutter 3040 to the upper electrical decor 3032 is provided on the back surface of the upper holder 3042. . A pair of lower rollers 3046 are rotatably provided below the decorative plate 3031 via a lower holder 3045.

  The decorative plate 3031 of the right inner shutter 3030 is also provided with a groove forming portion 3041 for holding the flat cable 3034 in the same manner as the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010. It is formed on the right side which is the side opposite to 3011. That is, in the decorative plate 3031 disposed on the right side, the flat cable 3034 is wired along the right side surface, and in the decorative plate 3011 disposed on the left side, the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface. For this reason, even if the left and right decorative plates 3011 and 3031 are abutted with each other, the flat cables 3014 and 3034 can be prevented from being sandwiched between the pair of decorative plates 3011 and 3031. As a result, the flat cables 3014 and 3034 are not damaged. It is possible to prevent.

  On the other hand, the left outer shutter 3050 is disposed on the left side of the left inner shutter 3010 and is provided so as to be able to be pulled with respect to the left inner shutter 3010. Note that the configuration of the left outer shutter 3050 is similar to that of the left inner shutter 3010, except that there is only one illumination body. Accordingly, the wire corresponding to the flat cable 3014 and the groove forming portion 3021 are different. The structure corresponding to is unnecessary. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191, a transparent decorative plate 3051 and a zigzag-shaped electric decoration 3052 provided on the decorative plate 3051 are provided. The electrical decoration body 3052 includes an LED substrate 3055 accommodated in a concave portion 3057 on the back surface side of the decorative plate 3051, a protrusion 3058 protruding from the surface of the decorative plate 3051, and a frame-shaped decorative body 3059 provided therearound. It is configured. Further, an upper front cover 3061 and an upper holder 3062 and a rack 3063 extending in the horizontal direction are provided on the upper side of the decorative plate 3051. Note that a cable (not shown) for supplying power from above the left outer shutter 3050 is connected to the LED board 3055, and the cable is supported by a cable presser 3064 attached to the front surface of the upper front cover 3061. ing. Further, a pair of lower rollers 3066 are provided below the decorative plate 3051 via a lower holder 3065.

  Incidentally, the decorative plate 3051 forms a continuous partition surface with respect to the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010 when the left inner shutter 3010 and the left outer shutter 3050 are in the closed position, and the end of the decorative plate 3051 has an end portion. The flat plate 3014 is arranged so as to overlap the front of the side surface portion (groove forming portion 3021) of the decorative plate 3011 on which the flat cable 3014 is wired. For this reason, the flat cable 3014 can be shielded by the decorative plate 3051. Since the decorative plate 3051 is also transparent, the flat cable 3014 can be visually recognized through the decorative plate 3051. However, the appearance of the flat cable 3014 becomes unclear through the decorative plate 3051, and the flat cable 3014 becomes more conspicuous. It is possible to avoid it.

  On the other hand, the right outer shutter 3070 is disposed on the right side of the right inner shutter 3030 and is provided so as to be able to be pulled with respect to the right inner shutter 3030. The configuration of the right outer shutter 3070 is the same as that of the left outer shutter 3050, and has a line-symmetric shape. In other words, as shown in FIG. 192, a transparent decorative plate 3071 and a zigzag-shaped electric body 3072 provided on the decorative plate 3071 are provided. LED board (not shown) housed in the (not)), a protrusion 3078 protruding from the surface of the decorative plate 3071, and a frame-like decorative body 3079 provided in the periphery thereof. Further, an upper front cover 3081 and an upper holder 3082 and a rack 3083 extending in the horizontal direction are provided on the upper side of the decorative plate 3071. In addition, a cable presser 3084 that supports a cable connected to the LED substrate is provided on the front surface of the upper front cover 3061. Further, a pair of lower rollers 3086 are provided below the decorative plate 3071 via a lower holder 3085.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 193, the drive unit 3090 is configured to individually drive the left inner shutter 3010, the right inner shutter 3030, the left outer shutter 3050, and the right outer shutter 3070. More specifically, racks 3023 and 3043 provided on upper portions of shutters 3010, 3030, 3050, and 3070 (hereinafter referred to as “shutters 3010 and the like”) by guide lower portions 3091 and guide upper portions 3092 that are vertically stacked. 3063 and 3083 are slidably supported in the left-right direction, and a mechanism for linearly moving the racks 3023, 3043, 3063 and 3083 left and right is disposed above the upper guide portion 3092. Specifically, on the upper left side of the upper guide portion 3092, a box-shaped left motor base 3093, a left inner motor 3094 attached to the left motor base 3093 and applying power to the left inner shutter 3010, and a left motor base 3093 A left outer motor 3095 that is attached and applies power to the left outer shutter 3050 is disposed. A gear 3096 is connected to the left inner motor 3094 and the left outer motor 3095 so that rotational force is transmitted to the pinion 3097 engaged with the rack 3023 of the left inner shutter 3010 and the rack 3063 of the left outer shutter 3050. It has become. The pinion 3097 passes through the upper guide portion 3092 and the lower guide portion 3091 and is engaged with the racks 3023 and 3063. The open side surface of the left motor base 3093 is closed by a lid 3098.

  On the upper right side of the guide upper portion 3092 are two right motor bases 3099, a right inner motor 3100 attached to the right motor base 3099 and applying power to the right inner shutter 3030, and a right outer shutter 3070 attached to the right motor base 3099. A right outer motor 3101 for applying power to the motor is disposed. A gear 3102 is connected to the right inner motor 3100 and the right outer motor 3101 so that the rotational force is transmitted to the pinion 3103 engaged with the rack 3043 of the right inner shutter 3030 and the rack 3083 of the right outer shutter 3070. It has become. The open side surface of the right motor base 3099 is closed by a lid 3104.

  In addition, four photosensors 3105 for detecting the open state (origin position) of each shutter 3010 and the like are provided in the vicinity of the four corners of the guide upper portion 3092.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 186, the lower support portion 3110 that supports the lower portions of the shutters 3010 and the like includes an intermediate support portion 3111, a left front support portion 3112 disposed on the front left side of the intermediate support portion 3111, and an intermediate support. The front right support portion 3113 disposed on the right side of the front surface of the portion 3111 and the rear support portion 3114 disposed on the rear surface of the middle support portion 3111 are configured. A lower roller 3066 of the left outer shutter 3050 is inserted between the left front support portion 3112 and the middle support portion 3111, and a lower roller 3086 of the right outer shutter 3070 is inserted between the right front support portion 3113 and the middle support portion 3111. The left outer shutter 3050 and the right outer shutter 3070 are slidably supported between a closed position (see FIG. 185) and an open position (see FIG. 194). A lower roller 3026 of the left inner shutter 3010 and a lower roller 3046 of the right inner shutter 3030 are inserted between the rear support portion 3114 and the middle support portion 3111, and the left inner shutter 3010 is inserted. The right inner shutter 3030 is slidably supported between a closed position (see FIG. 185) in which the shutters 30a face each other and an open position (see FIG. 194) separated from each other.

  As described above, each shutter 3010 and the like move in the left-right direction between the open position and the closed position, and is configured in a sliding door shape. Therefore, at the closed position, the liquid crystal display device 1400 behind the decorative plate 3011 and the like. Can be visually recognized, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be visually recognized without the decorative plate 3011 or the like in the open position. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the operation of each shutter 3010 and the like, and it is possible to greatly enhance the effect. In particular, at the closed position, a plurality of electric decorations and an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be visually recognized, and an effect that is three-dimensional and highly realistic can be performed.

  Next, the lower accessory unit 3003 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 183, the lower accessory unit 3003 is arranged on the lower front side of the shutter-type accessory 3002, and performs a distribution effect using a game ball in an effect area partitioned from the game area 605. It is possible. As shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the lower accessory unit 3003 includes a lower drive unit 3120 that performs a game ball distribution effect, and a guide member 3131 ( A game medium supply mechanism 3121 for supplying game balls to a later-described), and a passage formation unit 3122 for forming a passage and the like for collecting the game balls flowing out from the lower drive unit 3120 and returning them to the game medium supply mechanism 3121. It can be divided roughly.

  First, as shown in FIG. 197, the lower drive unit 3120 supports the distribution effect device 3125 that distributes the supplied game balls in the left-right direction and the distribution effect device 3125 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The lifting / lowering mechanism 3126 lifts and lowers the distribution effect device 3125 between an upper stop position (also referred to as an application position) and a lower stop position (also referred to as a standby position). As shown in FIG. 198, the distribution effect device 3125 swings the distribution unit 3130 that swings in the left-right direction around a pin 3138 (see FIG. 199) provided at the center, and the distribution unit 3130. And a swing drive unit 3145 for guiding the distributed game balls. In FIG. 198, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the decorative portion 3146 disposed on the front surface of the swing driving portion 3145 is removed is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the distribution unit 3130 includes a pseudo shelf 3132 having a guide member 3131 at the top, and a decorative member disposed on the front side of the pseudo shelf 3132 and below the guide member 3131. The upper decorative portion 3133 and a lower decorative portion 3137 which is a decorative member disposed below the upper decorative portion 3133 are provided. An arcuate rolling surface 3131a capable of rolling the game ball in the left-right direction is formed on the upper surface of the guide member 3131. When the sorting unit 3130 is tilted toward either the left or right side, the rolling is performed. A game ball can flow down along the surface 3131a. Note that a decorative frame 3136 of the upper decorative portion 3133 is disposed on the front surface of the guide member 3131 so that the game ball does not deviate forward from the rolling surface 3131a. The lower part of the pseudo shelf 3132 has a shape in which a central part in the left-right direction protrudes downward, and a cylindrical action part 3132a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a lower end part of the pseudo shelf 3132, 3139 is inserted. In addition, a cylindrical shaft portion 3132b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed at the center of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 in the left-right direction and above the action portion 3132a, and the swing driving portion 3145 (FIG. 200) is formed via the pin 3138. (See Fig. 1) and the central shaft 3151a. In other words, the pseudo shelf 3132 is supported so as to be swingable about the shaft 3132b, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by applying a force to the action portion 3132a. Yes. In addition, a plurality of bushes 3140 and bush pressers 3141 are provided on the back surface of the pseudo shelf 3132, and arc-shaped guide portions 3151b formed on the left and right sides of the rear plate 3151 of the base member 3150 (see FIG. 200). As a result, the pseudo shelf 3132 can be smoothly swung and the swing range (rotation angle) can be limited.

  The upper decoration part 3133 includes a front decoration 3135 in the shape of a decorative character and a decoration frame 3136 provided on the back side thereof, and an LED substrate and a lens (both shown) that irradiate light toward the front decoration 3135 therein. Not) is housed. Further, the lower decoration part 3137 has a shape imitating the appearance of the character.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the swing drive unit 3145 includes a base member 3150, a left rack 3160 disposed on the left side of the base member 3150, and a right rack 3161 disposed on the right side of the base member 3150. The left relay board 3163 and the right relay board 3164 disposed at the lower back surface of the base member 3150, and the light toward the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf 3132 disposed slightly above the lower front surface of the base member 3150. The left LED board 3165 and the right LED board 3166 are provided. In addition, the base member 3150 is formed with the above-described central shaft 3151a projecting forward at the center position of the rear plate 3151, and a pair of guide portions 3151b confront each other around the center shaft 3151a. Is formed. In addition, a plurality of wall portions 3152 project forward from the outer side of the guide portion 3151b in the left-right direction, and the first transport passage 3153 is formed on the left end side of the rear plate 3151 by these wall portions 3152. In addition, a second transport passage 3154 is formed on the right end side of the rear plate 3151. A first inflow port 3153a that opens toward the right side (inner side) is formed at the upper end portion of the first transfer passage 3153, and the lower end portion of the first transfer passage 3153 is bent at a substantially right angle toward the right side (inner side). It has a shape. Note that most of the front surface of the first transfer passage 3153 is closed by a decorative portion 3146 (see FIG. 198), and only the lower end portion is opened. That is, a first outlet 3153b is formed at the lower end portion, and a game ball that enters the first inlet 3153a and is guided by the first transport passage 3153 flows out from the first outlet 3153b forward. The first inflow port 3153a is formed at a height that communicates with the left end of the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf 3132 when the above-described pseudo shelf 3132 rotates counterclockwise.

  The second transfer passage 3154 is a substantially linear passage formed in the vertical direction, and a second inflow port 3154a that opens toward the left side (inner side) is formed at the upper end portion, and the lower end portion is formed at the lower end portion. Is formed with a second outlet 3154b that opens forward. Further, the front portion of the second transfer passage 3154 is also closed by a decorative portion 3146 (see FIG. 198). That is, the game ball that enters the second inflow port 3154a and is guided by the second transfer passage 3154 flows out from the second outflow port 3154b. The second inflow port 3154a is formed at a height that communicates with the right end of the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf 3132 when the pseudo shelf 3132 rotates clockwise. The second outlet 3154b is formed at a position higher than the first outlet 3153b of the first transport passage 3153.

  In addition, a swing mechanism 3170 is provided below the base member 3150 for applying a rotational force to the operating portion 3132a of the pseudo shelf 3132 (see FIG. 199). This swinging mechanism 3170 is arranged at the lower part of the rear surface of the rear plate 3151 and has a motor 3171 which moves back and forth in the axial direction of the rotation shaft, a rotation shaft of the motor 3171 and a pin 3139 mounted on the pseudo shelf 3132 (see FIG. 199). ), And the rotation direction of the motor 3171 can be changed to switch the rotation direction of the pseudo shelf 3132. A flexible presser 3174 for supporting the wiring is provided on the lower front surface of the base member 3150. Here, it can be said that the swinging mechanism 3170 is a driving means for operating the pseudo shelf 3132.

  On the other hand, the lifting mechanism 3126 includes a motor base 3127 as shown in FIGS. 202 and 203. The motor base 3127 includes a substantially flat rear plate 3127a, a left sliding portion 3127b formed on the left side thereof and slidably supporting the left rack 3160 of the swing driving unit 3145 (see FIG. 197), and the rear plate 3127a. A right sliding part 3127c slidably supporting the right rack 3161 of the swing driving part 3145, a left motor housing part 3127d formed on the left side of the left sliding part 3127b, and a right sliding part. Right motor housing portion 3127e formed on the right side of 3127c. Further, a left relay board 3128a and a right relay board 3128b are disposed on the rear surface of the rear plate 3127a. The left motor 3176 accommodated in the left motor accommodating part 3127d and the right motor accommodated in the right motor accommodating part 3127e. The drive signal to 3177 is relayed. The left motor housing 3127d is covered with a left motor cover 3176b, and the right motor housing 3127e is covered with a right motor cover 3177b. A gear 3176 a is connected to the left motor 3176, and the gear 3176 a is disposed so as to protrude into the left sliding portion 3127 b and is engaged with the left rack 3160 in the swing driving portion 3145. Similarly, a gear (not shown) is also connected to the right motor 3177, and this gear is disposed so as to protrude into the right sliding portion 3127 c and meshed with the right rack 3161 in the swing drive portion 3145. ing. For this reason, when the left motor 3176 and the right motor 3177 are simultaneously rotated, power is transmitted through the gear 3176a, causing the left rack 3160 and the right rack 3161 to move straight up and down, that is, the distribution effect device 3125 is straightened. It can be moved up and down.

  In addition, on the upper side of the left sliding portion 3127b in the motor base 3127, a game ball supplied from a game medium supply mechanism 3121 (see FIG. 196), which will be described later, is guided to a guide member 3131 (specifically, a game ball guide) of the distribution effect device 3125. A guide passage portion 3178 for guiding to the passage 3155) is provided. The front surfaces of the left sliding portion 3127b, the right sliding portion 3127c, and the guide passage portion 3178 are closed by a guide cover 3179.

  By configuring in this way, when performing the distribution effect by the distribution effect device 3125, the player can easily visually recognize from the lower stop position (see FIG. 204) where it is difficult to visually recognize from the player side. It is possible to raise the distribution effect device 3125 to the upper stop position (see FIG. 205) that enables the game ball K, and to distribute the game balls K in the left-right direction at the upper stop position. That is, as shown in FIG. 206, when the sorting unit 3130 is rotated counterclockwise, the game ball K rolls to the left by the guide member 3131 and can enter the first inflow port 3153a. Become. The game ball K that has entered the first inflow port 3153a flows out of the first outflow port 3153b at the lower end thereof through the first transport passage 3153. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, when the sorting unit 3130 is rotated clockwise, the game ball rolls to the right by the guide member 3131 and can enter the second inflow port 3154a. . The game ball K that has entered the second inflow port 3154a flows out from the second outflow port 3154b at the lower end thereof through the second transport passage 3154. Note that the game ball that has flowed out of the first outlet 3153b or the second outlet 3154b is returned to the game medium supply mechanism 3121 by the return passage 3211a (see FIG. 213).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 stores a predetermined number of game balls and supplies the game balls to the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 during the distribution effect. A flat box-shaped base body 3180 including a base upper part 3181 and a base lower part 3182; a cylindrical guiding part 3183 as a substantially cylindrical passage forming member for guiding the game ball upward; A screw 3190 disposed in the guiding portion 3183 and raising the game ball is provided, and a drive mechanism 3199 that rotates the screw 3190 with the axial direction as a vertical direction. The cylindrical guiding portion 3183 is erected on the base upper portion 3181, and includes a front wall forming portion 3184 having a substantially semicircular cross section and a rear wall forming portion 3186 having a substantially semicircular cross section disposed on the rear side thereof. It is configured. In addition, an inflow port 3187 opened rearward is formed in the lower portion of the rear wall forming portion 3186, and the game ball is guided in a cylindrical manner through the lower passage portion 3197 communicating with the return passage 3211a (see FIG. 213). A ball is entered into the portion 3183. In addition, a discharge port 3185 opened forward is formed in the upper part of the front wall forming portion 3184, and a game ball conveyed by the screw 3190 is discharged from the discharge port 3185. The game ball released from the discharge port 3185 is sent to the guide passage portion 3178 (see FIG. 202) via the upper passage portion 3195. Further, in the upper passage portion 3195 and the lower passage portion 3197, passage sensors 3196 and 3198 for detecting the passage of the game ball are provided, respectively.

  The screw 3190 is cylindrical and has a shaft portion 3191 formed with an engagement portion 3191a having a large diameter at the lower end, a spiral portion 3192 formed in a spiral shape around the shaft portion 3191, and an upper portion of the shaft portion 3191. The engaging portion 3191a is erected in a state where the engaging portion 3191a is inserted into the opening 3181a of the base upper portion 3181. The notch 3193a formed in the rotating plate 3193 is for detecting the rotational position of the screw 3190.

  The drive mechanism 3199 includes a motor 3200 mounted on the base upper portion 3181, a motor gear 3201 disposed inside the base body 3180 and coupled to the rotation shaft of the motor 3200, and an intermediate gear 3202 meshed with the motor gear 3201. And a connecting gear 3203 having a projection 3203a engaged with the engaging portion 3191a of the screw 3190 and being engaged with the intermediate gear 3202. Note that the protruding portion 3203a and the engaging portion 3191a are connected by a connecting pin 3204 in a fitted state.

  Thereby, the rotation of the motor 3200 is transmitted to the screw 3190 via the motor gear 3201, the intermediate gear 3202, and the connecting gear 3203, and the screw 3190 is rotated in a certain direction, that is, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 3187 is It can be conveyed toward the discharge port 3185.

  By the way, in the case of performing the distribution effect after raising the distribution effect device 3125 to the upper stop position as described above, in order to supply the game ball to the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, the game ball is moved upward. It must be lifted to a height corresponding to the stop position, and as a result, the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121, that is, the size in the vertical direction becomes large, which may make it difficult to secure an arrangement space. Although it may be possible to reduce the size by increasing the position of the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121, a return passage 3211a is connected to the inlet 3187 near the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 so that the game ball can be transferred to it. Since it is necessary to flow down to the part, the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 has to be positioned downward to some extent, and it is difficult to reduce the size by the above configuration.

  On the other hand, according to the configuration of this example, the game ball is placed on the guiding member 3131 before the distribution effect device 3125 starts to rise (that is, in a state where it stops at the lower stop position (see FIG. 204)). It comes to be supplied. For this reason, the height for lifting the game ball can be made relatively low, and the game medium supply mechanism 3121 can be miniaturized. Even if the game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131, the rolling of the game ball on the guide member 3131 is restricted until the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the upper stop position. Thus, the game balls can be prevented from being distributed before reaching the upper stop position, that is, before the distribution effect device 3125 becomes visible to the player.

  In particular, in this example, the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131 is formed in a substantially arc shape, and the guide member 3131 is held in a substantially horizontal state until the upper stop position is reached. Therefore, when a game ball is supplied to the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131, the game ball is guided to the central portion in the left-right direction, which is the lowest position on the rolling surface 3131a, and stops at that position. become. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from deviating from the rolling surface 3131a, that is, the game ball being distributed, while the distribution effect device 3125 is rising.

  Further, in this example, since the game ball is sent to the guide member 3131 from the left end side, the supply position of the game ball is lower than that supplied from above the guide member 3131, and consequently the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121. Is even lower. In addition, when the guide member 3131 includes the substantially arc-shaped rolling surface 3131a, even when the game ball is sent from the end side of the guide member 3131, the game ball can be guided to the center position of the guide member 3131 and braked. Is possible.

  Further, the game ball released from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is guided to the end portion side of the guide member 3131 through the game ball guide passage 3155 (see FIG. 200). Since this game ball guide passage 3155 moves up and down integrally with the distribution effect device 3125, the game ball can be smoothly fed even if the stop position of the distribution effect device 3125 is slightly displaced. It becomes. For example, even if the distribution effect device 3125 starts to rise before the game ball is sent to the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, if the game ball is supplied to the game ball guide passage 3155, then It can be fed onto the guide member 3131.

  In addition, the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is disposed so as to be positioned behind the rolling surface (so-called stage) of the shelf upper stage 2372 in the first accessory unit 2370 (see FIG. 174) when in the lower stop position. Has been. For this reason, the image that the guide member 3131 is part of the stage can be aroused, and the impact on the stage can be increased. Note that a transparent protective plate 2360 (see FIG. 161) is provided between the shelf upper stage 2372 and the guide member 3131. The area is surely partitioned so that game balls do not jump into the effect area.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the passage forming unit 3122 includes a cover member 3210 that covers the front of the lower drive unit 3120 (see FIG. 196), and a return passage that is disposed on the upper surface of the back surface of the cover member 3210. And a forming member 3211. As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, the return passage forming member 3211 has a return passage 3211 a inside, and directs the game balls distributed by the distribution effect device 3125 toward the inlet 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121. It is possible to flow down. Specifically, the return passage forming member 3211 is formed with a linear portion 3212 arranged obliquely, and a left side protruding portion 3215 and a right side protruding portion 3216 that protrude upward from the linear portion 3212. The left protrusion 3215 is provided with a first communication port 3215a that communicates with the first outlet 3153b of the first transport passage 3153 when the distribution effect device 3125 moves to the upper stop position. When the distribution effect device 3125 moves to the upper stop position, a second communication port 3216a that communicates with the second outlet 3154b of the second transport passage 3154 is provided. That is, the game balls distributed to the first inlet 3153a and the second inlet 3154a are sent to the common return passage 3211a.

  Thus, by combining the game medium supply mechanism 3121 for supplying game balls to the distribution effect device 3125 and the return path 3211a for returning the game balls distributed by the distribution effect device 3125 to the game medium supply mechanism 3121. The circulation path J of the game balls is configured so that the distribution effect can be repeatedly performed while circulating the game balls. However, in the case where the distribution effect is repeatedly performed using the game balls enclosed in the circulation path J, when the surface of the game balls becomes dirty or the surface of the game balls rusts with use. , The appearance of the game ball may be deteriorated, and the production effect may be impaired. In particular, since the effect performed by the distribution effect device 3125 is one that draws attention to the behavior of the game ball, the dirt and rust are conspicuous, which causes a decrease in visual interest. In addition, since the operation of enclosing the game balls is performed at the time of manufacture of the game machine, the game balls roll in the circulation path J during transportation after shipment, and the game balls collide with each other or members in the circulation path J. In some cases, a relatively loud sound may be generated by the collision.

  On the other hand, in this example, the game ball used in the game area 605 is taken in, and the game ball is supplied to the circulation path J. Specifically, the game ball won in the second starting port 2002 is sent to the supply port 3213, which is the upstream end of the return channel 3211a, through the supply channel 3220. Since the second start port 2002 is disposed at a position higher than the upstream end of the return passage 3211a, the game ball won in the second start port 2002 can naturally flow down toward the return passage 3211a. Is possible. In this way, since the game ball won in the second starting port 2002 is supplied to the circulation path J by the supply passage 3220, it is not necessary to enclose the game ball in the circulation path J in advance, and a collision sound is generated during transportation. And damage due to collision can be prevented. In particular, the second start port 2002 is arranged at a position away from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 because it is sent to the return path 3211a through the supply path 3220 and supplied to the game medium supply mechanism 3121 using the return path 3211a. In spite of this, the length of the supply passage 3220 can be made relatively short, and the overall configuration can be simplified.

  By the way, in the case where the game ball won in the second start port 2002 is sent to the return path 3211a through the supply passage 3220, the number of game balls in the circulation path J every time the game ball wins the second start port 2002. However, since there is a limit to the number of game balls that can be stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, when the number is exceeded, the game balls are stored in the return path 3211 a and the game balls are stored. It becomes difficult to circulate. In addition, it is further provided with a mechanism for distributing the game balls won in the second starting port 2002 to the return path 3211a and the discharge path (not shown), and is configured to send the game balls to the return path 3211a only when the game balls need to be replenished. However, this requires an additional path switching mechanism for switching between the return path 3211a and the discharge path, which is not preferable because the overall configuration becomes complicated and the size is increased.

  On the other hand, in this example, an overflow mechanism is provided between the game medium supply mechanism 3121 and the return passage 3211a. Specifically, a lower passage portion 3197 (see FIG. 213) is disposed between the inlet 3187 and the return passage 3211a of the game medium supply mechanism 3121. The lower passage portion 3197 has a bottom surface on the rear side. In addition to the downward slope, a discharge port 3197a is provided on the front side. In other words, when the number of game balls stored near the inlet 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is within the allowable number, the game balls entering the lower passage portion 3197 follow the inclination of the bottom surface of the lower passage portion 3197. Although it is sent to the inflow port 3187 side, when the number of stored game balls exceeds the allowable number, it overflows and is discharged from the discharge port 3197a on the front surface of the lower passage portion 3197. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls from being stored in the return passage 3211a, and to directly communicate the second start port 2002 and the return passage 3211a with the supply passage 3220 without providing a passage switching mechanism or the like. It becomes possible. The game ball released from the discharge port 3197a rolls to the out ball passage 1119, and from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from the lower rear surface of the game machine to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (generally, an island recovery basket). ) Is discharged. That is, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 including the supply path 3220 and the circulation path J prevents the game ball received by the second start port 2002 from being discharged from the out ball path 1119 as the game ball discharge mechanism. It can be said that the game ball storage mechanism stores a number of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls in the circulation path J are discharged at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 212 and 214, a discharge passage 3218 is provided at the bottom of the back surface of the cover member 3210, and the communication port 3219 of the discharge passage 3218 is positioned at the lower stop position. It is comprised so that it may communicate with the 1st outflow port 3153b of the 1st conveyance path 3153 when it moves to. In addition, when the distribution effect device 3125 is at the lower stop position, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is controlled at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on), and the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is controlled. A game ball is supplied to the top. In particular, at this time, as shown in FIG. 214, the distribution unit 3130 of the distribution effect device 3125 is rotated counterclockwise so that the game ball enters the first inflow port 3153a. Thus, by supplying the game balls to the distribution effect device 3125 at the lower stop position, the game balls in the circulation path J can be discharged from the pachinko machine 1. Thus, since the passages (return passage 3211a and discharge passage 3218) communicating with the first outlet 3153b are switched according to the height of the distribution effect device 3125, a complicated configuration for switching each passage becomes unnecessary. The overall size can be reduced. In particular, when the game ball is discharged, the game ball on the guide member 3131 is guided toward the first inflow port 3153a, so that the discharge path of the game ball is specified, and the discharge path for the second transfer passage 3154 is unnecessary. Become. Therefore, the discharge mechanism can be reduced in size and simplified. The game balls discharged from the discharge passage 3218 roll to the out ball passage 1119, and from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from the lower rear side of the game machine, outside the pachinko machine 1 (generally, the island recovery basket). ) Is discharged.

  Next, the side decoration unit 3004 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the side decoration unit 3004 is arranged on the left side and the right side of the back box 3001, respectively, and performs a light emitting decoration and a part thereof is movable. 217 and 218 will be described in detail. The side decoration unit 3004 includes a decoration base 3250, a movable decoration part 3251 disposed on the rear side thereof, and upper electric decorations disposed on the upper side and the lower side of the movable decoration part 3251. Part 3253 and lower illumination part 3254. The decoration base 3250 includes upper and lower electrical decoration support parts 3250a and 3250b that support the upper electrical decoration part 3253 and the lower electrical decoration part 3254, and a notch 3250c is formed between the electrical decoration support parts 3250a and 3250b. ing. The upper electric decoration part 3253 and the lower electric decoration part 3254 have a lens and an LED substrate (both not shown) inside, and can be decorated with light emission.

  On the other hand, the movable decorative portion 3251 includes a back base 3256, a solenoid 3257 disposed on the back base 3256, a link 3260 that is rotatably supported with the axial direction as a vertical direction, and is driven by a plunger 3258 of the solenoid 3257. The inner base 3256 is rotatably supported by the projecting piece 3256a of the back base 3256 and connected to the link 3260 via the pin 3259 and the shaft portion 3262. In addition, a middle lens 3265 and an LED substrate 3266 are disposed inside the inner decoration 3261, and a red lens 3263 and a blue lens 3264 are provided through the side surface of the inner decoration 3261. That is, by operating the solenoid 3257, the inner decoration 3261 can be rotated via the link 3260, and the front of the inner decoration 3261 (the lighting state of the intermediate lens 3265) can be visually recognized. The side surface of the decoration 3261 (the lighting state of the red lens 3263 and the blue lens 3264) can be switched to a visible state.

  As shown in FIG. 215, a pair of horizontal base members 3240 are disposed on the rear side of the horizontal decoration unit 3004. As shown in FIG. 219, the horizontal base member 3240 arranged on the right side of the back box 3001 is arranged to return the cover member 3270 and the game ball which is arranged on the lower right side of the cover member 3270 and wins the second starting port 2002 to the return passage 3211a. Replenishment passage 3220, upper right LED board 3273 and upper decoration 3276 arranged at the top of cover member 3270, large right LED board 3274 and small lower right LED arranged at the front center of cover member 3270. And a substrate 3275. The cover member 3270 is embedded with a magnetic sensor 3277 for detecting an illegal act using a magnet or the like.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 216, on the rear side of the back box 3001, a left relay board 3241 and a right relay board 3242 that relay drive signals to the horizontal base member 3240, and a liquid crystal guide 3243 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1400. A lamp driving board 3245 for driving the LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a panel relay board 3247 for relaying signals to the game panel 600, and a resistance board 3248 are attached. The lamp driving substrate 3245 is provided in a state of being accommodated in the substrate case 3246.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a block diagram of the main board and the peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress), and a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral board 4010 group includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1400 and sub-liquid crystal based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. And a liquid crystal control board 3181 for controlling the display of the effect image in the unit 2350.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-described components. RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2349 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2002, and a part thereof Detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 2014 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or the magnetic sensors attached to the gate sensors 2202A, 2202B, the general winning opening sensor 2014, the count sensor 2013, and the back unit 3000, respectively. A detection signal from the sensor 3277 is input via the panel relay board 3247 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2344, the attacker solenoid 2016, and the big prize port solenoid 2315 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3247. Through the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3247, and the function display board 640a, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the first Two special symbol memory display 644, normal symbol display 645, normal symbol memory display 646, game state display 647, round display 648, and a driving signal is output to the hold state display unit 3152 of the center accessory 2300 . In the description of FIGS. 87 and 88 described above, an example in which the LED 11 and the LED 12 are used as security indicators 648a and 648b (648) used when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine is described. In the explanation of the above, when the abnormality occurs, the LED 11 and the LED 12 are used as the security indicator 648 in the same manner as described above, but when no abnormality occurs, at least one of them is displayed as the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. It is assumed that it is used as a round indicator 648 for In the present embodiment, when winning a lottery lottery or a lottery lottery, since the number of rounds does not change for each special symbol that is won, the round indicator 648 can be turned on only when it is in the jackpot gaming state. The round indicator 648 itself may be omitted.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information), various commands related to payout, etc. to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107 described above, and pachinko machines from this payout control board 1186 Various commands relating to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 1136, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various types of information in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the reduction of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the above-described firing motor 695, and the above. The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 220, a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 1186, a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) that monitors whether the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, It has. The payout control MPU 4110a includes a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a, which will be described in detail later, receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout, and operates the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to receiving a signal (detection signal), a detection signal from the full switch 916 is input, or detection signals from the ball break switch 778, the count switch 812, and the rotation angle switch 855 are connected to the relay terminal in the prize ball unit. Or input via the plate 830.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d for discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 described above based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a driving signal is output to the payout motor 815, or a ball rental request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, payout is performed based on the ball rental request signal. A drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815, When the detection signal from Tan switch 916 is input, or stop the dispensing motor 815 stops the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to payout motor 815 on the basis of the detection signal.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the state to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. 4120b, a firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotation speed of the firing motor 695 based on the clock signal, and a drive signal is output to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c. A firing motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that approximately 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 described above is controlled.

  As described above, the handle device 460 (operation handle unit 410) includes the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422. When the touch operation unit 464 of the operation handle unit 410 is touched, the touch sensor When the single button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. Although these detection signals will be described in detail later, they are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. When the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, a CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

  Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information related to payout in its built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, a peripheral control board 4140 that performs effect control on the peripheral board 4010 performs a high-quality performance with a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and the like. A sound source IC 4140c, a sound ROM 4140d storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 4140e that holds the current time are provided.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watchdog timer (WDT). When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, based on these various commands. The door frame side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5 is output to the lamp driving board 3167 or each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided in the game board 4. A game board side lighting / flashing command for outputting a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the LED of the LED is output to the lamp driving board 3167, or the left rotating lamp motor 245 and the right rotating lamp of the top lamp lighting unit 200 provided in the door frame 5 The motor 265 and the door frame side motor drive command for outputting the rotation drive signal to the central rotary lamp motor 285 Game board side motor drive that outputs to the moving board 3013a or outputs a rotation drive signal to the left and right drive motors 3042, drive motor 3061, drive motor 3108, drive motor 3112, and drive motor 3200 provided in the game board 4 A command is output to the motor drive board 3013a, a control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c, or a display showing a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 A command is output to the liquid crystal control board 3181.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 3181 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, door frame side motor driving command, game board side motor driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3167 and the motor driving board 3013a. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3167 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, and 224 provided in the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. , 225, 296, etc., and each lighting decoration board 3606 provided in the game board 4 or a glass unit 450 of the door frame 5 based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. To the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013a sends a rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command to the left rotation lamp motor 245 and right rotation lamp motor 265 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. In addition, various motors 2380, 2416, 3094, 3095, 3100, 3101, 3171 provided in the game board 4 based on the game board side motor drive command that is output to the central rotary lamp motor 285 or received. , 3176, 3177, 3200.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a position detection sensor (photo) for detecting the movable positions of the first accessory unit 2370, the second accessory unit 2400, the shutter-type accessory 3002, and the lower accessory unit 3003 of the game board 4, respectively. Detection signals from the sensors 2382, 2422, 3105, etc.) are inputted via the motor drive board 3013a, and the original position is grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5, respectively. Are input via the sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013a, and the rotational positions of the rotary lights 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 3181 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control board 3181 or the operation button unit 370 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. An operation detection signal from the main button sensor 376 or the sub button sensor 378 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 or the sub button 372 is input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. The main button 371 includes a vibrating body 371c, and a driving signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp driving board 3167. Yes.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 through the lamp driving board 3167 and the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow.

  The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs peripheral control using the built-in watchdog timer (internal WDT) and the external WDT together. It is diagnosed whether the system of the MPU 4140a is running out of control.

  The RTC 4140e is composed of an integrated circuit dedicated to timing and a special battery. For example, a button-type battery or an electric double layer capacitor is used as the battery. Even when the power supplied to the peripheral board 4010 is turned off, the RTC 4140e can hold the current time by receiving power supply from the battery. The RTC 4140e outputs the current time information (time information) held to the peripheral control MPU 4140a when necessary.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, a liquid crystal control board 3181 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 on the peripheral board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores the above, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, and various screens displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. A character ROM 4150d for storing data, and a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied are provided.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and the like. When the display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later. The VDP 4150c is controlled to perform drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like. I remember it. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to a non-resident area (to be described later) of the character RAM 4150e. . In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 according to the progress of the schedule data. Yes.

  Upon receiving a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the top screen data of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. . Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data following the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data (to be described later) from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is held in a line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is held. This is a method of outputting to the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It becomes. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state. Here, the “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. For example, when various persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “the order of sprite superimposition”). Is displayed. Note that the sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the horizontal direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels sequentially from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by main scanning for setting a state and sub-scanning for repeatedly performing main scanning in a direction crossing one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 3181 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b performs the main scanning on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the drawing data for one line. Are sequentially output from the left to the right for pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the process proceeds to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, a liquid crystal display is displayed as main scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. In order from the left to the right of the device 1400, the data is output to pixels for one line.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes a backlight (cold cathode tube) that is turned on by the inverter substrate 3017a.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the lower accessory unit 3003, the game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131 before the sorting effect device 3125 starts to rise. Therefore, the height for lifting the game ball can be made relatively low, and the game medium supply mechanism 3121 can be downsized. Even when the game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131, the rolling of the game ball on the guide member 3131 is restricted until the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the upper stop position. It is possible to prevent the game balls from being distributed before reaching, that is, before the distribution effect device 3125 becomes visible to the player.

  In particular, the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131 is formed in a substantially arc shape, and the guide member 3131 is held in a substantially horizontal state until the upper stop position is reached. When a game ball is supplied to the moving surface 3131a, the game ball can be guided to the central portion in the left-right direction, which is the lowest position on the rolling surface 3131a, and can be stopped at that position. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from deviating from the rolling surface 3131a, that is, the game ball being distributed, while the distribution effect device 3125 is rising.

  Further, since the game ball is sent to the guide member 3131 from the end side, the supply position of the game ball is lower than that of the guide ball 3131 that is sent from above the guide member 3131, and thus the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is further reduced. can do. In addition, when the guide member 3131 includes the substantially arc-shaped rolling surface 3131a, even when the game ball is sent from the end side of the guide member 3131, the game ball can be guided to the center position of the guide member 3131 and braked. it can.

  The game balls released from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 are guided to the end side of the guide member 3131 through the game ball guide passage 3155. The game ball guide passage 3155 is connected to the distribution effect device 3125. Since it moves integrally, even if the stop position of the distribution effect device 3125 is slightly displaced, the game ball can be smoothly fed.

  Moreover, since the upper decoration part 3133 and the lower decoration part 3137 are provided on the front surface of the distribution effect device 3125, the design of the distribution effect device 3125 can be improved. In particular, since the upper decorative portion 3133 and the lower decorative portion 3137 that are hidden and cannot be seen appear during the distribution effect, it is possible to enhance the visual fun and increase the expectation for the distribution effect.

  Further, since the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is disposed at the rear of the stage (the shelf upper stage 2372) at the lower stop position and is visible, the image that the guide member 3131 is a part of the stage. Can be aroused and the impact on the stage can be increased.

  Further, the base member 3150 that supports the pseudo shelf 3132 including the guide member 3131 so as to be swingable is provided with a left rack 3160 and a right rack 3161 on both the left and right sides. Since the gear 3176a to which the rotational force is applied by the 3176 and the right motor 3177 is meshed, when the pair of motors 3176 and 3177 is driven, a force that moves the racks 3160 and 3161 in the vertical direction acts, and the pseudo shelf 3132 Can be moved up and down together with the base member 3150. Thus, by arranging the lifting means on the left and right sides of the distribution effect device 3125, the distribution effect device 3125 can be moved smoothly, and the space for moving (for example, swinging) the pseudo shelf 3132 is provided. Can be secured.

  Further, in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, by rotating the screw 3190 in a certain direction, the game ball entered from the lower side (inflow port 3187) of the cylindrical guiding portion 3183 is raised by the screw 3190, and the cylindrical guiding is performed. It can be discharged from the upper side (discharge port 3185) of the portion 3183. Since the game balls are conveyed by the screws 3190 in this manner, the game balls can be lifted with a relatively simple structure, and the game can be placed at a predetermined position in the cylindrical guiding portion 3183 even when power is not supplied to the game machine. A sphere can be stored.

  The preferred embodiments have been described above, but the embodiments can be variously improved and changed in design.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the first inlet 3153a and the second inlet 3154a. However, the game balls may be distributed to more inlets.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when raising the distribution production | presentation apparatus 3125 from a lower side stop position to an upper side stop position, what controlled the rolling of a game ball by maintaining the guide member 3131 in a horizontal state was shown. The rolling may be restricted by repeatedly swinging the guide member 3131 in small increments within a predetermined rotation range.

[5. Functional configuration of main control board]
FIG. 221 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201 and the like. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of the present embodiment, various game controls, effect control, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensors 2202A and 2202B to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number that becomes a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number Is stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 as a normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number to be processed. The normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 selected from the table, the normal symbol display control means 4206 for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display unit 645 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol display control means 4206 Lottery result based on normal random number displayed on normal symbol display 645 (normal lottery result Is a winning symbol opening and closing control means 4208 for driving the opening solenoid 2344 to expand the blades 2337, and a normal symbol memory display with the number of ordinary random numbers stored in the ordinary symbol holding memory means 4202 as the stored number. And a normal symbol memory number display control means 4210 to be displayed on the device 646.

  The above-described normal symbol hold storage means 4202 uses a predetermined number of normal random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from either of the gate sensors 2202A and 2202B while the normal symbol display control means 4206 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. (For example, 4) are stored, and execution of the stored normal random numbers is suspended until normal symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.

  The main control board 4100 includes a first special random number generation unit 4212, a first special symbol storage unit 4214, a first special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4216, a first special symbol display control unit 4218, Special symbol memory number display control means 4220. The first special random number generator 4212 is a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 2011 by the start winning to the first start port 2001. Generate special random numbers. The first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 generates the first special random number generated by the first special random number generation unit 4212 and various data acquired together with the generation of the first special random number (for example, a design random number, a reach determination random number described later, First variation pattern random numbers, second variation pattern random numbers, variation type random numbers) are temporarily stored according to predetermined conditions. In the following, a group of data generated / acquired based on the start winning at the first start port 2001 (for example, first special random number, symbol random number, reach determination random number, first variation pattern random number, second variation Pattern random numbers and variable type random numbers) are also called first special symbol lottery unit data. The first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 obtains a first special symbol variation pattern based on one first special symbol lottery unit data from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. select. The first special symbol display control unit 4218 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 641 based on the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4216. The first special symbol memory number display control unit 4220 stores the number of first special symbol lottery unit data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 4214 (hereinafter referred to as the first special symbol storage number). Is displayed on the first special symbol memory display 643.

  Further, the main control board 4100 includes second special random number generation means 4222, second special symbol hold storage means 4224, second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226, second special symbol display control means 4228, Special symbol memory number display control means 4230. The second special random number generating means 4222 is a predetermined second lottery result that is the second special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2349 by the start winning to the second start port 2002. Generate special random numbers. The second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 has a second special random number generated by the second special random number generation unit 4222 and various data acquired together with the generation of the second special random number (for example, a design random number, a reach determination random number, which will be described later, First random number for variation pattern, second variation pattern, variation type random number) are temporarily stored according to a predetermined condition. In the following, a group of data generated / acquired based on the start winning at the second start port 2002 (for example, second special random number, symbol random number, reach determination random number, first variation pattern random number, second variation Pattern random numbers and variable type random numbers) are also called second special symbol lottery unit data. The second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 obtains a second special symbol variation pattern based on one second special symbol lottery unit data from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. select. The second special symbol display control unit 4228 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 642 based on the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226. The second special symbol memory number display control unit 4230 stores the number of second special symbol lottery unit data stored in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol storage number). Is displayed on the second special symbol memory display 644.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228 are variably displayed. When the first and second special symbol lottery unit data based on the start winnings at the first and second start ports 2001 and 2002 are stored, respectively, up to a predetermined number (for example, four each). The execution of the stored first and second special symbol lottery unit data is suspended until the special symbol can be changed.

  Note that the main control board 4100 starts the first and second special symbol lottery unit data held by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 to the start ports 2001 and 2002. Regardless of the winning timing, as will be described later, it has priority reserved digest means 4231 rather than the first special symbol lottery unit data, and this priority reserved digest means 4231 provides the second special symbol lottery unit data, that is, the second start port. The lottery result hold related to 2002 is preferentially executed (digested).

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a jackpot which will be described later according to a lottery result based on the first special symbol lottery unit data (first special lottery result) and a lottery result based on the second special symbol lottery unit data (second special lottery result). An advantageous game state generating means 4232 for executing a game or a small hit game, and an opening / closing member 2006 for closing the special winning opening 2003 based on an instruction from the advantageous game state generating means 4232 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. And a prize winning opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the driving of 2016.

  The main control board 4100 further includes game state control means 4236 for determining which game state the pachinko machine 1 is in, and controlling the game state based on the determined game state.

  Further, the main control board 4100 includes command generation means 4238 for generating predetermined control commands such as effect commands based on the first special symbol lottery unit data and the second special symbol lottery unit data, and command generation means. Command transmission means 4240 for transmitting the command generated at 4238 to the peripheral control board 4140 and a variation counter 4242 for storing the number of variations from the previous jackpot.

[6. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 is played by the game panel when the player rotates the operation handle portion 410 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 605 arranged in front of the game 600. Also, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 600 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed. The game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the strength of the game. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 410, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction.

  Here, a game in which a game ball is caused to flow down to the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300 by hitting the game ball relatively weakly is called “left-handed game”. On the other hand, a game that causes a game ball to flow down to the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 by hitting the game ball relatively strongly is called “right-handed game”. The left-handed game and the right-handed game can be switched by the player adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410.

  It is detected by the gate sensor 2202A that the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2300 is guided to the right region of the center accessory 2300 and passes through the gate 2201A arranged on the right side of the center accessory 2300. When the gate sensor 2202B detects that the center sensor 2202B is guided to the left region of the center accessory 2300 and has passed through the gate 2201B disposed on the right side of the center accessory 2300, The main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result. Then, based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 645 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 645 emits light in red or green). . The normal symbol variation display is performed based on a normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the win is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 645 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 645 emits red light). When the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed, the blade 2337 that closes the second starting port 2002 is opened for a predetermined time, and a game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2002. .

  By the way, in this embodiment, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2202A or the gate sensor 2202B while the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 645, the main control MPU 4100a stops the normal symbol in the changing state. Until the result of the normal random number generated / extracted first is confirmed, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202A or the gate sensor 2202B is temporarily stored. Is stored and the display is suspended. The main control MPU 4100a causes the normal symbol storage display 646 to display the stored number of normal random numbers (also referred to as the hold number). This normal symbol memory display 646 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories by the number of LEDs that are lit. In this embodiment, the normal symbol memory display 646 stores and displays up to four normal random numbers. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the main control MPU 4100a discards the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2202A or the gate sensor 2202B.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2300 is brought closer to the center of the game area 605 below the center accessory 2300 by the side decoration member 2100. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2004 arranged below the center combination 2300 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2014, the main control board 4100 determines the payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311. To be paid out.

  Note that if the game ball that is driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning opening 2004, the first starting opening 2001, the second starting opening 2002, and the big winning opening 2003, the game area 605 It is provided at the lower end in the left-right direction and rolls out from the out port 606 to the out ball path 1119, and from the downstream end of the out ball path 1119, that is, from the lower rear surface of the gaming machine to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, It is designed to be discharged toward the collection bin). When the game ball that has been driven is guided to the area on the right side of the center accessory 2300, the game ball 4 enters the second out port 606a disposed above the second start port 2002, and the game board 4 In some cases, it is discharged to the lower rear side. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 2004, the first start port 2001, or the big winning port 2003, the winning game ball is not returned to the game area 605 and enters the out ball path 1119. It rolls and is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from the lower rear surface of the gaming machine toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (generally, the island recovery basket). In addition, the game ball won in the second starting port 2002 is sent to the return path 3211a of the lower accessory unit 3003 through the supply path 3220.

  On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2300 enters the warp entrance 2321 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 2300, the rear upper stage rolling of the first accessory unit 2370 of the center accessory 2300 is performed. It is supplied to the surface 2372b. Then, the game ball supplied onto the upper rolling surface 2372b rolls left and right on the upper rolling surface 2372b, is released forward, and is supplied onto the middle rolling surface 2372c. The game balls roll in the left-right direction on the middle rolling surface 2372c, are released forward, and are supplied to the lower rolling surface 2311a. Also, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the lower rolling surface 2311a and is released into the game area 605 above the attacker unit 2000. When the game ball supplied to the middle rolling surface 2372c enters the chance opening 2372a at the center rear, the game ball is discharged into the game area 605 from the chance exit 2311b disposed immediately above the first start opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2000. Thus, the game ball is accepted into the first start port 2001 with a high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start port 2001 and detected by the first start port sensor 2011, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the storage tray 311.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate 2201A and is detected by the gate sensor 2202A, or passes through the gate 2201B and is detected by the gate sensor 2202B, and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above. In addition, the blade 2337 that closes the second start opening 2002 is spread for a predetermined time to be able to win a prize, and when the win is possible, the game ball is received by the second start opening 2002 and is applied to the second start opening sensor 2349. When detected, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage tray 311 via the main control board 4100 or the like.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002 and is detected by the first start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor 2349, the first start port At the opening 2001, the first special symbol lottery unit data is generated / extracted, and at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol lottery unit data is generated / extracted. Then, based on the extracted first special symbol lottery unit data, the variation display of the special symbols displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 641 and second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 is started. After that, the special symbol corresponding to the extracted special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2003 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired.

  In the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passing of the game ball of the gate 2201A or the gate 2201B. When the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 642 or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is awarded to the start ports 2001 and 2002 and the first start port sensor 2011, when detected by the second starting port sensor 2349, it is extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 2011 and the second starting port sensor 2349 until a special symbol change display is possible. The first special symbol lottery unit data and the second special symbol lottery unit data are stored and the display is suspended, and the stored special disorder The number of, and displays in the first special symbol memory indicator 643 or the second special symbol memory indicator 644. The first special symbol memory display 643 and the second special symbol memory display 644 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. In addition, the second special symbol lottery unit data stored (held) in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority reservation digest unit 4231 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. Execution (digestion) is prioritized over unit data. That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2002 is executed (digested) with priority over the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2001.

  Moreover, in the main control board 4100, the first special symbol lottery unit data extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 2011 is collated with a determination table described later, so that the first special symbol lottery unit data is obtained. , “Lost”, “Small Bonus”, and “Large Bonus” are determined, and “Large Bonus A”, “Large Bonus B”, “Large Bonus C”, “Large Bonus D”, “ It is also discriminated whether it is any one of “big hit E”.

  Similarly, the main control board 4100 compares the second special symbol lottery unit data extracted based on the detection of the second start port sensor 2349 with a determination table to be described later, thereby obtaining the second special symbol lottery unit data. Is determined to be “lost” or “big hit”. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, there is only one type of “big hit” “big hit A” based on the second special symbol lottery unit data.

  When the lottery result (special lottery result) based on the first special symbol lottery unit data extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 is “small hit”, the main control board 4100 Execute a small hit game. In the small hit game, the main control board 4100 repeats opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 a plurality of times in a short-time opening / closing pattern by the advantageous game state generating means 4232. The short-time opening / closing pattern is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is closed when a predetermined short-time elapses or when a predetermined number of game balls satisfy a winning condition in the special winning opening 2003. That is, in the small hit game, a small amount (for example, several to several tens) of prize balls can be awarded when a game ball wins the opening / closing member 2006 in a timely manner. No prize ball is awarded to the player.

  On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit A”, the main control board 4100 executes the long open big hit game. In the long open big hit game, the main control board 4100 repeats opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 a plurality of times in a long-time opening / closing pattern by the advantageous game state generating means 4232. The long-time opening / closing pattern indicates that after the opening / closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the opening / closing member 2006 is opened when a predetermined long period of time elapses or when a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the big winning opening 2003. This is a pattern for returning to the closed state. In the long-time opening / closing pattern, the time during which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened is sufficiently longer than the time during which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened in the short-time opening / closing pattern. That is, in the long open jackpot game, a large amount of prize balls are substantially given to the player as a privilege.

  Further, when the special lottery result is “big hit C” or “big hit D”, the main control board 4100 executes the short open big hit game. In the short open big hit game, the main control board 4100 repeats the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 a plurality of times in the short opening / closing pattern described above. That is, in the short open big hit game, when a game ball wins the opening / closing member 2006 in a timely manner, a small amount of award ball can be awarded, but a substantial amount of award ball as a privilege is not practically given to the player. .

  When the special lottery result is “big hit B”, the main control board 4100 executes the short open big hit game after the long open. In the short open big hit game after long open, the main control board 4100 repeats opening / closing of the open / close member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 a plurality of times in the long open / close pattern described above, and then the short time described above. It is designed to repeat multiple times in an open / close pattern. That is, in the short open big hit game after long open, during the first specific number of long open / close patterns, a large number of prize balls are substantially given to the player as a privilege, but the remaining number of short open / close patterns During the period, a large amount of prize balls are not substantially given to the player as a privilege. As a result, the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the jackpot game based on winning the jackpot B is smaller than the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the jackpot game based on winning the jackpot A. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot A is a jackpot having a higher value than the jackpot B.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit E”, the main control board 4100 executes the long open big hit game after the short open. In the long open big hit game after the short opening, the main control board 4100 repeats the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 by the advantageous game state generating means 4232 a plurality of times in the short opening / closing pattern described above, and then the long time described above. It is designed to repeat multiple times in an open / close pattern. That is, in the long open big hit game after the short opening, a prize ball is not substantially given to the player during the short time opening and closing pattern, but a lot of prize balls are substantially given as a privilege during the long time opening and closing pattern. It is given to the player.

  The operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of the “small hit” described above and the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of the “big hit C” and “big hit D” are the same. Whether the special lottery result is “small hit”, “big hit C”, or “big hit D” cannot be determined only by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006. In addition, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of “small hit”, “big hit C” and “big hit D” and the operation in the short time opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of “big hit E” are: Identical. As a result, the player operates the opening / closing member 2006 in a short-time opening / closing pattern to determine whether the special lottery result is “small jackpot”, “big jackpot C”, “big jackpot D”, or “big jackpot E”. I cannot judge while I am. That is, the player recognizes from the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 that the special lottery result is “hit E” when the opening / closing member 2006 operates in the short-time opening / closing pattern and then starts to operate in the long-time opening / closing pattern. it can. Then, when the opening / closing member 2006 operates in a short-time opening / closing pattern and the player does not operate in a long-time opening / closing pattern, the player has a special lottery result of “small hit”, “big hit C”, or “big hit D”. Can be recognized from the operation of the opening and closing member 2006.

  After the predetermined number of rounds, for “big hit”, the gaming state control means 4236 performs processing for exchanging the random number determination table with a high probability time table based on the big hit type. Note that the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of “small hit” described above and the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of “big hit C” and “big hit D” may not be completely the same. However, it is preferable to approximate to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish. Similarly, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of “small hit”, “big hit C”, and “big hit D”, and the short-time opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2006 performed in the case of “big hit E”. Although the operations do not have to be completely the same, it is preferable that they are approximated to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish them.

  As a result, if the special lottery results are “small hit”, “big hit C”, “big hit D”, “big hit E”, the player wants the player to be the “big hit E” with the most profit, If it is not a “big hit E”, hope that it will be the “big hit C” or “big hit D”, which is the next largest profit after “big hit E”, and watch the change, and increase the thrill of the subsequent change. However, this is one game of the pachinko machine 1. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the number of times of opening / closing (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing members 2006 of all the jackpot games is the same, no round display lamp is provided. As a result, the above-described gameability is improved by making it more difficult for the player to identify whether the special lottery result is “small hit”, “big hit C”, “big hit D”, or “big hit E”.

  Here, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 can take a plurality of types of gaming states. As an external game state in which the game state can be grasped from the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, an external normal game state (normal game state) and an external advantageous game state (chance game state) that is more advantageous to the player than this external normal game state The game state is controlled.

  The external normal game state is a game state in which the opening extension function (function that makes the opening time of the blade 2337 longer than usual) and the time-shortening function (function that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the special symbol) do not operate. 2337 is a gaming state that is not controlled by the promotion mode described later. That is, as described above, the blade 2337 opens and closes when the result of the normal lottery is a win, thereby enabling a game ball to be awarded to the second starting port 2002. As the operation mode when the blade 2337 operates, a first operation mode (normal mode) and a second operation mode (promotion mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first operation mode are prepared. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, in the gaming state where the opening extension function and the time shortening function do not operate, as a first operation mode, the probability that the normal lottery result is won is 2%, for example, the variation time of the normal symbol is 10 sec, the blade 2337 is It is set to open once per winning with an opening time of 0.1 sec per opening, or the closing time of 2 sec after the opening time of the blade 2337 0.1 sec per opening After that, it may be set to be opened for 3 seconds. In the gaming state in which the opening extension function and the time-shortening function are activated, the second operation mode is that the probability that the normal lottery result is won is 100%, for example, the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 sec, and the blade 2337 is 1 You may make it set so that it may be opened 3 times per winning with an opening time per opening of 0.95 sec. These are merely examples of operation modes, and the present embodiment is not limited to these specifications, and can be set as described later.

  In the external normal game state, the first operation mode (normal mode) is adopted as the operation mode when the blade 2337 operates. As described above, the first operation mode is a mode in which winning of a game ball to the second start port 2002 is less likely to be promoted as compared to the second operation mode.

  On the other hand, the external advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the opening extension function and the time-shortening function are activated, and is a gaming state in which the second operation mode (promotion mode) is adopted as the operation mode when the blade 2337 operates. is there. Here, the “promotion mode” is a mode in which winning of a game ball to the second start port 2002 is promoted.

  In the “promotion mode”, any one of the three modes of increasing the probability that the normal lottery result is won, shortening the lottery time (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), and increasing the opening time of the blade 2337 is selected. Or it is good also as a promotion aspect by performing only two, and it is good also as a promotion aspect by performing all three.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 includes an internally controlled gaming state that is difficult to grasp from the appearance. In the present embodiment, a gaming state in which the probability changing function (so-called probability changing function) is activated and a gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated correspond to it.

  When the probability variation function does not operate, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will win a big hit is set to a predetermined low probability (first probability). On the other hand, when the probability variation function is activated, a predetermined high probability that the probability of winning the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result is at least twice as large as the first probability (second probability: this implementation) In the embodiment, the second probability is set to 10 times the first probability, for example. In this way, when the probability variation function is activated, the probability of winning the jackpot is at least double that when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is not activated when the probability variation function is activated. This is to reduce the interest by reducing the number of fluctuations in the special symbol so that it can win the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the external normal gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated is referred to as “external normal gaming state A”, and the external normal gaming state in which the probability changing function is activated is referred to as “external normal gaming state B”. The external advantageous game state in which the probability changing function is activated is referred to as “external advantageous game state B”. In the present embodiment, the external advantageous gaming state in which the probability changing function is not activated is not set, but an external advantageous gaming state in which the probability varying function is not activated may be set.

  In the present embodiment, when a right-handed game is performed, it is possible to enter a game ball into the gate 2201A and the second start port 2002, and it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the gate 2201B. When a hit game is performed, the game ball can pass through the gate 2201B, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the gate 2201A and the second start port 2002. Further, in the present embodiment, when a left-handed game is performed, a game ball can be inserted into the first starting port 2001, and when a right-handed game is performed, a game ball is inserted into the first starting port 2001. It is difficult to configure. Therefore, in the external advantageous game state B, it is advantageous for the player to play a right-handed game, and in the external normal game states A and B, it is advantageous to perform a left-handed game for the player. ing.

  In addition, a change from one of the gaming states to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player is performed only when the condition device is activated based on a special lottery result. Of the three game states (external normal game state A, external normal game state B, and external advantageous game state B), the most advantageous game state for the player is the external advantageous game state B, which is also for the player. The most disadvantageous gaming state is the external normal gaming state A. Therefore, the change from the external normal game state A to another game state (external normal game state B, external advantageous game state B) is not performed unless the condition device is activated. The condition device will only work if you win a jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability changing function is activated by the game state control means 4236 after the big hit game, regardless of which of the big hit A to the big hit E is won. On the other hand, after the probability change function is activated, a predetermined number (specifically, 74) is obtained without the total number of lotteries of lottery based on the first special symbol lottery unit data and lottery based on the second special symbol lottery unit data becoming a big hit. When the value reaches, the gaming state control means 4236 stops the operation of the probability changing function. That is, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called ST machine having a probability variation entry rate of 100% and a number cut probability variation specification after a big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when one of the jackpots A, B, C, E is won, the game mode control means 4236 sets the operation mode of the blade 2337 to the promotion mode after the jackpot game. The On the other hand, after the promotion mode is set, a predetermined number (specifically, 75 is determined without the total number of lotteries of the lottery based on the first special symbol lottery unit data and the lottery based on the second special symbol lottery unit data being a big hit. ), The operation state of the blade 2337 is changed from the promotion mode to the normal mode by the gaming state control means 4236.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when one of the jackpots A, B, C, E is won, the number of special lotteries after the jackpot game (the lottery based on the first or second special symbol lottery unit data) is increased. Until the predetermined number is reached, it is set to the external advantageous gaming state B. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the number of special lotteries after the big hit game reaches a predetermined number, the external normal gaming state A is set.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, if one of the jackpots A, B, C, E is won, a jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot is performed, and then, unless the jackpot is won The first to fifth special lotteries are performed in the external advantageous gaming state B, and the sixth and subsequent special lotteries are performed in the external normal gaming state A.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot D is won, the operation mode of the blades 2337 is maintained in the normal mode without being set in the promotion mode. Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot D in the external normal gaming state A, after the big hit game is played, it becomes the external normal gaming state B (so-called latent probability variation state), and then 5 special without winning the jackpot After the lottery, the external normal gaming state B returns to the external normal gaming state A.

[7. Control processing]
Next, various control processes executed on the main board 4000 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 of the main board 4000.

  As shown in FIG. 222, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 220) executes power-on processing (step S10). In this power-on process, first, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). That is, the RAM (data memory) of the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment has a backup area in which various control data are backed up by constantly supplying power. When the power supply is stopped, the pachinko machine 1 performs a process of temporarily saving various control data stored in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a to the backup area, and this power is temporarily restored when the power is restored. By reading the saved data into the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a, a game with continuity can be executed from the time of power-off.

  Therefore, in this power-on process (step S10), if the backup data (data in the backup area) is normal, the power supply is returned to the state when the power supply is stopped according to the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Execute processing (power recovery processing). On the other hand, if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is deleted. After that, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as, for example, the winning probability of jackpot and the control data indicating the current gaming state are written in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a with respective initial parameters. (Initialization process). Also, when the power is turned on for the first time after commercialization, various control data necessary for game progress are written with respective initial parameters.

  Note that the current gaming state written in the power-on process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled based on this command. In this way, the current gaming state at the time of a power failure is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the current gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 after the power is restored. In addition, the internal gaming state can be matched with the gaming state displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (the gaming state at the time of power failure is not stored in the peripheral control board 4140). By the way, regarding the current gaming state, in order to synchronize the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 and the special symbol corresponding symbol of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern to be described later is started at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started. The information of the command is transmitted. Immediately after transmitting the command, a command for the current game information is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 each time. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 can always grasp the current gaming state.

  However, in this power-on process (step S10), it is also determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a that instructs to erase the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is on. That is, even when the RAM clear switch 624a is on, the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is erased. At the same time, various control data necessary for the progress of the game, such as the jackpot winning probability and the control data indicating the current gaming state, are written in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a with respective initial parameters. (Initialization process). In the state in which such initialization processing is performed (at the initial time), the control data indicating the jackpot winning probability is the first probability, and the control data indicating the current gaming state is the blade 2337. Operates in the first operation mode, and shows an “external normal gaming state A”, which is a gaming state in which the probability changing function does not operate.

  In the power-on process (step S10), a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 220) is activated when such initialization processing is executed is sent to the peripheral control board 4140 (FIG. 220). The process of setting to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is again performed. When started, power-on processing is executed.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 214, in the power-on process (step S10) according to the present embodiment, all the game balls stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1. Process. In this process, first, as shown in FIG. 214, the distribution unit 3130 of the distribution effect device 3125 is stopped in a state of being rotated counterclockwise. Next, all the game balls stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121 are supplied one after another onto the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, so that the supplied game balls are moved by the inclination of the guide member 3131. The gas is discharged from the discharge passage 3218 through the one inlet 3153a.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 395. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure warning signal is detected by the main control board 4100 in step S20, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S40).

  The process at the time of the power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as “recovery”). This is a process for temporarily saving data in the backup area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a in order to start. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power interruption occurrence processing is not an interruption processing, but as a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. Built in the main system process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (step S20: NO), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 223 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure notice signal is detected in the main system process (step S20: YES). First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, a checksum in the RAM processing area of the main control MPU 4100a is calculated, and the calculation results and various game data are stored in the RAM backup area of the main control MPU 4100a (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a before the power failure is properly maintained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the main control MPU 4100a from accessing the RAM (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to an extremely short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”) and the process at the time of power interruption occurs, the power supply voltage is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, a power interruption occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power failure, and even when the infinite loop shown in FIG.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as an EEPROM) may be provided instead of the RAM backup area of the main control MPU 4100a. In this case, there is a merit that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire RAM area of the main control MPU 4100a may be a backup area in which data is backed up by always supplying power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the specific area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to another area when the power is shut off. In addition, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area when the power is restored, the load required for these processes is reduced.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 224 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 of the main board 4000 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 4100a executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, a process of monitoring detection signals of the various sensors described above (gate sensor 2202A, first start port sensor 2011, second start port sensor 2349, count sensor 2014, etc.) is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 1186 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / normal electric accessory control process in step S90H, the control process related to the normal symbol display 645 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 2202A in the sensor monitoring process (step S60), and the blade Processing for performing opening / closing control of 2337 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process of step S100, a series of processing from the start of the change of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 as the special electric accessory is performed. Execute the process to do.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, in addition to the above-described special random numbers (first special random number and second special random number) and ordinary random numbers, design random numbers, reach determination random numbers (more precisely, high Random number for expected effect determination), random number for first variation pattern, random number for second variation pattern, variation type random number, and the like.

  The special random number is a random number used for determining whether or not to generate a special electric winning combination small hit control process (big hit game) or a special electric winning combination small hit control process (small hit game). That is, the first special random number is used to determine whether the first special lottery result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”, and the second special random number is “ It is used to determine whether it is “big hit” or “losing”. That is, there is no “small hit” in the second special lottery result based on the second special random number. The symbol random number is a random number used for determining the type of jackpot (big hit A to jackpot E) when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. The determination of whether the first and second special lottery results are “Big Bonus”, “Small Bonus”, “Lost” and the type of jackpot is “Big Jack”, “Small Bonus”, and each jackpot The determination is made based on a hit determination table in which the winning value of the type is described. An example of the hit determination table is shown in Table 1. In the present embodiment, each of the first and second special random numbers takes a value of, for example, 0 to 396, and each of the design random numbers takes a value of 0 to 199.

  As can be seen from Table 1, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of whether the lottery based on the first special random number or the lottery based on the second special random number is performed. Specifically, when the probability variation function does not operate as described above, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will win a big win is both set to about 1/100. On the other hand, when the probability changing function is activated, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will win a big win is set to about 1/10). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the lottery jackpot winning probability based on the first special random number may be different from the jackpot winning probability based on the first special random number.

  In the present embodiment, the selection rate of each jackpot type is different between the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the first special random number and the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the second special random number. For example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery based on the first special random number, the selection rate of each jackpot type selected based on the symbol random number is the distribution of the symbol random numbers related to the first special symbol shown in Table 1 above. As can be calculated from the above, “big hit A” is 25%, “big hit B” is 2.5%, “big hit C” is 25%, “big hit D” is 2.5%, and “big hit E” is 45%. The Further, for example, when a big win is won by lottery based on the second special random number, the “big hit A” becomes 100% regardless of the value of the design random number. Not limited to this, there is no difference in the selection rate of each jackpot type when winning a jackpot with a lottery based on the first special random number and when winning a jackpot with a lottery based on the second special random number Also good.

  The ordinary random number is a random number used for determining whether or not the blade 2337 is controlled to be opened. The ordinary random number takes a value of 0 to 100 in this embodiment, and the winning value of the ordinary random number is set to 0 or 2 in the case of the external normal gaming state, and 1 to 100 in the case of the external advantageous gaming state. Is set. The random number for reach determination determines whether or not to perform high-expected effects such as reach effects when the special lottery result is “losing” (not “big hit” or “small win”). ) Is a random number used. The reach determination random number takes a value of 0 to 200 in this embodiment, and the winning value of the reach determination random number is set to 0 to 10 in the lottery in the first special symbol, and 0 to in the lottery in the second special symbol. 9 is set. The random number for the first variation pattern and the random number for the second variation pattern are the variation patterns of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 corresponding to the first and second lottery results. This is a random number used to determine the change pattern of the effect image and decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 in accordance with the determination and the first and second lottery results. In the present embodiment, the first variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 99, and the second variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 199. Accordingly, the number of combinations of the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern random number is 100 × 200 = 20000. The variation type random number is used to determine the type of variation pattern (in this embodiment, there are usually five types of variation types of 2, 3, 4, 5, and 5 as described later). It is a random number. In the present embodiment, the variable type random number takes a value of 0 to 199 (total number 200).

  It should be noted that the effect image and the decorative pattern variation pattern that are display-controlled by the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be determined by the first and second variation pattern random numbers. It may be determined by the control MPU 4140a or the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a mounted on the liquid crystal control board 4150 (see FIG. 220 for both). The variation pattern random number is not essential, and the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number.

  Among these random numbers, the winning random number update process updates special random numbers, design random numbers, and ordinary random numbers. Here, the special random number, the design random number, and the ordinary random number are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability determined to generate “big hit” or “small hit”, probability to determine that blade 2337 is controlled to be opened) in each random number in a predetermined period is made constant, and the target is hit. This prevents the probability from being biased. As a result, it is possible to suppress a specific player who makes a hit or the like from being in an advantageous state compared to other players, and to suppress unfairness among the players.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number regardless of the occurrence of “big hit” or “small win” and the display result of the normal symbol are updated. The random numbers updated on the main control board 4100 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update process, the initial value of the special random number that starts counting next when the counter that updates the special random number makes one round. The initial value determination random number and the like are also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for acquiring a special random number, two first special random number generation means 4212 for generating a first special random number and second special random number generation means 4222 for generating a second special random number are provided. Although means are provided, a configuration in which only one of them is provided may be employed.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

  In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked, and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed (step S120 to step S230).

  When the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (step S120: YES), A fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether or not “big hit” or “small win” has been won, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (step S120: NO), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (step S140: YES), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, a decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a variation pattern of effects are determined, and the variation The time of change set in accordance with the pattern (the time from the start of the change display of the special symbol in either the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 to the stop display) is used as a timer. Set and update the processing flag to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (step S140: NO), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (step S170: YES), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined to be “big hit” in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined to be “small hit”, the process is selected. The flag is updated to “4”, and if neither the big hit or the small win is determined (losing), the processing selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (step S170: NO), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (step S190: YES), a jackpot game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type (big hit A to jackpot E) is determined, and the number of rounds, the opening time and the game ball of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 are controlled according to the jackpot type. Set the winning limit number and update the processing flag to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (step S190: NO), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the processing flag is 4 (step S210: YES), the process when the small hit is established (step S220) is executed. In this small hitting establishment process, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (step S210: NO), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (step S230: YES), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is controlled based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be awarded. When the big hit game ends, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function and whether or not the operation mode of the blade 2337 is set to the promotion mode, and the processing flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (step S230: NO), the special electric accessory small hit control process (step S250) is executed. In the special electric accessory small hitting control process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is performed based on the number of opening times, the opening time, and the limited number set in the small hitting establishment process (step S220). Control is performed (execution of the small hit game), and when the special electric accessory small hit control process ends, a process of updating the processing flag to “0” is performed. Note that the small hit game performed in the special electric accessory small hit control process is not a game with the operation of the condition device like the big hit game, but as described above, the short hit big hit game, which is a kind of the big hit game, and the pole It is a similar game.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting entrance prize process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first and second start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first / second start opening winning process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 2002 (step S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 2349 is confirmed. At this time, if a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2349, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 2002 (step S1101: YES). If no game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 2349, it is determined that no game ball is won at the second start port 2002 (step S1101: NO).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that a game ball has won the second start opening 2002, second special symbol lottery unit data is acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102).

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102: YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs a second hold storage process (step S1103). The process proceeds to step S1104. In the second reserved memory process, a process of storing the second special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball in the second starting port 2002 in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 4224 is mainly performed.

  When the second reserved storage process is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes a second special symbol preceding process (step S1104).

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing process steps of the second special symbol preceding process. In the second special symbol predecessor process, a game ball is awarded to the second start opening 2002 triggered by the second special symbol lottery unit data (second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed) acquired in the previous step S1103. In this process, a winning notification command for notifying (Step S1101) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  When the second special symbol preceding process is started, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the preceding determination condition is satisfied (step S11041). The preceding determination condition for determining whether or not to perform the preceding determination for the second special symbol is whether or not the gaming state is the external advantageous gaming state B. That is, the preceding determination for the second special symbol is executed only when the game is in the external advantageous game state B, and is not executed in other game states, for example, the external normal game states A and B. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in principle, the second start opening 2002 that is triggered by the special lottery (second special lottery) related to the second special symbol is in the external advantageous gaming state B (when right-handed gaming is recommended). Most of the prizes are won, and there are few prizes in other gaming states. For this reason, in the external normal gaming states A and B, there is almost no accumulation of reserve for the second special symbol, and the effect based on the preceding determination for the second special symbol (so-called pre-reading effect) does not become effective. Because.

  If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied (step S11041: NO), the first type winning notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S11042), and the second special symbol preceding process is terminated. To do. The first type winning notification command is a command indicating the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed has the second special symbol holding number “0”, and either the first special symbol or the second special symbol varies (hereinafter, In the case of the second special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball, the first type winning notification command is “6302”. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the second special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball when the second special symbol hold number is “1”, the first type prize winning The notification command is “6303”. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the second special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball when the second special symbol holding number is “2”, the first type prize winning The notification command is “6304”. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the second special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball when the second special symbol hold number is “3”, the first type prize winning The notification command is “6305”. Note that the command “6301” is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the second special symbol hold count becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied (step S11041: YES), the main control MPU 4100a executes the preceding determination process based on the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (step S11043).

  The preceding determination process based on the second special symbol lottery unit data is a jackpot lottery based on the second special symbol lottery unit data to be performed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process, which will be described later, and an effect lottery (determination of the variation pattern). A part or all of the game ball winnings at the second start opening 2002 that triggered the acquisition of the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed prior to the start of the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing described later. This process is executed immediately after.

  In the preceding determination process based on the second special symbol lottery unit data, as the preceding determination result, for example, “no reach reach loss”, “low expectation reach lose”, “medium expect reach reach lose”, “high expect reach reach lose”, “big hit A” It is determined that it is either. The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “unreach without reach” in this process is the case where the second special symbol lottery unit data is to be processed later in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The second special lottery result will be “losing” and the reach lottery result will be “losing”.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “low expectation reach lose” in the present process will be processed later when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The second special lottery result is “losing”, the reach lottery result is “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a relatively low expectation level is selected.

  In the second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “medium expected reach lose” in this process, when the second special symbol lottery unit data is to be processed later in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process, The second special lottery result is “losing”, the reach lottery result is “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a medium jackpot expectation is selected.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “High Expected Reach Loss” in this process will be processed later when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The second special lottery result is “losing”, the reach lottery result is “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a relatively high expectation level of the big hit is selected.

  The second special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “big hit A” in this process will be processed when the second special symbol lottery unit data is processed later in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. The result of the 2 special lottery will be “Big hit A”.

  When the preceding determination process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a second type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 according to the processing result of the preceding determination process (step S11044), and ends the second special symbol preceding process. To do. Here, the second type winning notification command is a command indicating the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed, and a command indicating the determination result in the preceding determination process. . Note that, unlike the second type winning notification command, the first type winning notification command described above indicates only the number of reserved storage in which the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is stored. Judgment results are not shown.

  As will be understood from the above description, every time a game ball wins the second start port 2002, immediately after the winning is detected, either the first type winning notification command or the second type winning notification command is sent from the main control MPU 4100a. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Among these, the transmission of the second type winning notification command indicating the processing result of the preceding determination processing relating to the second special symbol is performed only for winning when there is a gaming machine in the external advantageous gaming state B. Therefore, for the second special symbol, the second type winning notification command is actually transmitted by performing a certain number of odd-change game (right-handed game) performed over a predetermined number of times after the big hit game. It is in the middle of being.

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines in step S1101 that a game ball has not won the second start port 2002 (step S1101: NO), and in step S1102, the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is the upper limit. When it is determined that the value of 4 has been reached (step S1102: NO) and when the second special symbol preceding process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 2001 (step S1105). Specifically, the presence or absence of the game ball detection by the first start port sensor 2011 is confirmed. At this time, when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 2011, it is determined that the game ball has won the first start port 2001 (step S1105: YES). If no game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 2011, it is determined that no game ball has won a prize at the first start port 2001 (step S1105: NO).

  When it is determined in step S1105 that a game ball has won the first starting port 2001, first special symbol lottery unit data is acquired, and the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 is less than the upper limit of 4. Whether or not (step S1106).

  If it is determined in step S1106 that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1106: YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs a first hold storage process (step S1107). In the first hold storage process, a process of storing the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball in the first start port 2001 in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is mainly performed. Note that the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball at the first start port 2001 is the same as the second special symbol lottery unit data acquired by winning the game ball at the second start port 2002. Is stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214. When the first hold storage process is performed, the main control MPU 4100a executes a first special symbol advance process (step S1108).

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing process steps of the first special symbol preceding process. In the first special symbol predecessor process, a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 2001 triggered by the first special symbol lottery unit data (first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed) acquired in the previous step S1106. In this process, a winning notification command for notifying (Step S1105) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  When the first special symbol preceding process is started, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the preceding determination condition is satisfied (step S11081). The preceding determination condition for determining whether or not to perform the preceding determination for the first special symbol is whether or not the gaming state is one of the external normal gaming states A and B. That is, the preceding determination for the first special symbol is executed when the game state is the external normal game state A or B, and is not executed when the game state is another game state, for example, the external advantageous game state B. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in principle, the first starting port 2001 that is triggered by the special lottery (second special lottery) related to the first special symbol is in the external normal gaming state A, B (when left-handed gaming is recommended) ) Is almost no win, and there is almost no win in the external advantageous game state B. For this reason, in the external advantageous gaming state B, there is almost no accumulation for the first special symbol, and the effect (so-called pre-reading effect) based on the preceding determination for the first special symbol is not effective. is there.

  If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied (step S11081: NO), the main control MPU 4100a transmits a first type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S11082) and ends the second special symbol preceding process. To do. The first type winning notification command is a command indicating the number of reserved storage of the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed has the first special symbol holding number “0” and is in a fluctuating state, the first special symbol lottery unit data is based on the winning game ball. In the case of special symbol lottery unit data, the first type winning notification command is “6202”.

  In addition, when the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the first special symbol lottery unit data based on the winning game ball when the first special symbol hold number is “1”, the first type prize winning unit The notification command is “6203”. In addition, when the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the first special symbol lottery unit data based on the game ball won when the first special symbol hold number is “2”, the first type winning notification The command is “6204”. In addition, when the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is the first special symbol lottery unit data based on the game ball won when the first special symbol hold number is “3”, the first type winning notification The command is “6205”. Note that the command “6201” is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the number of first special symbol reservations becomes “0”.

  The winning notification command transmitted when the processing target is the first special symbol lottery unit data is sent from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 immediately after the winning based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001. It can be said that it is a command to be transmitted. Also, the winning notification command transmitted when the processing target is the second special symbol lottery unit data is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002 and immediately after the winning from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board. It can also be said that the command is transmitted to 4140.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied (step S11081: NO), the main control MPU 4100a executes the preceding determination process based on the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (step S11083).

  The preceding determination process based on the first special symbol lottery unit data is a jackpot lottery based on the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed and an effect lottery (determination of the fluctuation pattern) performed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process described later. A part or all of the game balls are awarded to the first starting port 2001 that triggered the acquisition of the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed prior to the start of the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing described later. This process is executed immediately after.

  In the preceding determination process based on the first special symbol lottery unit data, as the preceding determination result, for example, “Leach without reach”, “Low expected reach lose”, “Medium expected reach lose”, “High expected reach lose”, “Big hit A”, It is determined that any one of “big hit B”, “big hit C”, “big hit D”, “big hit E”, and “small hit”. The first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “unreach without reach” in this process will be processed later when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The first special lottery result will be “losing”, and the reach lottery result will be “losing”.

  In this process, the first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “low expectation reach lose” will be processed later when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The first special lottery result is “losing”, the reach lottery result is “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a relatively low expectation level is selected.

  In this process, the first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “medium expected reach lose” will be processed later when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The first special lottery result is “losing”, the reach lottery result is “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a medium jackpot expectation is selected.

  In this process, the first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “high expectation reach lose” will be processed later when the first special symbol lottery unit data is processed in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. The first special lottery result is “losing”, the reach lottery result is “winning”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the reach production having a relatively high expectation degree of the big hit is selected.

  The first special symbol lottery unit data determined as “big hit A” to “big hit E” in this processing will be processed later in the variation start processing and variation pattern setting processing. In this case, the results of the first special lottery are “big hit A” to “big hit E”, respectively.

  The first special symbol lottery unit data determined to be “small hit” in this process will be the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed later in the variation start process and the variation pattern setting process. One special lottery result will be "small hit".

  When the preceding determination process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a second type winning notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 according to the processing result of the preceding determination process (step S11084), and ends the first special symbol preceding process. To do. Here, the second type winning notification command is a command indicating the number of reserved storage of the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed, and a command indicating the determination result in the preceding determination process. . Note that, unlike the second type winning notification command, the first type winning notification command described above indicates only the number of reserved storage in which the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is stored. Judgment results are not shown.

  As will be understood from the above description, every time a game ball wins the first start port 2001, immediately after detection of the winning, either the first type winning notification command or the second type winning notification command is sent from the main control MPU 4100a. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Among these, the transmission of the second type winning notification command indicating the processing result of the preceding determination processing relating to the first special symbol is performed only for winning when there is a gaming machine in either the external normal gaming state A or B. Therefore, the second type winning notification command is transmitted substantially for the first special symbol while the left-handed game is being performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the first type winning notification command or the second type winning notification command immediately displays the hold display in the hold display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, which will be described later, based on the win notification command. To control. That is, when the value of the second digit from the top of the winning notification command is “2”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the winning notification command has received a winning (first special symbol lottery unit data of the first special symbol lottery unit data). If the value of the second digit from the top of the winning notification command is “3”, the winning notification command is awarded to the second starting port 2002 (second special symbol). It is recognized that the command is based on acquisition of lottery unit data. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a recognizes the number of pending displays to be displayed based on the first digit value from the bottom of the winning notification command.

  Specifically, for example, the first type winning notification command will be described as an example. When the first type winning notification command is “6202”, the fact that there is one reserved memory for the first special symbol is displayed on hold. To do. In addition, when the first type winning notification command is “6203”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a suspends and displays that there are two suspending memories for the first special symbol. In addition, when the first type winning notification command is “6204”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a suspends and displays that there are three reserved memories for the first special symbol, and the first type winning notification command is “6205”. If it is, the fact that there are four reserved memories for the first special symbol is displayed on hold.

  If the first type winning notification command is “6302”, the fact that there is one reserved memory for the second special symbol is displayed on hold. In addition, when the first type winning notification command is “6303”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a suspends and displays that there are two suspending memories for the second special symbol. In addition, when the first type winning notification command is “6304”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays that there are three reserved memories for the second special symbol, and the first type winning notification command is “6305”. If it is, the fact that there are four reserved memories for the second special symbol is displayed on hold. When the second type winning notification command is received, the second digit value and the lower first digit from the top of the second type winning notification command are the same as when the first type winning notification command is received. Based on the value, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the hold display of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the second type winning notification command has the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the second type winning notification command based on the received second type winning notification command. Even though the special symbol lottery unit data is held, the lottery result (including the special lottery result and the reach lottery result) based on the special symbol lottery unit data can be roughly recognized in advance. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the lottery result recognized by the second type winning notification command, so that a lottery based on the special symbol lottery unit data is held in advance even though some special symbol lottery unit data is held. An effect reflecting the result (so-called pre-reading effect) can be performed. Details of the prefetch effect will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 226, the description will be continued. When the main control MPU 4100a determines in step S1105 that a game ball has not won the first start port 2001 (step S1105: NO), and in step S1106, the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is the upper limit. When it is determined that the value of 4 has been reached (step S1106: NO) and when the first special symbol preceding process is completed, the first and second start opening winning processes are both terminated.

  According to the first special symbol preceding process of the first and second start-up prize winning processes described above, the first special symbol is in the fluctuating state in the external normal gaming state A and the external normal gaming state B, and When the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol lottery unit data is 1 to 3, when a game ball wins at the first starting port 2001, a preceding determination process is performed immediately after winning and peripheral control of the preceding determination result is performed. It transmits to the board | substrate 4140 for every prize. As described above, the preceding determination result indicates in advance a result when the first special symbol lottery unit data is the target of the special lottery and the reach lottery at the start of the fluctuation. Then, it is left to the peripheral control board 4140 to determine whether or not to actually perform the prefetch effect and what kind of prefetch effect to perform. Also, for the second special symbol, when the external advantageous game state A and the external advantageous game state B are in a fluctuating state and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol lottery unit data is 1 to 3. When a game ball wins at the second starting port 2002, a preceding determination process is performed immediately after winning a prize, and a preceding determination result is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 for each winning. Then, it is left to the peripheral control board 4140 to determine whether or not to actually perform the prefetch effect and what kind of prefetch effect to perform.

  Conventionally, in the main control MPU 4100a, a predetermination process is performed, it is determined whether or not a prefetch effect is to be performed, and if it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be performed, a command instructing the prefetch effect is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It was. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command for instructing a prefetch effect, the peripheral control board 4140 performs the prefetch effect according to the command. When preparing a plurality of types of pre-reading effects, it is also necessary to determine the types of pre-reading effects in the main control MPU 4100a, and to transmit a command for specifying the type of the pre-reading effects to the peripheral control board 4140. there were. For this reason, when changing the pre-reading effect specifications, such as changing the execution frequency of the pre-reading effect, adding a type of pre-reading effect, or changing the big hit expectation when the pre-reading effect is performed, Not only the control program of the MPU 4140a but also the control program of the main control MPU 4100a is inevitably changed, which may prolong the development period and complicate the development work.

  However, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control MPU 4100a only determines in advance the results of the special lottery and the reach lottery, and transmits the results to the peripheral control board 4140. It is left to the peripheral control board 4140 to determine whether or not to perform and what kind of pre-reading effect to perform. For this reason, when changing the pre-reading effect specifications, such as changing the execution frequency of the pre-reading effect, adding a type of pre-reading effect, or changing the big hit expectation when the pre-reading effect is performed, Since only the control program of the MPU 4140a needs to be changed, the development period can be prolonged and the development work can be facilitated.

  In step S1102, the second special symbol lottery unit data acquired in step S1101 is obtained when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 is the upper limit value when a game ball wins the second start port 2002. Discard. Similarly, in step S1105, the first special symbol lottery unit data acquired in step S1104 when the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 is the upper limit when a game ball wins the first starting port 2001. Is discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start opening 2002, the acquisition of the second special symbol lottery unit data is not necessarily performed in step S1101, but may be performed between steps S1101 to S1103. For example, the second special symbol lottery unit data is not acquired in step S1101 and the second special symbol lottery unit data is determined in step S1102 after determining that the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is less than the upper limit value. May be acquired, or may be acquired in the second reserved storage process in step S1103.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won the first starting port 2001, the acquisition of the first special symbol lottery unit data is not necessarily performed in step S1105, and may be performed between steps S1105 to S1107. . For example, without acquiring the first special symbol lottery unit data in step S1105, the first special symbol lottery unit data is determined in step S1106 after determining that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is less than the upper limit value. May be acquired, or may be acquired in the first reserved storage process in step S1107.

  Thus, in this embodiment, after performing the winning process (steps S1101 to S1104) to the second starting port 2002, the winning process (steps S1105 to 1108) to the first starting port 2001 is performed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 2001 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 2002 may be executed.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is zero. (Step S1301).

  If the number of reservations in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is not 0 (step S1301: NO), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the second special symbol lottery unit data to be processed from the second special symbol storage unit 4224. (Step S1302). As described above, the second special symbol lottery unit data is stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 so that the storage order can be specified up to four, and is processed in the stored order.

  On the other hand, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is 0 (step S1301: YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is 0. Is determined (step S1303).

  If the number of holds in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 is not 0 (step S1303: NO), the main control MPU 4100a acquires the first special symbol lottery unit data to be processed from the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. (Step S1304). As described above, the first special symbol lottery unit data is stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 so that the storage order can be specified up to four, and is processed in the stored order.

  As will be understood from the above description, the special symbol lottery unit data is stored (held) in the special symbol hold storage means 4214 and 4224 until the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. It can be seen that it is subject to processing (subsequently, subject to jackpot lottery etc.). In the present embodiment, the start condition for the second special symbol lottery unit data is, for example, another second special symbol lottery suspended prior to the second special symbol lottery unit data at the time when the variation start process is performed. There is no unit data. In addition, the start condition for the first special symbol lottery unit data is, for example, that there is no second special symbol lottery unit data being held at the time when the variation start processing is performed, and the first special symbol lottery unit There is no other first special symbol lottery unit data reserved prior to the data.

  On the other hand, when the number of reservations in the first special symbol storage unit 4214 is 0 (step S1303: YES), the main control MPU 4100a ends the variation start process.

  When the main control MPU 4100a acquires the second special symbol lottery unit data or the first special symbol lottery unit data, the variation corresponding to the acquired special symbol lottery unit data (that is, the variation started by this variation start process) : Also called target variation), it is determined whether or not the variation of the game state is changed (step S1305). The change in the game state change time is the 75th change from the previous jackpot. The main control MPU 4100a refers to the variation counter 4242 to determine whether or not the target variation is a variation of the gaming state change times.

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines that the target variation is the gaming state change time (step S1305: YES), the main control MPU 4100a changes the gaming state (step S1306). When the target variation is the fifth variation counted from the previous jackpot, the main control MPU 4100a changes the gaming state from the external advantageous gaming state B to the external normal gaming state A. That is, the main control MPU 4100a changes the operation mode of the blade 2337 from the promotion mode to the normal mode and stops the operation of the probability changing function.

  When the main control MPU 4100a determines that the target variation is not the game state change time (step S1305: NO), or when the game state is changed in step S1306, the main control MPU 4100a advances the process to step S1307.

  In step S1307, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the gaming state (external normal gaming state B or external advantageous gaming state B) in which the probability changing function is operating. Here, if it is a gaming state in which the probability changing function is operating (step S1307: YES), the hit determination table at the time of high probability is selected from the hit determination table (step S1308).

  On the other hand, if the probability changing function is not activated in step S1305 (step S1307: NO), the normal hit determination table is selected from the hit determination tables (step S1309).

  Then, a special random number (first special random number) included in the determination table selected in step S1308 or step S1309 and the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (first special symbol lottery unit data or second special symbol lottery unit data). Or the second special random number), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not it is a big hit (step S1310).

  If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is a jackpot (step S1310: YES), the main control MPU 4100a is configured to win a big hit based on the symbol random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. The type is determined (step S1311). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type is turned on (step S1312). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a sets the jackpot A flag to ON if the jackpot type is jackpot A, sets the jackpot B flag to ON if the jackpot type is jackpot B, and sets the jackpot type to jackpot C. If it is, the jackpot C flag is turned on. If the jackpot type is jackpot D, the jackpot D flag is turned on. If the jackpot type is jackpot E, the jackpot E flag is turned on. Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a updates the process flag to “1” (step S1315), and ends the variation start process.

  On the other hand, if the main control MPU 4100a determines that the jackpot determination is not a big win in step S1310 (step S1310: NO), the determination table shown in Table 1 and the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed (first special symbol lottery unit data) Alternatively, based on the special random number (first special random number or second special random number) included in the second special symbol lottery unit data), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (step S1313). When the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is a small hit (step S1313: YES), the main control MPU 4100a sets the small hit flag to the ON state (step S1314), and proceeds to step S1315. Then, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the special random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is not a small hit (step S1313: NO), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S1313, updates the processing flag to “1”, and fluctuates. End the start process.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The variation pattern setting process is a process of setting a variation pattern according to a special symbol lottery result (big hit, small hit, loss). In this process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is in an ON state, or whether or not a jackpot flag is in an ON state (step S1510). If the big hit flag or the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S1510: YES), hit variation pattern table setting processing is performed (step S1520), and then variation pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON in step S1510 (step S1510: NO), it is determined whether or not a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) with a high expectation degree for winning the big win should be performed. (Step S1530). Here, if it is determined that a high expectation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot should be performed (step S1530: YES), a high disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1540), and then the variation Pattern determination processing is performed (step S1560). Although the details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1530 that a high expectation effect with a high degree of expectation of winning the jackpot should not be performed (step S1530: NO), a low disappointment variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S1550), and then A variation pattern determination process is performed (step S1560). Although the details will be described later in this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table set in the variation pattern table setting process per low expectation loss and a variation type is determined for the determined variation pattern. Is done.

  Whether or not the high expectation effect should be performed is determined to be a high expectation effect if the reach determination random number described above is won in the high expectation effect lottery, and it has been lost in the high expectation effect lottery. Therefore, it is determined that the high expectation production is not performed. The high expectation effect lottery is performed using the reach determination random number included in the acquired special symbol lottery unit data to be processed when the symbol change is started when the special lottery result is lost. Here, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery may be different depending on whether the game is in the external normal game state or the external advantageous game state. Furthermore, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery may be different depending on the number of first special symbol hold and the number of second special symbol hold. For example, in the case of an external normal gaming state and the change is a change in the first special symbol, if the first special symbol hold number is 0, 10.5, the first special symbol hold number is If it is 1, it may be 1/12, if the first special symbol reservation number is 2, it may be 13.5, and if the first special symbol reservation number is 3, it may be 1/15. In the case of an external normal gaming state) and the change is a change in the second special symbol, the probability of winning the high expectation effect lottery is 10.5 if the number of second special symbol hold is zero. 1/2, if the second special symbol hold number is 1, 1/12, if the second special symbol hold number is 2, 13.5, if the second special symbol hold number is 3, then 15 It may be a fraction. In the case of an external advantageous game state, the probability of winning the high-expected effect lottery may always be 1/14 regardless of the number of first special symbol hold and the number of second special symbol hold.

  Next, when the variation pattern is determined in step S1560, a value representing the combination of the determined variation pattern and variation type is set as a selection value (step S1570), and the combination of the variation pattern and variation type is supported. The variable time value to be set is set in the timer (step S1580). For example, the fluctuation time value is set in advance for each combination of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation type. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1590), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  A plurality of LEDs are lit in a predetermined lighting pattern on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 based on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process.

[About hit variation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the hit variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 231 and 232. FIG. 231 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 232 is a table showing the distribution of tables to be set in the hit variation pattern table setting process.

  In the hit variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 231, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15201). As described above, there are three types of game states: the external normal game state A, the external normal game state B, and the external advantageous game state B. For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag is turned on. ing. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes the hit type (step S15202). The hit type is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a as described above. For example, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes which of the jackpot A flag, jackpot B flag, jackpot C flag, jackpot D flag, jackpot E flag, and jackpot flag is turned on, so that the jackpot A˜ Recognize whether E or small hit. Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the winning variation pattern based on the gaming state, the hit type, the first variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed, and the value of the variation counter 4242. A table is selected (step S15203), and the hit variation pattern table setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, there are 14 types of hits A to N as shown in FIG. One of the winning variation pattern tables A to J is associated with the combination of the gaming state, the winning type, and the first changing pattern random number. And about the fluctuation | variation to a predetermined number of times after jackpot, another special table KN is further matched. Note that the special tables K to N are preferentially selected for the variation up to the fourth time after the big hit. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called number-of-turn probability variation machine that is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state B at least five times after the big hit game. Of these, the special tables K to N are selected for the first to fourth variations, and the tables G to J are selected for the fifth variation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 232, when the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is jackpot A, the total number of first variation patterns is 100 (0 to 99). Of the random numbers, 52 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table A, 30 values are associated with the hit variation pattern table B, and 18 values correspond to the hit variation pattern table C. It is attached. Therefore, when the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is jackpot A, the win fluctuation pattern table setting process has a probability of 52/100. A is selected, hit variation pattern table B is selected with a probability of 30/100, and hit variation pattern table C is selected with a probability of 18/100. When the game state is the external normal game state A or the external normal game state B and the hit type is jackpot A, tables other than the win fluctuation pattern tables A to C are selected in the win fluctuation pattern table setting process. Never happen.

[Highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process]
Next, the highly expected deviating variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 233 and 234. FIG. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 234 is a table showing the distribution of tables to be set in the high-expected disappointment variation pattern table setting process.

  In the highly disappointing variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 233, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15401). For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag is turned on. ing. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a selects a high-expectation variation pattern setting table based on the gaming state, the first variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed, and the value of the variation counter 4242 ( In step S15402), the high expectation disapproval variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 234, there are five types of high-expected disappointment variation pattern tables, O to S. One of the high-expectation variation pattern tables O to R is associated with the combination of the gaming state and the random number for the first variation pattern. Further, another special table S is associated with the fluctuation up to a predetermined number of times after the big hit. Note that the special table S is preferentially selected for the variation up to the fourth time after the big hit. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a machine with a so-called number-of-turns probability variation specification that is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state B at least five times after the big hit game. Of these, the special table S is selected for the first to fourth variations, and the table R is selected for the fifth variation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 234, when the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, 93 values (100 (0 to 99) of random numbers for the first variation pattern ( For example, in this embodiment, 0 to 92) are associated with the high expectation loss variation pattern table O, and five values (for example, 93 to 97 in this embodiment) correspond to the high expectation loss variation pattern table P. 2 values (for example, 98 and 99 in the present embodiment) are associated with the highly disappointing variation pattern table Q.

[About low-expected variation pattern table setting processing]
Next, the low-expectation fluctuation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236. FIG. 235 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a low-expected variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 236 is a table showing the distribution of tables to be set in the low-expected variation pattern table setting process.

  In the low-expected variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 235, the main control MPU 4100a first recognizes the gaming state (step S15501). For example, the gaming state is managed by a flag in the main control MPU 4100a, and any one of the external normal gaming state A flag, the external normal gaming state B flag, and the external advantageous gaming state B flag is turned on. ing. The main control MPU 4100a recognizes the gaming state by recognizing the flag in the on state. Next, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing of the unprocessed special symbol lottery unit data excluding the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed in the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to which the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed belongs. The number, that is, the remaining number of holdings is recognized (step S15502). For example, when the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is acquired, if the number of reserved special symbols is 4, the remaining number of reserved is 3. Further, when the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed is acquired, if the number of reservations of the special symbol is 3, the remaining number of reservations is 2. The main control MPU 4100a reduces the number of suspensions of the special symbol to which the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed belongs and the random number for the first variation pattern included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. An unexpected disappointment variation pattern setting table is selected (step S15503), and the low anticipation variation pattern table setting processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, there are seven types of TZ, as shown in FIG. The combination of the special symbol type (first special symbol or second special symbol) to be processed, the gaming state, the number of remaining reserved symbols for the special symbol to be processed, and the random number for the first variation pattern, One of the tables T to W and Z is associated. Then, another special table Y is further associated with the fluctuations up to a predetermined number of times after the big hit (four times in the present embodiment). Note that the special table Y is preferentially selected for the variation up to the fourth time after the big hit. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called number-of-turn probability variation machine that is controlled to the external advantageous gaming state B at least five times after the big hit game. Of these, the special tables X and Y are selected for the first to fourth variations, and the table Z is selected for the fifth variation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 236, when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol and the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the remaining of the first special symbol is reserved. According to the numbers 0, 1, 2, and 3, all of the first variation pattern random numbers in total of 100 (0 to 99) are associated with the low-expected variation pattern tables T, U, V, and W, respectively. Therefore, when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol and the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B, the remaining number of reservations 0, 1, 2 of the first special symbol 3, in the low-expected fluctuation pattern table setting process, the low-expected fluctuation pattern tables T, U, V, and W are selected with a probability of 100%, and other low-expected fluctuation pattern tables are selected. Never happen.

  In the low-expected deviation pattern table setting process, the low-expected fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the remaining number of holdings is large is generally low-expected fluctuation that is selected when the remaining number of holdings is small. Compared with the pattern table, a variation pattern with a short variation time of the special symbol is described, and when the number of lottery processes that are put on hold is small, the special symbol is displayed in a shorter time. Fluctuation display is performed.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process in step S1560 will be described. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed based on the variation pattern table set in the hit variation pattern table setting process in step S1520, the high expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1540, or the low expectation disappointment variation pattern setting process in step S1550. A pattern is determined. Hereinafter, the variation pattern determination process will be described for each set variation pattern table. FIG. 237 is a list of variation patterns determined based on the hit variation pattern tables A to C that can be selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 238 is a list of variation patterns determined based on hit variation pattern tables D to N that can be selected in the hit variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 239 is a list of variation patterns determined on the basis of the high-expected loss variation pattern tables O to S that can be selected in the high-expected loss variation pattern setting process. FIG. 240 is a list of variation patterns determined on the basis of the low-expected loss variation pattern tables T to Z that can be selected in the low-expected loss variation pattern setting process. 237 to 240 also show the distribution of variation patterns determined based on each variation pattern table.

  Each variation pattern table A to Z associates a total number of 200 (0 to 199) second variation pattern random numbers with each variation pattern. Then, the main control MPU 4100a uses the set variation pattern table to display the variation pattern associated with the second variation pattern random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed as the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. The variation pattern in the variation corresponding to is determined. Further, when the variation pattern is determined, main control MPU 4100a determines the variation type for each variation pattern based on the variation type random number included in the special symbol lottery unit data to be processed. As will be described later, there are usually five types of variation types, 2, 3, 4, and 5. In FIGS. 237 to 240, distribution of variation types for each variation pattern is also shown. Yes.

  For example, when the set variation pattern table is A, as shown in FIG. 237, numbers 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 24, 25 , 27, 28, 36, and 37, the variation pattern is 3/200, 20/200, 4/200, 5/200, 6/200, 25/200, and 200, respectively. 30/200, 3/200, 15/200, 3/200, 12/200, 12/200, 23/200, 1/200, 10/200, 2/200, 200 It will be determined with a probability of 13, 13/200, 10/200.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 237, when the variation pattern of number 20 (per live action reach A) is selected, the variation type is “normal” with a probability of 60/200 and a probability of 30/200. Are determined to be “2 stations”, “3 stations” with a probability of 90/200, “4 stations” with a probability of 15/200, and “5 stations” with a probability of 5/200.

  Note that the variation type of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern tables T to Z illustrated in FIG. 240 is determined to be “normal” with a probability of 100%. Not.

  When the variation pattern and the corresponding variation type are determined in this way, a command (information) corresponding to the determined variation pattern and variation type, and a lottery result of special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the variation (lost, A command (information) indicating jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral board 4010, and an effect lottery by the peripheral control MPU 4140a in the peripheral board 4010, etc. To be processed. That is, the decorative symbol change display and effect display (continuous effect, reach effect, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are actually commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 within the peripheral board 4010. It is decided according to. In this sense, the control related to the variation display and the effect display of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed in cooperation with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral board 4010 (display control means).

  In addition, as can be understood from the above description, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the variation pattern table setting process, the variation from the first to the fourth variation among the five variations after the jackpot performed in the external advantageous gaming state B. And the fifth variation, different tables are set. As a result, a completely different effect display is executed between the first to fourth changes and the fifth change. Note that the number of changes performed in the gaming state B after the jackpot is not limited to the fifth time, and may be set to various numbers. Further, different tables are set for the first to fourth fluctuations and the fifth fluctuation, but the table is not limited to this, and different tables are used for the first to third fluctuations and the fourth to fifth fluctuations. It may be set at various times such as setting. Further, in one pachinko machine, the table change time for changing the table may be variable.

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). Here, if any one of the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is changing, it is determined that it is changing. If the special symbol is not changing (step S1801: NO), the changing process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (step S1801: YES), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the changing time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If the variation time has not elapsed, the variation processing is terminated as it is (step S1802: NO). When the variation time has elapsed (step S1802: YES), the variation counter 4242 is incremented (step S1803), and the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1804). That is, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is derived and displayed on the changing display unit of the first special symbol display unit 641 or the second special symbol display unit 642.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1804), it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot flags is ON (step S1805). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not any jackpot game is started. If any of the jackpot flags is in the ON state (step S1805: YES), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1806), and the changing process is terminated. If none of the big hit flags is in the ON state (step S1805: NO), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S1807). That is, as a result of stopping the current fluctuation and deriving the lottery result, it is determined whether or not to start the special electric accessory small hit control process. If the small hit flag is in the ON state (step S1807: YES), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated. If the small hit flag is not in the ON state (step S1807: NO), the process flag is updated to “0” (step S1809), and the changing process is terminated.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 242 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game start process. In the jackpot game start process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). When the jackpot game is being executed, the probability changing function is not operated. Therefore, when the probability changing function is operating, the main control MPU 4100a stops the operation of the probability changing function (step S2002) and proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the probability changing function is not operating (step S2001: NO), the main control MPU 4100a skips step S2002 and proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the operation mode of the blade 2337 of the opening / closing member 2006 is an acceleration mode. When the jackpot game is being executed, the operation mode of the blade 2337 of the opening / closing member 2006 is set to the normal mode. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a sets the operation mode of the blade 2337 when the operation mode of the blade 2337 is the promotion mode. After changing to the normal mode (step S2004), the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, when the operation mode of the blade 2337 is a normal mode in step S2003 (step S2003: NO), the main control MPU 4100a skips step S2004 and proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, the main control MPU 4100a recognizes the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot flag, and sets the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 according to the jackpot type. For example, when the big hit type is “big hit A”, the maximum number of rounds, the maximum open time of the open / close member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 per round, and the maximum number of winnings are set in order to realize the above-described long-time open / close pattern. Then, after that, the process proceeds to step S2006 to update the process flag to “5”, and the jackpot game start process is ended.

[About processing when small hits are established]
Next, based on FIG. 243, the small hitting establishment process will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a small hit is established. In the small hitting establishment process, first, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is set to the opening / closing pattern for small hitting (in this embodiment, as described above, the short-time opening / closing pattern). Specifically, in order to realize a short-time opening / closing pattern, the number of rounds, the opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 and the maximum number of winnings are set (step S2201A). Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “6”, and the process when the small hit is established is terminated (step S2202A).

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 244, the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened (step S2401). If the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is open (step S2401: YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the preset maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has elapsed (step S2401: YES). Step S2402). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the maximum opening time set in step S2005 has elapsed. If it is determined that the maximum opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has elapsed (step S2402: YES), the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. .

  If the opening time of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 has not elapsed in step S2402 (step S2402: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines that the pre-set maximum number of winning balls is the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000. It is determined whether or not it has been accepted (step S2403). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the count value by the count sensor 2014 has reached the maximum number of winnings set in step S2005. If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the maximum number of game balls has been received in the big prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2403: YES), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S2404 and closes the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000. The electric utility jackpot control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the maximum number of game balls has not been received in the big prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 (step 2403: NO), the special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated as it is.

  If the opening / closing member is not open (step S2401: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a preset round number has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of rounds set in step S2005 has been reached. Here, if the number of rounds set in advance has been reached (step S2405: YES), the main control MPU 4100a proceeds to step S2408, where the big hit flag (big hit A flag, big hit B flag, big hit C flag, big hit D flag, Of the big hit E flag, the flag that is in the ON state) is turned OFF. On the other hand, if the preset round number has not been reached (step S2405: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the time between rounds (interval between rounds) has elapsed (step S2406). When main control MPU 4100a determines that the time between rounds has not elapsed (step S2406: NO), it terminates the special electric utility jackpot control process as it is. If it is determined that the time between rounds has elapsed (step S2406: YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs the opening process of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2407), and ends the special electric accessory big hit control process.

  After turning off the jackpot flag in step S2408, the main control MPU 4100a performs an operation process of the probability changing function (step S2409). In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the probability variation function always operates after a big hit, so-called a jackpot after probability change rush rate of 100%.

  When the probability changing function is activated, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the operation mode of the blade 2337 that opens and closes the second start port 2002 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode (step S2410). In the present embodiment, specifically, the main control MPU 4100a, when the type of jackpot that caused the occurrence of the jackpot game is jackpot A, B, C, E, the game when winning the jackpot It is determined that the operation mode of the blade 2337 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode regardless of the state. When the type of jackpot that caused the occurrence of the jackpot game is jackpot D, the main control MPU 4100a operates the operation mode of the blade 2337 if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the external normal gaming state A. Is determined not to change from the normal mode to the promotion mode, and if it is a game state other than the external normal game state A, it is determined that the operation mode of the blade 2337 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode. In other words, when the gaming machine of this embodiment wins the jackpot A, B, C, E, it always shifts to the external advantageous gaming state B after the jackpot game. When the jackpot D is won, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment changes to the external normal gaming state B (so-called latent probability change) after the jackpot game only if the gaming state at the time of winning is the external normal gaming state A. If the game state at the time of winning is other than the external normal game state A, the game shifts to the external advantageous game state B.

  When determining that the operation mode of the blade 2337 is changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode (step S2410: YES), the main control MPU 4100a changes the operation mode of the blade 2337 from the normal mode to the promotion mode (step S2411). Thereafter, the fluctuation counter 4242 is reset to the initial value (0) (step S2412), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2413), and the special feature jackpot control process is terminated. On the other hand, when determining that the operation mode of the blade 2337 is not changed from the normal mode to the promotion mode, the main control MPU 4100a skips step S2411 and resets the fluctuation counter 4242 to the initial value (0) (step S2412). The processing flag is updated to “0” (step S2415), and the special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

[Special electric accessory small hit control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 245, the special electric accessory small hit control process will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. In the special electric accessory small hit control process, first, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened (step S2501). When determining that the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened (step S2501: YES), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the opening time set in advance in step S2201A has elapsed (step S2502). If the opening time has elapsed (step S2502: YES), the main control MPU 4100a closes the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2504) and ends the special electric accessory small hit control process.

  On the other hand, if the release time has not elapsed in step S2502 (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the game ball with the maximum number of winnings set in step S2201A has won the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000. (Step S2503). If the maximum number of game balls has won the big prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2503: YES), the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is closed (step S2504), and the special electric accessory small hit The control process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball with the maximum number of winnings has not won the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2503: NO), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is.

  If the opening / closing member is not open in step 2501 described above (step S2501: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the number of rounds set in advance in step S2201A has been reached (step S2505). If the number of rounds set in advance is reached (step S2505: YES), the main control MPU 4100a turns the small hit flag OFF (step S2508), and updates the processing flag to “0” (step S2508). S2509), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the number of rounds set in advance is not reached in step S2505 (step S2505: NO), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a predetermined time between rounds (interval between rounds) has elapsed. Determination is made (step S2506). If the main control MPU 4100a determines that the time between rounds has not elapsed (step S2506: NO), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. If it is determined that the time between rounds has elapsed (step S2506: YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs the opening process of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 (step S2507), and ends the special electric accessory small hit control process.

[Regarding the effect display including the change display of the decorative design]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, according to the first and second special symbol lottery unit data extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001 and the second start port sensor 2349 ( In addition to the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 of the function display unit 640 variably displayed in accordance with the special lottery result, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a special random number (special lottery result). A corresponding effect image is displayed. As an example of the effect image, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the variation display of each decorative symbol sequence is started in a state where a series of symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different decorative symbols are displayed (for example, three columns). When all the decorative symbol sequences are stopped and displayed in the end, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed indicates the special lottery result in the variation to the player side. Yes. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, after the plurality of decorative symbol sequences are variably displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. Since the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol indicators 641 and 642, generally, the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. We will pay attention to the decorative pattern.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display not only an effect display relating to the start winning prize but also a “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game. These effects are performed not only in the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also in the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. In other words, by simultaneously displaying two effects related to each other on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, it is possible to produce an effect that is visually interesting and highly realistic.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 220). The variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 3181 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. It has come to be. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 is obtained. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Also, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  In addition, the display form of the effect image in the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 246 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is covered with a movable part unit 2401, a first accessory unit 2370, and a left movable part unit 2378. Therefore, in the first display mode, the player can visually recognize the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (hereinafter also referred to as the main liquid crystal screen PNM), but the display screen of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 (hereinafter referred to as the sub liquid crystal screen). Cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 247 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the second display mode. In the second display mode, the player can view both the main liquid crystal screen PNM of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal screen PNS of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. When shifting from the first display mode to the second display mode, the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 of the first accessory unit 2370 are moved downward and the second accessory unit 2400 is moved. By rotating the movable unit 2401 obliquely rearward, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is switched from a state where the sub liquid crystal screen PNS cannot be viewed (see FIG. 246) to a state where the sub liquid crystal screen PNS can be viewed (see FIG. 247). Thereby, it is possible to produce a three-dimensional and realistic effect by combining a mechanical effect and an image effect. In particular, when the front surface of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is opened, the movable unit 2401, the left movable unit 2378, and the right movable unit 2379 move in different directions. An image in which one formed shielding wall is dispersed can be aroused, and the visual fun can be further enhanced.

  FIG. 248 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the shutter type accessory is in a closed state. In FIG. 246, the shutter type accessory is completely open. The shutter-type accessory 3002 is movable, and the four shutters 3010, 3030, 3050, and 3070 are opened and closed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In particular, each of the shutters 3010, 3030, 3050, and 3070 has a liquid crystal display because the decorative bodies 3012, 3013, 3032, 3033, 3033, and 3072 are disposed on the transparent decorative plates 3011, 3031, 3051, and 3071. Even in a state where the front of the device 1400 is shielded, each electric ornament and the main liquid crystal screen PNM can be viewed in the front-rear direction, and a three-dimensional effect can be enjoyed.

  FIG. 249 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the distribution effect device 3125 is raised to the effect position (upper stop position). During the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 249, the distribution effect device 3125 may rise to the effect position (upper stop position), and a distribution effect using the game ball may be performed. Details of the distribution effect will be described later.

[Specific examples of production display]
[Normal mode]
FIG. 250 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the main liquid crystal screen PNM and the sub liquid crystal screen PNS in the normal mode. The normal mode is a game mode in the external normal game states A and B. In the example shown in FIG. 250, an example of the effect display content displayed at the highest frequency during the change of the special symbol is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is in the first display form described above. That is, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is covered with the movable unit 2401, the first accessory unit 2370, and the left movable unit 2378. In the following drawings, the state in which the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is obscured by the movable unit 2401, the first accessory unit 2370, and the left movable unit 2378 is “closed” in the frame of the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. It is expressed by writing characters. In this state, the player cannot visually recognize the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS and cannot visually recognize the presence of the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. In the following, when the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is not shown, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is assumed to be covered with the movable unit 2401, the first accessory unit 2370, and the left movable unit 2378. To do.

  In the normal mode, the effect is displayed in the first display form in most cases, and the effect proceeds by displaying the effect image on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. For example, in the normal mode, a design symbol group of decorative symbols is displayed with the background image HKB as a background. The symbol row group is composed of three symbol rows 1153a, 1153b, and 1153c. The symbol sequence displayed on the left side when viewed from the player is the left symbol sequence 1153a, the symbol sequence displayed in the middle when viewed from the player is the middle symbol column 1153b, and the symbol sequence displayed on the right side when viewed from the player is the right This is called a symbol row 1153c. In the present embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbols 0 to 9 are arranged in order in each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c of the decorative symbols, and are displayed in a variable or stopped display. During the change of the special symbol, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol rows 1153a, 1153b, and 1153c on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and then the symbol symbols 1153a, 1153b, and 1153c are respectively displayed at the symbol stop positions. One decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, a special lottery result corresponding to the change is notified to the player by a combination of the decorative symbols at the symbol stop positions of the symbol rows 1153a, 1153b, and 1153c. For example, the combination of decorative symbols for notifying that the special lottery results are jackpots A and B is a so-called doublet (the stop symbols in each symbol row become the same decorative symbol).

  In addition, a crystal image FCR indicating a crystal is displayed at the center of the lower area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and a hold display indicating a hold of special symbol lottery unit data can be displayed on the left and right of the crystal image FCR. It is said that. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a hold display HR1 indicating the hold of the first special symbol lottery unit data is displayed on the left side of the crystal image FCR, and the hold of the second special symbol lottery unit data is displayed on the right side of the crystal image FCR. The hold display HR2 is displayed. The player can recognize the current first special symbol hold count and the second special symbol hold count based on the number of hold indications. In the example of FIG. 250, a state in which the number of first special symbol reservations and the number of second special symbol reservations is “2” is shown.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the maximum value of the first special symbol reservation number is “4”, so that up to four hold indications HR1 can be displayed on the left side of the crystal image FCR. In addition, since the maximum value of the second special symbol hold number is “4”, up to four hold displays HR2 can be displayed on the right side of the crystal image FCR.

  The hold display HR1 closer to the crystal image FCR represents the hold of the first special symbol lottery unit data to be digested first. “Digested” means that a predetermined starting condition is established and the special symbol lottery unit data that has been put on hold is processed in the above-described variation start processing. When the first special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the hold display HR1 is digested, it is displayed that the hold display HR1 is taken into the crystal image FCR, and the hold display HR1 is erased. If one hold display HR1 is deleted while a plurality of hold displays HR1 are displayed, the remaining hold displays HR1 are sequentially moved and displayed at positions close to the crystal image FCR. In addition, when the first special symbol lottery unit data is newly held during the change of the special symbol, a new hold display HR1 is additionally displayed to the left of the hold display HR1 already displayed. .

  Similarly, the hold display HR2 closer to the crystal image FCR represents the hold of the second special symbol lottery unit data to be digested earlier. When the second special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the hold display HR2 is digested, it is displayed that the hold display HR2 is taken into the crystal image FCR, and the hold display HR2 is erased. If one hold display HR2 is deleted while a plurality of hold displays HR2 are displayed, the remaining hold displays HR2 are sequentially moved and displayed at positions close to the crystal image FCR. Further, when the second special symbol lottery unit data is newly held during the change of the special symbol, a new hold display HR2 is additionally displayed on the right side of the hold display HR2 already displayed. .

  The decoration symbol 1157 is changed and stopped in accordance with the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 250, the decorative design 1157 has a configuration in which two small circular images are arranged in the horizontal direction. The decorative pattern 1157 is always displayed at the same position on the main liquid crystal screen PNM while a game is being played on the gaming machine. However, in this specification, in order to avoid the complexity of the figure, the following drawings are used. Then, the illustration is omitted. Note that the decorative pattern 1157 is displayed in a large size in FIG. 250 for easy viewing, but is actually extremely small. For example, the circular image constituting the decorative pattern 1157 is about several to 15 pixels in size. It is. For this reason, even if this decoration symbol 1157 is displayed, it is hardly noticed by the player and cannot substantially interfere with the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM.

[Hold-down look ahead]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the expectation degree that is a big hit when the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the hold display using the hold display described above is subjected to the big start lottery in the variation start process. A hold-ahead look effect indicating (also called jackpot expectation) is performed. This hold prefetching effect will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing processing steps of the hold display process. The hold display process is started when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the above-described winning notification command (first type winning notification command or second type winning notification command) from the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. The hold display processing is performed in parallel without interfering with other processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, for example, during-change effect processing (described later) for controlling the effect using the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like performed during the change of the special symbol. Executed.

  When the hold display process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the received winning notification command is a second type winning notification command (step S501). When the winning notification command is the first type winning notification command that does not indicate the preceding determination result, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the received winning notification command is not the second type winning notification command (step S501: NO). The normal hold display is performed (step S507).

  FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold display portion displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. A thin hexagonal image shown in FIG. 252 is a normal hold display HR1 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The normal hold display is a hold display that does not suggest the jackpot expectation when the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the hold display is a processing target in the change start process. Since the normal hold display HR1 has the highest appearance frequency, it can be said that the normal hold display HR1 is a hold display that suggests the lowest jackpot expectation.

  If it is determined that the received winning notification command is the second type winning notification command (step S501: YES), the main control MPU 4100a performs a special holding display lottery to determine whether or not to perform the special holding display (step S502). The special hold display is a hold display that suggests a jackpot expectation degree when the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the hold display is a processing target in the change start process. The special hold display lottery is performed with different winning probabilities according to the preceding determination result shown in the second type winning notification command. For example, when the preceding determination result shown in the second type winning notification command is “losing without reach”, the special hold display lottery is performed with a very low winning probability, and is shown in the second type winning notification command. When the preceding determination result is “high expectation reach lose” or “one of the big hits”, a mode transition lottery with a relatively high probability is performed. In this way, the special hold display is easily performed when the expectation level for the jackpot is relatively high.

  When the result of the special hold display lottery is not a win (step S503: NO), the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs normal hold display (step S507). On the other hand, when the result of the special hold display lottery is winning (step S503: YES), the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not to make the button hold display (step S504). For example, 70% when performing special hold display may not be button hold display, and 30% may be button hold display.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether to hold the button, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the type of the special hold display (step S505). FIG. 253 is a diagram for explaining types of special hold display. For example, four types of images are prepared as special hold display. The first special hold display HR1U is an image in which a predetermined hexagonal image is applied to the same thin hexagonal image as the normal hold display. The second special hold display HR1V is an image representing an emblem with an alphabet S. The third special hold display HR1W is an image representing a silver jewel. The fourth special hold display HR1X is an image representing a gold jewel. These four types of special hold indications indicate that the special symbol lottery unit data is being held, and the expectation of jackpot when the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the hold indication is to be processed in the change start process In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, the first special hold display HR1U, the second special hold display HR1V, the third special hold display HR1W, and the fourth special hold display HR1X It shows that the jackpot expectation is high in order. For example, the jackpot expectation degree of the first special hold display HR1U is 10%, the jackpot expectation degree of the second special hold display HR1V is 30%, the jackpot expectation degree of the third special hold display HR1W is 50%, The expectation degree of jackpot of the special hold display HR1X is set to be 70%. Such a jackpot expectation is set by the peripheral control MPU 4140a using a predetermined distribution table based on the advance determination result indicated in the second type winning notification command received from the main control MPU 4100a. This is realized by determining the type.

  When the type of the special hold display is determined, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the special hold display (step S506). If it is determined in step S504 that button hold display is to be performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the special hold display determined in step S505 without displaying the special hold display at the left end of FIG. Button hold display HRB is displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S504 that no button hold display is performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the special hold display determined in step S505. The button hold display HRB is an image obtained by superimposing the image BTN1 (button image) of the operation button unit 370 as the operation receiving unit in the present embodiment on the image of the normal hold display HR1. It can be said that the button hold display HRB is a display mode in which the hold display is associated with a display (button image BTN1) that prompts the player to operate the operation receiving unit.

  When the player presses the main button 371 as the operation accepting means in the variation in which the button hold display HRB is displayed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the button hold display HRB in step S505 as shown in FIG. 252 (B). Change to the determined special hold display. In the example of FIG. 252 (B), the button hold display HRB is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X. On the other hand, if the player does not press the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370 as the operation accepting means in the variation in which the button hold display HRB is displayed, the special hold display determined in step S505 is not changed. Even if the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the previously displayed hold display is digested, the button hold display HRB is moved (FIG. 252 (C)).

  Even if the button hold display HRB is being changed, the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the button hold display HRB is digested and before the button hold display is erased, any time. At the timing when the player presses the main button 371, as shown in FIG. 252 (D), the peripheral control MPU 4140a changes the button hold display HRB to the special hold display determined in step S505. That is, as long as the player does not press the main button 371, after the change in which the button hold display HRB is displayed, the change is made multiple times until the change immediately before the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the button hold display HRB is consumed. The button hold display HRB can continue to be displayed. While the button hold display HRB is displayed, the player always presses the main button 371 at a desired timing to change the button hold display HRB to the special hold display determined in step S505. Can do.

  That is, during the effective period for accepting the pressing of the main button 371 corresponding to the button hold display HRB, the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the button hold display HRB is digested after the button hold display HRB is displayed. Until the HRB is erased. The player can understand how long the effective period remains because the player can understand if the button hold display HRB gradually approaches the crystal image FCR as the hold is sequentially digested. The hold display (normal hold display HR1 and button hold display HRB) arranged next to the image FCR and the crystal image FCR is an effective operation that suggests to the player an effective period for accepting pressing of the main button 371 corresponding to the button hold display HRB. It can be said that it is a period suggestion display.

  Next, when the start condition is established for the special symbol lottery unit data stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 or the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224, the change is transmitted from the main control board 4100a. A changing effect process executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives an effect command (including a command indicating a change pattern) will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart illustrating processing steps of the changing effect processing.

  When the changing effect process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a analyzes the changing effect command (step S701) and determines the contents of the changing effect (step S702). Specifically, the variation pattern of decorative symbols, presence / absence and type of reach, presence / absence of chance-up character display, whether or not to perform the changing button display effect described later, and the decorative symbol to be finally stopped are varied. It is determined based on the variation pattern specified by the medium performance command. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the content of the changing effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the changing effect of the determined content (step S703). More specifically, the effect deriving means (the liquid crystal display device 1400, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, the shutter-type accessory 3002, the lower accessory unit 3003, other lamps, the speaker 121, etc.) is controlled to execute the changing effect. To do.

  The changing effect process and the hold display process do not interfere with each other, and the corresponding commands from the main control board 4100a (the changing effect command in the changing effect process, the winning notification command in the hold display process). Each is performed at the reception timing. Therefore, in the hold display process, the start condition is established later than the first special symbol lottery unit data among the special symbol lottery unit data acquired by the main control MPU 4100a, and the special symbol hold storage means 4214 and 4224 hold the first. Derivation of expectation suggestion effects (displaying the first special hold display HR1U, etc.) for the special symbol lottery unit data of 2 and whether the contents of the changing effect for the first special symbol lottery unit data are determined It can be said that it can be decided whether or not.

  In the hold display process, when the button is put on hold, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is in spite of the derivation of the expectation suggesting effect (displaying the first special hold display HR1U and the like) being determined. Until the player presses the main button 371, the expectation suggestion effect is not derived, so it can be said that the derivation is on standby.

  In addition, when it is determined that the main button 371 as a release condition has been pressed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a immediately processes other special symbol lottery unit data (the first special symbol lottery unit data and the like). Regardless of whether or not, the expectation suggestion effect is derived (the first special hold display HR1U or the like is displayed). That is, when it is determined that the main button 371 as a release condition has been pressed, the start condition is satisfied from other special symbol lottery unit data (first special symbol lottery unit data or first lottery data). Whether or not the production contents for the special symbol lottery unit data, etc. whose starting conditions are earlier than the second special symbol lottery unit data are determined later, and the changing production for the other special symbol lottery unit data are executed Regardless of whether or not it is (derived), it can be said that the waiting for the derivation of the expected degree suggesting effect can be canceled and the derivation of the expected degree suggesting effect can be derived.

  Subsequently, in the change when the button hold display HRB is displayed, the operation button unit 370 is operated regardless of the button hold display HRB in the effect display (effect during change) related to the special lottery corresponding to the change. A case where a display prompting the player is displayed will be described. FIG. 255 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect display regarding a special lottery corresponding to the change during the change. In FIG. 255 (A), a button hold display HRB is displayed as a hold display indicating the special symbol lottery unit data being held, and an effect display (effect during change) regarding the special lottery corresponding to the current change is displayed. As a part, a button image BTN2 as a display for prompting the player to operate the operation button unit 370, a character display TL1 “select reach”, and a character display TL2 “PUSH” are displayed. The button image BTN2 and the character displays TL1 and TL2 are one of three types of reach (for example, A reach, B reach, and C reach in the example of FIG. 255) as effects related to the special lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation. This is a display prompting the player to operate the operation button unit 370 in order to allow the player to select the reach. That is, the changing effect is a display prompting the player to operate the operation button unit 370 (specifically, pressing the main button 371), and when the pressing of the main button 371 is received from the player, the pressing is performed. It is an example of the operation branch effect which displays the content different from the case where it did not accept.

  As described above, the changing effect process and the hold display process are executed without interfering with each other. Thus, the button hold display HRB and the button image BTN2 for the button reception effect included in the changing effect are thus obtained. It is possible that the display is made simultaneously. For example, the button hold display HRB newly appears when the display of the button image BTN2 for the button reception effect included in the changing effect is displayed, or the changing effect is displayed when the button hold display HRB appears. It may happen that the button image BTN2 for the button reception effect included appears newly.

  In the state shown in FIG. 255A, when the player presses the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370 regardless of which of the button image BTN2 and the button hold display HRB appears first, the main button 371 is concerned. Is not treated as a depression of the main button 371 as a response to the button hold display HRB, but is treated as a depression of the main button 371 as a response to the button image BTN2 as part of the changing effect. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not change the button hold display HRB to the special hold display in response to pressing of the main button 371, and performs display in which one reach is selected from the three types of reach. (FIG. 255 (B)). In this example, a character display TL3 indicating that “A reach” has been selected and a cut-in image HCU corresponding to “A reach” are displayed. As a result, even if the player presses the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370 in the state shown in FIG. 255 (A), the button hold display HRB is maintained as it is. Therefore, even when only the button hold display HRB appears, even when the main button 371 is pressed in anticipation of derivation of the expectation suggestive effect (displaying the first special hold display HR1U or the like) When the button image BTN2 is displayed during the changing effect at that moment, the expectation suggesting effect is not derived (the first special hold display HR1U or the like is displayed), and the three types of reach are displayed. A display in which one reach is selected from among them will be performed.

  That is, when the button image BTN2 during the changing effect and the button hold display HRB are simultaneously displayed, the expectation suggesting effect is displayed even when the main button 371 is pressed during the change. The cancellation condition for canceling the waiting for derivation (displaying the first special hold display HR1U or the like) is not established.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the button hold display HRB and the button image BTN2 as a part of the changing effect are displayed at the same time, the player plays the main process many times during the changing. Even if the button 371 is pressed, the button hold display HRB is not changed to the special hold display during the change. That is, the derivation of the expectation suggestion effect (displaying the first special hold display HR1U or the like) is put on standby until the next change of the change. Then, when the player presses the main button 371 after moving to the next change, the peripheral control MPU 4140a changes the button hold display HRB to the special hold display.

  According to the pre-reading effect using the button hold display HRB described above, it is determined whether the hold display is to be a special hold display that suggests a degree of expectation that is a big hit using the preceding determination result by the preceding determination process by the main control MPU 4100a. If it is determined and the hold display is determined to be the special hold display, the button hold display HRB is displayed before the hold display is changed to the special hold display. When the player presses down the main button 371, the button hold display HRB is changed to the special hold display. As a result, the player presses the main button 371 at a desired timing between the timing when the button hold display HRB is displayed and the lottery information corresponding to the button hold display HRB is digested (start condition is satisfied). The special hold display can be displayed at that timing to recognize the jackpot expectation.

  For example, if the player does not want to know the jackpot expectation level until the actual lottery process is performed, the player does not have to press the main button 371. Just press it. As a result, it is possible to select the player's preference how long the jackpot expectation is to be known before the player knows that the jackpot is actually notified by the liquid crystal display device 1400. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for various players, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

  Further, when an operation branching effect for accepting the operation of the main button 371 and a button hold display HRB are simultaneously displayed in the changing effect, the pressing of the main button 371 is performed as an operation for the operation branching effect in the changing effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy the operation branch effect in the changing effect without changing the button hold display HRB to the special hold display. As a result, since the user does not want to change the button hold display HRB to the special hold display unintentionally or conversely change the button hold display HRB to the special hold display, the operation branch effect in the changing effect can be fully enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play without being able to play.

  Furthermore, when the button hold display HRB and the button image BTN2 as part of the changing effect are displayed at the same time, even if the player presses the main button 371 many times during the change, During the change, the button hold display HRB does not change to the special hold display, and when the player presses the main button 371 in the subsequent change, the button hold display HRB is changed to the special hold display. For example, even when a player who is excited in response to the button image BTN2 in the effect during fluctuation repeatedly hits the main button 371, the button hold display HRB is changed to a special hold display against the player's intention. Can be suppressed. As a result, the player can fully enjoy the changing effect, and can also fully enjoy the effect using the button hold display HRB, thereby suppressing the player's motivation to decline. be able to.

  Note that when the button image BTN2 as a part of the changing effect is displayed, the effective period for accepting the pressing of the main button 371 is set to be relatively short so that the changing effect is not delayed. The main button 371 cannot be pressed within the effective time, and as a result, it may happen that the changing effect displayed in response to the pressing of the main button 371 cannot be seen. On the other hand, in the pre-reading effect that displays the button hold display HRB, the effective period for accepting the pressing of the main button 371 can be extended for a long time over a plurality of fluctuations. You can see an interesting production that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation on the display.

  In addition, since the expectation suggestion effect regarding the lottery result of the special symbol lottery unit data being held is performed in the display area of the hold display, the expectation suggesting effect regarding the lottery result of the special symbol lottery unit data being held is displayed. , It is possible to suppress the disturbing effect during the fluctuation. In other words, when the expectation suggestion effect regarding the lottery result of the special symbol lottery unit data on hold is derived at the timing when the main button 371 is pressed, the timing at which such an expectation suggestion effect is displayed is left to the player. Therefore, if such an expectation suggestion effect is displayed in another area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, for example, near the center, it may interfere with the changing effect, but the changing effect is hindered. By performing in the display area of the hold display arranged at a position where no change is made, it is possible to suppress the disturbing effect from being hindered.

  In addition, since the button image BTN2 for the changing effect relating to the special symbol lottery unit data for which the start condition is satisfied and the button hold display HRB for the expectation suggesting effect relating to the special symbol lottery unit data being held can be simultaneously performed. , Because the player feels that there is a possibility that a high degree of expectation can be produced by multiple fluctuations, even if one fluctuation makes a deviation, it will not be overly discouraged, and it will connect the expectation to the later fluctuation be able to. In addition, the derivation of the expectation suggestion effect regarding the special symbol lottery unit data that is on hold can be maintained until the next change, thereby maintaining the player's expectation over a long period of time.

  Furthermore, the player can understand if the button hold display HRB gradually approaches the crystal image FCR as the hold is sequentially digested (the main button 371 corresponding to the button hold display HRB). Since the effective period for accepting the pressing of the button is suggested to the player), the hold display (normal hold display HR1 and button hold display HRB) arranged next to the crystal image FCR and the crystal image FCR is indicated by the button hold display HRB. It can be said that the operation valid period suggestion display suggests to the player the valid period for accepting the pressing of the corresponding main button 371.

  Next, a modified example of the holding effect that is not implemented in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Since the configuration other than that described below is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 256 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a plurality of button hold displays HRB are displayed at the same time. FIG. 256 is a modified example in which the button hold display HRB and the button image BTN2 for the button reception effect included in the changing effect are displayed at the same time as in the case shown in FIG. In the process, like the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reception of the main button 371 for the button image BTN2 for button reception effect is prioritized, and the reception of the main button 371 for the button hold display HRB Until invalid. In this modification, when the button image BTN2 for the button reception effect included in the changing effect is displayed, the display mode of the button hold display HRB is changed, and the reception of the main button 371 is invalid. This suggests to the player. Specifically, a reception invalid mark MKU indicating that reception of the button hold display HRB is invalid is displayed on the button hold display HRB (see FIG. 256 (A)). The reception invalid mark MKU is erased when the change in which the button image BTN2 for the button reception effect is displayed ends and the reception of the main button 371 for the button hold display HRB becomes valid as the next change. (See FIG. 256 (B)).

  As a result, when the player presses (operates) the main button 371, the press is treated as a button image BTN2 for the button reception effect, and the expectation suggestion effect is derived instead of the button hold display HRB (first). Display of the special hold display HR1U or the like) is not performed, so that the confusion of the player due to the display of a plurality of buttons can be suppressed. As a display mode that suggests to the player that acceptance of the main button 371 is invalid, the button image BTN1 in the button hold display HRB may be displayed in a small size, or the button image BTN1 in the button hold display HRB may be displayed. May be displayed translucently, or the button image BTN1 in the button hold display HRB may be displayed small and translucently.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, control is performed so that a plurality of hold displays that are simultaneously displayed are not set as button hold display HRBs. May be. Since the configuration other than that described below is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 257 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a plurality of button hold displays HRB are displayed at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 257 (A), the second hold display and the fourth hold display for the first special symbol are the button hold display. In FIG. 257 (A), the second hold display in the digestion order is called a button hold display HRB3, and the fourth hold display is called a button hold display HRB4. In this case, priority is given to accepting the main button 371 for the button hold display HRB1 to be digested first. That is, when two or more hold displays are simultaneously button hold displays, the acceptance of the main button 371 for holding the button with the earliest digestion order is valid, and the acceptance of the main button 371 for the other button hold is accepted. Is invalid. As shown in FIG. 257 (A), a clear and large button image BTNX is displayed on the button hold display HRB3 in which reception of the main button 371 is effective. On the other hand, a small and translucent button image BTNY is displayed on the button hold display HRB4 in which the acceptance of the main button 371 is invalid.

  Then, when the main button 371 is pressed and the button hold display HRB3 is changed to an expectation suggestion display such as the first special hold display HR1U, the button hold display HRB4 with a slow digestion order from the next change after the change is made. The reception of the main button 371 for becomes effective. Although illustration is omitted, when the acceptance of the main button 371 for the button hold display HRB4 becomes valid, the button image displayed on the button hold display HRB2 is changed from the small and translucent button image BTNY to the clear and large button image BTNX. Is done.

  When a plurality of button hold displays are displayed, the acceptance of the main button 371 is valid in accordance with the order in which the button hold display is used, regardless of the winning order of the game balls that triggered the display of the button hold display. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 257 (B), the second hold display for the first special symbol is the second hold display and the second hold display for the second special symbol is the second hold display. . In FIG. 257 (B), the second hold display with the second special symbol digest order is referred to as button hold display HRB5, and the second special symbol digest order with the second special symbol digest order is referred to as button hold display HRB6.

  Here, in the second special symbol priority digestion game machine in which the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the first special symbol, the button hold display HRB5 has a faster digestion order, so the button hold display HRB5 The acceptance of the main button 371 becomes valid, and the acceptance of the main button 371 for the button hold display HRB6 becomes invalid. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 257 (B), the button image displayed on the button hold display HRB5 is a clear and large button image BTNX, and the image displayed on the button hold display HRB6 is small and translucent. The button image is BTNY.

  According to this modification, since a plurality of hold displays can become button hold displays HRB, the player feels that there is a possibility that a high expectation degree suggestion effect will be made by a plurality of changes, so it is not a single change. Even if it becomes, it will not be overly discouraged, and it can connect the expectation to the later fluctuation. In addition, the derivation of the expectation suggestion effect regarding the special symbol lottery unit data that is on hold can be maintained until the next change, thereby maintaining the player's expectation over a long period of time. Further, since the display mode is changed between the button image in the button hold display HRB in which the acceptance of the main button 371 is enabled and the button image in the button hold display HRB in which the reception is disabled, the player By pressing 371, it is easy to understand which button hold display changes to a special hold display that suggests the jackpot expectation level, so that it is possible to suppress the player's confusion due to the multiple button hold display HRB. it can.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a button step-up hold effect will be described as a modified example of the hold effect using the main button 371 that is not implemented. Since the configuration other than that described below is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 258 is a diagram for explaining a button hold step-up effect.

  In the button step-up effect, in step S506 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 251, the normal hold display HR1, the button image BTN7, and the button are repeatedly pressed even though the special hold display type is determined in step S505. Message MSG that prompts the player to perform the operation (FIG. 258 (A)).

  At this time, when the player presses the main button 371, even if it is determined to display a special hold display indicating a high jackpot expectation degree in step S505, the jackpot expectation lower than the special hold display determined in step S505 is initially set. A special hold display showing the degree is displayed. When the player repeatedly hits the main button 371, the special hold display finally determined in step S505 is displayed.

  A case will be described with reference to FIG. 258 where the special hold display determined in step S505 shown in FIG. 251 is the fourth special hold display HR1X. In the state shown in FIG. 258 (A), when the player hits the button repeatedly, as shown in FIGS. 258 (B) to (D), the normal hold display HR1 in FIG. The second special hold display HR1V, the third special hold display HR1W, and the fourth special hold display HR1X are changed. That is, the special hold display indicating a low jackpot expectation level changes in a stepwise manner to a special hold display indicating a high jackpot expectation level. For example, each time the main button 371 is pressed once, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a lottery with a probability of 1/3, and each time the lottery is won, a special hold display indicating a high jackpot expectation level one step at a time Control to change to. Then, when the special hold display determined in step S505 is displayed, the reception of pressing of the main button 371 is ended, and the button step-up effect is ended.

  The effective period of the main button 371 for the button step-up effect is that the start condition for the special symbol lottery unit data corresponding to the hold display HR1 is displayed after the hold display HR1 that is the target of the button step-up effect is displayed. This is a period until it is established and is made a process target of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 229) (until it is digested). In addition, it is possible to step up the hold display by depressing the main button 371 across multiple variations of the special symbol.

  According to the button step-up effect described above, in addition to the effect and effect of the effect using the button hold display HRB in the pachinko machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, the following effects and effects are exhibited. That is, the special hold display can be displayed in a step-up manner in multiple stages determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. As a result, the excitement of the game can be improved by increasing the player's feeling of exhilaration step by step in any number of stages. For example, conventionally, a technique is known in which a hold display that suggests an expectation level every time a hold is used is changed to a hold display that suggests a high expectation level in a stepwise manner (step-up). In this case, it is possible to step up only up to the number of times that 1 is subtracted from the upper limit (for example, 4) of the maximum number of holdings. For example, in the second holding display, the stage to be stepped up is 1 Limited to the stage. On the other hand, according to this button step-up production, it is possible to realize a multi-step step-up without such restrictions, so that the player's sense of excitement can be increased step by step in any multi-step to improve the interest of the game Can do.

  Further, the timing for stepping up the hold display can be performed at a player's favorite timing in a period of a plurality of variations from when the target hold display HR1 is displayed until it is consumed. For this reason, for example, the player can enjoy the step-up of the hold display with a change in which a relatively boring effect that is unlikely to be a big hit is displayed as a changing effect.

  Next, although not implemented in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an unspecified hold effect will be described as a modification example of the hold effect using the main button 371. Since the configuration other than that described below is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 259 is a diagram illustrating an unspecified hold effect.

  In the unspecified hold effect, even if it is determined that the button hold is set in step S504 of the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, the normal hold display HR1 is displayed without displaying the hold display as the button hold display HRB. Display as. Then, the button image BTN8 is displayed on the crystal image FCR at a timing determined by lottery (see FIG. 259 (A)). The timing determined by the lottery is, for example, 1) immediately after performing a hold display (referred to as target hold display) determined to be button hold, 2) immediately after performing a hold display next to the target hold display, 3 3) Immediately after performing the hold display twice after the target hold display, and 3) at any timing immediately after performing the hold display three times after the target hold display. However, if the hold corresponding to the target hold display has already been consumed at the timing determined by the lottery, the button image BTN8 is not displayed.

  As a result, when the button image BTN8 is displayed (see FIG. 259 (A)), when a plurality of normal hold displays HR1 are displayed, which of the plurality of normal hold displays HR1 is the target hold display. It is not clear to the player. The player can understand that the button image BTN8 is associated with the displayed normal hold display HR1, but the normal hold display HR1 is displayed in a display mode that the player cannot understand. It can be said that.

  Here, when the player presses the main button 371, the target hold display in the displayed normal hold display HR1 is changed to the special hold display. In FIG. 259 (B), the normal hold display HR1 with the second digestion order (second from the right in FIG. 259 (B)) is the target hold display, and the target hold display is changed to the third special hold display HR1W. A displayed example is shown.

  According to this modification, the player can be wondering how high the special hold display that suggests a high degree of expectation appears, and is also interested in which special hold display appears for the lottery corresponding to which hold display. The main button 371 is pressed while being pulled. As a result, it is possible to realize a button effect that can give the player a fresh feeling of uplifting, and to more effectively suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  Next, although not implemented in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special example that is a modified example of the holding effect using the main button 371 and the sub buttons 372 provided on the left and right of the main button 371 one by one. The hold search effect will be described. Since the configuration other than that described below is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining the special reservation search effect.

  In the special hold search effect, similarly to the above-described unspecified hold effect, even if it is determined that the button hold is set in step S504 of the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, the hold display is the button hold display HRB. Without displaying as normal hold display HR1. Then, at the timing determined by the lottery, the button image BTN9 and a message MSG2 that prompts to search for a hold display that can be changed to a special hold display that suggests a jackpot expectation level are displayed (see FIG. 260A). In addition, a cursor CSL2 for selecting any of the plurality of normal hold displays HR1 is displayed in a state where any of the normal hold displays HR1 is selected. The timing determined by the lottery is, for example, 1) immediately after performing a hold display (referred to as target hold display) determined to be button hold, 2) immediately after performing a hold display next to the target hold display, 3 3) Immediately after performing the hold display twice after the target hold display, and 3) at any timing immediately after performing the hold display three times after the target hold display. However, when the hold corresponding to the target hold display has already been consumed at the timing determined by the lottery, and when only one target hold display is displayed as the hold display, the button image BTN9 and The message MSG2 is not displayed.

  As a result, when the button image BTN9, the message MSG2, and the cursor CSL2 are displayed (see FIG. 260A), when a plurality of normal hold displays HR1 are displayed, any of the plurality of normal hold displays HR1 is displayed. It is impossible for the player to know whether or not is a target hold display. Although the player can understand that the button image BTN9 is associated with the displayed normal hold display HR1, which normal hold display HR1 is associated with is displayed in a display mode that the player cannot understand. It can be said that.

  Here, when the player presses the right sub button 372, the cursor CSL2 moves to a state in which the normal hold display HR1 adjacent to the right of the currently selected normal hold display HR1 is selected. On the other hand, when the player presses the left sub button 372, the cursor CSL2 moves to a state in which the normal hold display HR1 adjacent to the left of the currently selected normal hold display HR1 is selected. That is, the player can select any one of the plurality of normal hold indications HR1 by operating the sub button 372. When the player presses the main button 371, if the normal hold display HR1 selected when the main button 371 is pressed is the target hold display, the target hold display is changed to the special hold display (FIG. 260 (B )). In FIG. 260 (B), the normal hold display HR1 with the second digestion order (second from the right in FIG. 260 (B)) is the target hold display, and the target hold display is changed to the third special hold display HR1W. A displayed example is shown.

  On the other hand, when the normal hold display HR1 selected when the main button 371 is pressed is not the target hold display, a loss mark FAN indicating that the target hold display is not displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the normal hold display HR1 (FIG. 260). (C)). The number of times that the player can accept that the normal hold display HR1 is selected and the main button 371 is pressed (referred to as selection confirmation) is determined in advance. For example, when four or three normal hold displays HR1 are displayed, the number of times the selection confirmation is accepted is set to two, and when two normal hold displays HR1 are displayed, the selection confirmation is accepted. The number of times of being set is set to one. When the normal hold display HR1 that is not the target hold display is continuously selected and confirmed for a predetermined number of times, the game indicates that the normal hold display HR1 is the target hold display in the normal hold display HR1 that is the target hold display. A correct answer CAN shown to the person is made. However, the target hold display is not changed to the special hold display, and the player cannot see the special hold display as the expectation suggestion effect. When the player selects and confirms the normal hold display HR1, which is the target hold display, and the normal hold display HR1 is changed to the special hold display (FIG. 260 (A)), or the number of times the player is determined in advance. The normal hold display HR1 that is not the target hold display is continuously selected and confirmed, and the correct display CAN is displayed (FIG. 260 (D)), or when the special hold search effect is started. When one of the normal hold indications HR1 that has been used is digested (when the next change is made), the special hold search effect is ended.

  According to this modification, the player operates the sub-button 372 on his / her own to search for the target hold display. Therefore, if the search is successful, the player has drawn the expectation suggestion effect with his / her hand. When an expectation suggestion effect indicating a high jackpot expectation level is displayed, the joy of winning a jackpot in the lottery corresponding to the hold display increases. In addition, if the search fails, it feels regret that the expectation suggestion effect could not be displayed, and it is worried about how high the target hold display has the expectation, and the lottery corresponding to the target hold display The whereabouts will be watched with a sense different from the normal lottery, for example, with a sense of increasing excitement about whether or not to win. As a result, it is possible to have the player proceed with the game with fulfilling emotions, and to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In particular, when a lottery is repeated without winning a jackpot over a large number of times (for example, 1000 times) (so-called Hamari), if a special hold search effect is made, the game of the player who has been far away It is possible to effectively attract the interest of, and effectively suppress the decline in game motivation.

  Next, although not implemented in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a first position-based reservation effect that is a modified example of the reservation effect using the main button 371 will be described. Since the configuration other than that described below is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. FIG. 261 is a diagram for describing the first position-based reservation effect. In the first hold effect by position, as a special hold display that can be displayed instead of the button hold display HRB when the player presses the main button 371 when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed, a fifth special hold display is provided. A hold display HR1A (FIG. 261 (A)), a sixth special hold display HR1B (FIG. 261 (B)), and a seventh special hold display HR1C (FIG. 261 (C)) are prepared. The fifth special hold display HR1A is a special hold display indicating jackpot confirmation, that is, a special hold display indicating a jackpot decision in a premier effect that appears at a very low frequency at the same time as a special hold display with a jackpot expectation degree of 100%. is there. The sixth special hold display HR1B is a special hold display that indicates confirmation of effects beyond super reach. The seventh special hold display HR1C is a special hold display indicating confirmation of the effect of reach or higher. That is, the fifth special hold display HR1A, the sixth special hold display HR1B, and the seventh special hold display HR1C suggest the jackpot expectation and the contents of the fluctuating effects performed with the fluctuations corresponding to the special hold display. It suggests.

  Here, when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed, the normal hold display other than the three special hold effects described above as the hold display that can be displayed instead of the button hold display HRB when the player presses the main button 371. HR1 may be prepared (so-called gas).

  Here, the premier effect can be defined as an effect in which a jackpot is determined when it appears, and is generally an effect with a very low appearance probability as described above. Super reach means, for example, an effect in which after the reach is established on the screen at the start of the change and until the final stop symbol is confirmed and stopped, a special effect after the reach is established that is different from the screen at the start of the change is performed. Can be defined as As super reach, in general, special effects are prepared after multiple types of reach are established. Reach is a state in which the final stop symbol of one symbol that fluctuates / stops in a plurality of variable regions is fluctuating in one variable region, and the symbol is stopped in the other variable regions. If a specific symbol stops as the final stop symbol, it can be defined as a state in which a combination of symbols for notifying the jackpot is configured. The reach includes a normal reach in which the final stop symbol is stopped after the reach is established on a screen that is substantially the same as the screen at the start of change, and the above-described super reach. The jackpot expectation is super reach> normal reach.

  The probability that the fifth special hold display HR1A, the sixth special hold display HR1B, and the seventh special hold display HR1C are determined as the special hold display is, of course, the fifth special hold display HR1A <the sixth. The special hold display HR1B <the seventh special hold display HR1C, and in particular, the probability that the fifth special hold display HR1A is determined as the special hold display is extremely low.

  A feature of the first on-hold hold effect is that the type of special hold display to be displayed is determined according to the display position of the button hold display HRB6. Specifically, in step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, it is determined that the button is put on hold, and if the type of special hold display is determined to be the fifth special hold display HR1A in step S505, In the special hold display HR1A, the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the third hold display position in the digestion order, that is, the third position on the left side when viewed from the crystal image FCR (hereinafter also referred to as the hold 3 position). Is displayed (the position shown in FIG. 261 (D)) only when the main button 371 is pressed by the player. In this case, the fifth special hold display HR1A may be displayed when the main button 371 is pressed once, or each time the main button 371 is pressed, a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) is displayed. ) May be displayed when the lottery is won.

  Similarly, in step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, it is determined that the button is put on hold, and if the type of special hold display is determined to be the sixth special hold display HR1B in step S505, In the special hold display HR1B, the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the second hold display position in the digestion order, that is, the second position on the left side when viewed from the crystal image FCR (hereinafter also referred to as the hold 2 position). Is displayed only when the main button 371 is pressed by the player when the player is present (position shown in FIG. 261 (E)). In this case, the sixth special hold display HR1B may be displayed when the main button 371 is pressed once, or each time the main button 371 is pressed, a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) is displayed. ) May be displayed when the lottery is won.

  Then, in step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, it is determined to be button hold, and if the type of special hold display is determined to be the seventh special hold display HR1C in step S505, the seventh special hold is determined. In the display HR1C, when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the first hold display position in the digestion order, that is, the first position on the left side when viewed from the crystal image FCR (hereinafter also referred to as the hold 1 position). (The position shown in FIG. 261 (F)) is displayed only when the main button 371 is pressed by the player. In this case, the sixth special hold display HR1B may be displayed when the main button 371 is pressed once, or each time the main button 371 is pressed, a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) is displayed. ) May be displayed when the lottery is won.

  Further, when the so-called “gase” described above (a pattern in which the HRB is not changed to the special hold display but is changed to the normal hold display HR1 even though the button hold display HRB6 is displayed) is prepared. Is configured to change to the normal hold display HR1 only at the position where the button hold display HRB6 is at the hold 1 position. In this case, for example, when the special hold display is not displayed at the position of the hold 3 and the position of the hold 2, the probability of becoming a gusset at the position of the hold 1 is set to be relatively low.

  That is, in the case where the first hold effect by position is performed, when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the hold 3 position, it can be displayed in response to the pressing of the main button 371. Only the hold display HR1A is displayed, and no other special hold display can be displayed. In addition, when the first hold effect by position is performed, when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the hold 2 position, it can be displayed in response to the pressing of the main button 371. Only the hold display HR1B is displayed, and no other special hold display can be displayed. When the first position hold effect is performed, when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the position of hold 1, it can be displayed in response to pressing of the main button 371 is the seventh special Only the hold display HR1C or the normal hold display HR1 (gase), and no other special hold display can be displayed.

  For this reason, when the player who knows this rule of the first position-based hold effect displays the button hold display HRB6 at the position of the hold 3, the player shows the 5th premier jackpot decision that has the highest value for the player. In praying for the appearance of the special hold display HR1A, the main button 371 is pressed or repeatedly hit. As a result, when the fifth special hold display HR1A that appears with a very low probability is displayed, it is wrapped in delight and waits for digestion of the hold. On the other hand, when the button hold display HRB6 is not changed to the fifth special hold display HR1A at the hold 3 position, the button hold display HRB6 moves to the hold 2 position as the hold is being digested. It will be.

  Then, the player does not display the fifth special hold display HR1A, but depresses the main button 371 or repeatedly hits the sixth special hold display HR1B indicating the confirmation of the super reach effect. Will do. As a result, when the sixth special hold display HR1B is displayed, the player feels joy to expect a relatively big jackpot, although not as much as when the fifth special hold display HR1A is displayed. , Will wait for the pending digestion. On the other hand, when the button hold display HRB6 is not changed to the sixth special hold display HR1B at the hold 2 position, the button hold display HRB6 moves to the hold 1 position as the hold digestion progresses. It will be.

  Then, the player presses the main button 371 or repeatedly hits the player while thinking that he wants to reach at least as much as possible, and wants to refrain only from the frustration. As a result, when the 7th special hold indication HR1C is displayed, it is safe to say that a reach will occur for the time being, and it is likely that it will be a big hit. I will wait. On the other hand, when the normal hold display HR1 is displayed, the player is disappointed with "What is it?"

  In this way, by changing the conditions under which the button hold display HRB6 can be changed to the special hold display depending on the hold position where the button hold display HRB6 is displayed, the expectation for one hold over a plurality of variable periods Since the player is relieved every time, it is possible to realize an effect that can lead the player to a psychology in which a sense of uplift, disappointment, and expectation of the next are mixed for an extremely long period of time. Therefore, the interest of the player can be enhanced, and the player can be immersed in the game to suppress a decrease in the game motivation.

  In addition, as the fifth special hold display HR1A that can be displayed at the position of hold 3, a plurality of types of special hold displays indicating the type are prepared according to the type of the premier effect displayed in the corresponding changing effect. Also good. In addition, as the sixth special hold display HR1B that can be displayed at the position of hold 2, a plurality of types of special hold displays indicating the type are prepared according to the type of super reach displayed in the corresponding changing effect. Also good. In this way, the player can know the contents of the changing effect by displaying the special hold display. For example, the special hold display displayed at the position of the hold 2 has a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot. Can be told in advance whether the super-reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation will be performed during the fluctuation, so that the player's feelings can be shaken more greatly Can be realized.

  In the first position-based hold effect, the special hold display suggesting a higher expectation is made as the display position of the button hold display HRB6 is farther from the crystal image FCR. For example, in contrast to the first on-hold effect by position, the second on-hold effect by which a special hold display that suggests a high degree of expectation is made as the display position of the button hold display HRB6 approaches the crystal image FCR. Will be described.

  Specifically, in step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, it is determined that the button is put on hold, and if the type of special hold display is determined to be the fifth special hold display HR1A in step S505, The special hold display HR1A is only when the main button 371 is pressed by the player when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the position where the digestion order is hold 1 (the position shown in FIG. 261 (F)). Displayed. In this case, the fifth special hold display HR1A may be displayed when the main button 371 is pressed once, or when a lottery with a predetermined probability is won each time the main button 371 is pressed. May be displayed.

  Similarly, in step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, it is determined that the button is put on hold, and if the type of special hold display is determined to be the sixth special hold display HR1B in step S505, The special hold display HR1B is displayed only when the main button 371 is pressed by the player when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the hold 2 position (the position shown in FIG. 261 (E)). . In this case, the sixth special hold display HR1B may be displayed when the main button 371 is pressed once, or when a lottery with a predetermined probability is won each time the main button 371 is pressed. May be displayed.

  Then, in step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, it is determined to be button hold, and if the type of special hold display is determined to be the seventh special hold display HR1C in step S505, the seventh special hold is determined. The display HR1C is displayed only when the main button 371 is pressed by the player when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the hold 3 position (the position shown in FIG. 261 (D)). In this case, the sixth special hold display HR1B may be displayed when the main button 371 is pressed once, or when a lottery with a predetermined probability is won each time the main button 371 is pressed. May be displayed.

  In addition, the so-called “gase” described above (a pattern in which the HRB is not changed to the special hold display but the normal hold display HR1 is changed although the button hold display HRB6 is displayed) is prepared. preferable. In this case, only the position where the button hold display HRB6 is in the position of the hold 1 is configured to change to the normal hold display HR1. In this case, for example, when the special hold display is not displayed at the position of the hold 3 and the position of the hold 2, the probability of becoming a gusset at the position of the hold 1 is set to be relatively high.

  That is, in the case where the second hold effect by position is performed, when the button hold display HRB6 is displayed at the hold 3 position, it can be displayed in response to pressing of the main button 371. Only the hold display HR1C is displayed, and no other special hold display can be displayed. In addition, when the second position-by-position effect is performed, when the button hold display HRB 6 is displayed at the position of the hold 2, it can be displayed in response to the pressing of the main button 371. Only the hold display HR1B is displayed, and no other special hold display can be displayed. When the second position-specific hold effect is performed, when the button hold display HRB 6 is displayed at the position of hold 1, it can be displayed in response to pressing of the main button 371. Only the hold display HR1A or the normal hold display HR1 (gase) is displayed, and other special hold displays cannot be displayed.

  For this reason, a player who knows this rule of the second position-based on-hold effect is unaware that when the button hold display HRB 6 is displayed at the position of the hold 3, an expectation-indicating effect on the extent of reaching is achieved. , And feel that the expectation suggestion effect is not desired here, and the main button 371 is pressed or repeatedly hit. As a result, when the seventh special hold display HR1C is displayed, it is a pity that there is not much expectation, and the digestion of the hold is awaited. On the other hand, when the button hold display HRB6 is not changed to the seventh special hold display HR1C at the hold 3 position, the button hold display HRB6 moves to the hold 2 position as the hold digestion progresses. It will be.

  Then, the player actually wants to display the fifth special hold display HR1A indicating the confirmation of the premier effect, but since the fifth special hold display HR1A is extremely rare, it indicates the determination of the super reach effect here. If the sixth special hold display HR1B does not appear, there is a high probability that it will become a frustration, so the main button 371 is pressed down or repeated while wishing to appear on the sixth special hold display HR1B. Become. As a result, when the sixth special hold display HR1B is displayed, the user feels joy of expecting a relatively large jackpot and waits for the hold to be digested without worrying that it is good. . On the other hand, when the button hold display HRB6 is not changed to the sixth special hold display HR1B at the hold 2 position, the button hold display HRB6 moves to the hold 1 position as the hold digestion progresses. It will be.

  Then, the player quits the gaze and presses the main button 371 or hits repeatedly while wishing that the fifth special hold display HR1A appears. As a result, when the fifth special hold display HR1A is displayed, a great joy is felt for the finalization of the premier effect, and the digestion of the hold is awaited while being immersed in joy. On the other hand, when the normal hold display HR1 is displayed, the player is disappointed with "Is it" Gase "after all?"

  In this way, by changing the conditions under which the button hold display HRB6 can be changed to the special hold display depending on the hold position where the button hold display HRB6 is displayed, the expectation for one hold over a plurality of variable periods Since the player is relieved every time, it is possible to realize an effect that can lead the player to a psychology in which a sense of uplift, disappointment, and expectation of the next are mixed for an extremely long period of time. Therefore, the interest of the player can be enhanced, and the player can be immersed in the game to suppress a decrease in the game motivation.

  Also, as described above, since the player's emotion swings greatly in the first position-by-position effect and the second position-by-position effect, the first position-by-position effect in one gaming machine. And it is good also as being able to perform both the 2nd holding | maintenance effects according to position. In this case, it is preferable that the player distinguishes between the first position-based reservation effect and the second position-based reservation effect. For example, the color of the button image of the button hold display HRB6 displayed in the first hold effect by position may be different from the color of the button image of the button hold display HRB6 displayed in the second position hold effect. . In this way, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that can guide the player to various psychology over a plurality of variable periods.

  In the same way as the first on-hold effect, the second on-hold effect is also displayed as the fifth special hold display HR1A that can be displayed at the position of hold 1 with the corresponding changing effect. Depending on the type of premier effect, a plurality of types of special hold displays indicating the type may be prepared. In addition, as the sixth special hold display HR1B that can be displayed at the position of hold 2, a plurality of types of special hold displays indicating the type are prepared according to the type of super reach displayed in the corresponding changing effect. Also good. In this way, the player can know the contents of the changing effect by displaying the special hold display. For example, the special hold display displayed at the position of the hold 2 has a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot. Can be told in advance whether the super-reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation will be performed during the fluctuation, so that the player's feelings can be shaken more greatly Can be realized.

  Next, although not implemented in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a third position-by-position effect, which is a modified example of the effect by using the main button 371, will be described. Since the configuration other than that described below is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  The feature of the third position-by-position effect is that the accuracy of the expected level represented by the special hold display displayed as the expected level suggestion effect differs depending on the display position where the button hold display HRB is displayed, and the button hold display The probability that the special hold display is displayed differs depending on the display position where the HRB is displayed.

  Specifically, in the third position-based hold effect, when the button hold display HRB is displayed, the special hold display that can be displayed instead of the button hold display HRB in response to the player pressing the main button 371 is 253, the first special hold display HR1U (expected degree of jackpot expectation 10%), the second special hold display HR1V (expected expectation of jackpot 30%), the third special hold display HR1W (expected degree of jackpot expectation 50%), There are four types of fourth special hold display HR1X (expected expectation of jackpot 70%). Further, when the button hold display HRB is displayed, a pattern in which the special hold display is canceled and the normal hold display HR1 that does not suggest the jackpot expectation is displayed even though the player presses the main button 371. (Expectation suggestion stop pattern) is prepared.

  Specifically, it is assumed that button hold is determined in step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, and the type of special hold display is determined to be the third special hold display HR1W in step S505.

  In this case, in the third on-hold effect, when the main button 371 is pressed by the player while the button hold display HRB is displayed at the hold 3 position, the type of special hold display in step S505. Is determined as the third special hold display HR1W, the expectation suggestion stop pattern is selected with a probability of 50%, and the jackpot expectation is not suggested. On the other hand, the third special hold display HR1W is displayed with a probability of 50%.

  If the main button 371 is pressed by the player while the button hold display HRB is displayed at the hold 2 position, the special hold display type is determined to be the third special hold display HR1W in step S505. Nevertheless, the expectation suggestion stop pattern is selected with a probability of 30%, and the jackpot expectation is not suggested. On the other hand, the special hold display is displayed with a probability of 70%. However, when the special hold display is displayed, the third special hold display HR1W is displayed as determined in step S505 with a probability of 80%, but the type of the special hold display is the third in step S505. Despite being determined as the special hold display HR1W, the fourth special hold display HR1X having a higher probability of jackpot than the third special hold display HR1W is changed to the third special hold display HR1W with a probability of 10%. And the second special hold display HR1V having a lower jackpot expectation than the third special hold display HR1W is displayed with a probability of 10%.

  Then, when the button hold display HRB is displayed at the position of hold 1 and the main button 371 is pressed by the player, the expectation suggestion stop pattern is not selected, and there is some special hold display with a probability of 100%. Is displayed. However, when the special hold display is displayed, the third special hold display HR1W is displayed as determined in step S505 with a probability of 50%, but the type of the special hold display is the third in step S505. Despite being determined as the special hold display HR1W, the fourth special hold display HR1X having a higher probability of jackpot than the third special hold display HR1W is changed to the third special hold display HR1W with a probability of 25%. And the second special hold display HR1V having a lower jackpot expectation than the third special hold display HR1W is displayed with a probability of 25%.

  That is, when the player presses the main button 371 when the button hold display HRB is displayed at the position of hold 3, the probability of expectation is not high (high risk), but the expectation is suggested. In this case, since the special hold display that should be displayed is always displayed, the player can know the exact jackpot expectation (high return).

  If the player presses the main button 371 when the button hold display HRB is displayed at the position of hold 2, the probability that the expectation is not suggested is medium (middle risk), while the expectation suggestion If a special hold display, which is different from the special hold display that should be displayed, is displayed with a medium probability, the accuracy of the jackpot expectation to be notified to the player is slightly inferior. (Middle return).

  Furthermore, if the player presses the main button 371 when the button hold display HRB is displayed at the position of the hold 1, the expected degree suggestion does not occur (low risk), but the expected degree suggested Since the special hold display different from the special hold display that should be displayed is displayed with a relatively high probability, the jackpot expectation that the player is informed is often inaccurate (low return).

  That is, if the player presses the main button 371 when the button hold display HRB is displayed at the position of the hold 3, the player can obtain an accurate expectation suggestion although there is a high risk that the expectation is not suggested. That means making a high-risk, high-return choice. If the main button 371 is pressed when the button hold display HRB is displayed at the position of the hold 2, the risk that the degree of expectation is not suggested is moderate, but the accuracy of the degree of expectation is slightly obtained. This means that middle-risk middle-return choices are inferior. Furthermore, if the main button 371 is pressed when the button hold display HRB is displayed at the position of the hold 1, there is no risk that the degree of expectation is not suggested, but the accuracy of the degree of expectation is extremely poor. This means making a low-risk, low-return choice.

  According to this modification, when the button hold display HRB is displayed, the player is worried about which position the button hold display HRB is displayed when the main button 371 is pressed. That is, the player can press the main button 371 when the button hold display HRB is at the hold 1 position, because the player wants to surely obtain the expectation suggestion because it may be somewhat inaccurate. If the suggestion is not obtained, the main button 371 can be pressed when the user is in the hold 3 position because he wants to obtain an accurate expectation suggestion because he gives up. As a result, the player can be guided to a novel psychological situation in which the player is worried about whether or not to press the main button 371 now. As a result, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by realizing an effect capable of guiding the player to various psychological states. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

  Next, although not implemented in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a “button operation suspension effect over a plurality of symbol variations (a suspension effect using the main button 371), which is a modification example of the suspension effect using the main button 371. ) ”. Since the configuration other than that described below is the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, in the button operation hold effect over multiple symbol variations, first, the hold effect corresponding to the operation of the main button 371 can be executed at each display position of the hold 1 to 3. Therefore, for example, by operating the main button 371 at all the display positions of the holdings 1 to 3, you can enjoy the holding effect for three times (multiple times), respectively, or at any of the display positions of the holdings 1 to 3. Only the hold effect (one or two hold effects) may be selectively enjoyed and left to the discretion of the player. In addition, the special hold display that can be displayed in response to the player pressing the main button 371 includes the first special hold display HR1U, the second special hold display HR1V, the third special hold display HR1W, There are four special hold indications HR1X. However, as will be described later, when it is determined to hold the button in the process of step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, in this modification, the first special hold display HR1U is exposed from the beginning. And the button image BTN1 shown in FIG. 252 is displayed in duplicate on the first special hold display HR1U. In addition, the degree of expectation set for each of the hold display modes can be changed depending on the display position that appears due to the button operation, the button operation history until that time (the effect background of the multiple symbol changes), and the like. Yes. In addition, when the first special hold display HR1U is displayed, the special hold display HR1 that cancels the display of the special hold display and does not suggest the jackpot expectation degree despite the player pressing the main button 371 is displayed. It is assumed that the pattern to be displayed (expectation suggestion stop pattern) is not prepared in this modification.

  Furthermore, in this modified example, when it is determined to hold the button in the process of step S504 in the hold display process shown in FIG. 251, the type of the special hold display is determined in the next process of step S505. Absent. That is, in the process of step S505 in this modified example, the hold effect determined to be the button hold based on the table shown in FIG. 262 (hit promotion rate setting table, lose promotion rate setting table). The production mode is determined (selected).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, the hit promotion rate setting table T1 and the lost time promotion rate setting table T2 are prepared, and the button is held based on these tables T1 and T2. The effect mode in the determined hold effect is determined.

  Here, the winning promotion rate setting table T1 is stored in the first special symbol lottery unit data that is subject to button hold based on the second type winning notification command transmitted in step S11084 (see FIG. 228), for example. FIG. 262 is a table used by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when it is determined in advance that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery based on the processing shown in FIG. 262 (A). It shows the relationship between the holding effect modes A to C at the time of being selected and selected, and their distribution rates.

  Similarly, in the case of the loss promotion rate setting table T2, the first special symbol lottery unit data that is subject to button suspension is determined based on the second type winning notification command transmitted in step S11084 (see FIG. 228), for example. FIG. 262 is a table used by the peripheral control MPU 4140a when it is determined in advance that the jackpot lottery is based on the fact that the jackpot has been lost (lost). As shown in FIG. It shows the relationship between the hold production modes D to F at the time of the loss that is the selection target in the process of, and their distribution rate.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 262 (A), in the case of the holding effect mode A when hitting, if the first special hold display HR1U is in the hold 3 position together with the button image BTN1, the main button 371 is pressed. It shows that the first special hold display HR1U is derived with the probability of 256/256 being promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V. Further, in the case of the holding effect mode B at the time of hitting, if the main button 371 is pressed when the first special hold display HR1U is in the hold 3 position together with the button image BTN1, the first probability is 64/256. The special hold indication HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold indication HR1V, and the probability of 192/256 is that the first special hold indication HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold indication HR1V. It shows that the display mode is maintained. Also, in the case of the holding effect mode C at the time of hit, if the main button 371 is pressed when the first special hold display HR1U is in the hold 3 position together with the button image BTN1, the first with a probability of 128/256. The special hold indication HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold indication HR1V, and the first special hold indication HR1U is not promoted and changed to the second special hold indication HR1V with a probability of 128/256. It shows that the display mode is maintained.

  In addition, after the effect result (the effect result of whether or not the promotion has been changed to the second special hold display HR1V) appears according to the operation on the main button 371 when in the position of the hold 3 in this way, During the period until the hold display (the first special hold display HR1U or the second special hold display HR1V) moves to the hold 2 position, the operation on the main button 371 regarding the hold display is invalidated. That is, in this case, the display of the button hold display HRB6 is erased and only the hold display as the effect result is displayed. However, when the hold display moves to the hold 2 position according to the hold, The operation on the main button 371 relating to the display is made valid again, and the button image BTN1 shown in FIG. 252 is displayed in duplicate on the hold display that has been moved to the hold 2 position accordingly. In addition, regarding the validity / invalidity of the operation with respect to the main button 371 regarding the hold display and the process of displaying the button hold display HRB6 associated therewith, the hold display effect at the time of losing, the main button when in hold 2 or hold 1 The same applies to the operation for 371.

  Incidentally, if the main button 371 is not operated when the first special hold display HR1U is in the hold 3 position together with the button image BTN1, the operation on the main button 371 related to the hold display remains valid, and the next At the start of symbol variation, the first special hold display HR1U moves to the hold 2 position together with the button image BTN1 while maintaining the display mode. Further, regarding the maintenance processing of the hold display mode when there is no operation on the main button 371, the hold display effect at the time of losing, or when there is no operation on the main button 371 when in hold 2 or hold 1. Applied.

  Then, in the case of the holding effect mode A at the time of hit, when the first special hold display HR1U or the second special hold display HR1V is in the hold 2 position together with the button image BTN1, the main button 371 is pressed. If pressed, the corresponding hold display is derived in a form of being promoted and changed with a probability of 256/256. That is, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the hold 2 position, the first special hold display HR1U is promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V at the hold 2 position. It is shown that it is derived. Alternatively, when the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 2, the second special hold display HR1V is promoted and changed to the third special hold display HR1W at the hold 2 position. It is shown that it is derived. Similarly, in the case of the holding effect mode B at the time of hitting, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the position of the hold 2, the first special hold at the position of the hold 2 has a probability of 128/256. The hold display HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and the display of the first special hold display HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold display HR1V with a probability of 128/256. It shows that the aspect is maintained. Alternatively, if the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 2, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the third special hold display HR1W at the hold 2 position with a probability of 128/256. Derived in the form of being promoted and changed, it is shown that the second special hold display HR1V is maintained at the probability of 128/256 without being promoted to the third special hold display HR1W. Similarly, in the case of the holding effect mode C at the time of hitting, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the position of the hold 2, the first special hold at the position of the hold 2 has a probability of 64/256. The hold display HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and the display of the first special hold display HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold display HR1V with a probability of 192/256. It shows that the aspect is maintained. Alternatively, if the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 2, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the third special hold display HR1W at the hold 2 position with a probability of 64/256. Derived in the form of being promoted and changed, the probability of 192/256 indicates that the second special hold display HR1V is maintained in the display state without being promoted to the third special hold display HR1W.

  Next, in the case of the holding effect mode A at the time of hit, the first special hold display HR1U, the second special hold display HR1V, or the third special hold display HR1W is held together with the button image BTN1. If the main button 371 is pressed while in the position, the corresponding hold display can be derived in a form of being promoted and changed over a plurality of stages with a probability of 16/256, and the corresponding hold display with a probability of 240/256 is one stage. It will be derived in the form of only being promoted and changed. That is, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the hold 1 position, the first special hold display HR1U is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X at the hold 1 position with a probability of 16/256. It is derived in the form of being promoted and changed over three stages, and the first special hold indication HR1U is derived with the probability of 240/256 being promoted and changed to the second special hold indication HR1V. Alternatively, if the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 1, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X at the hold 1 position with a probability of 16/256. It is derived in the form of being promoted and changed over two stages, and the second special hold indication HR1V is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the third special hold indication HR1W with a probability of 240/256. However, if the third special hold display HR1W is at the hold 1 position, a display mode with a higher expectation than the fourth special hold display HR1X is not prepared, and the probability is 256/256. The third special hold display HR1W is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X. It should be noted that a display mode having a higher expectation than the fourth special hold display HR1X is prepared so that the promotion can be changed over a plurality of stages even when the third special hold display HR1W is at the hold 1 position. Also good.

  Similarly, in the case of the holding effect mode B at the time of hitting, when the first special hold display HR1U is in the position of the hold 1, the first special hold probability is 256/256 at the position of the hold 1 It shows that the hold display HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted to the second special hold display HR1V. Alternatively, when the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 1, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the third special hold display HR1W at the position of hold 1 with a probability of 256/256. It shows that it is derived in the form of promotion change. Alternatively, if the third special hold display HR1W is at the hold 1 position, the third special hold display HR1W is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X at the hold 1 position with a probability of 256/256. It shows that it is derived in the form of promotion change.

  Similarly, in the case of the holding effect mode C at the time of hitting, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the position of the hold 1, the first special hold at the position of the hold 1 has a probability of 32/256. The hold display HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and the display of the first special hold display HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold display HR1V with a probability of 224/256. It shows that the aspect is maintained. Alternatively, if the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 1, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the third special hold display HR1W at the hold 1 position with a probability of 32/256. Derived in the form of being promoted and changed, it is shown that the display mode of the second special hold display HR1V is maintained without being promoted to the third special hold display HR1W with a probability of 224/256. Alternatively, if the third special hold display HR1W is at the hold 1 position, the third special hold display HR1W is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X at the hold 1 position with a probability of 32/256. It is derived in the form of being promoted and changed, and the third special hold display HR1W is maintained at the probability of 224/256 without being promoted to the fourth special hold display HR1X.

  Further, in the winning promotion rate setting table T1, among the 100 predetermined effect random numbers that can be acquired when the preceding determination that the game is a big win is made, 52 for the hold effect mode A Random values are associated with each other, 30 random values are associated with the holding effect mode B, and 18 random values are associated with the holding effect mode C. Therefore, when the winning promotion rate setting table T1 is used, the hold effect mode A is adopted with a probability of 52/100, the hold effect mode B is adopted with a probability of 30/100, and the hold effect mode C is 18 Adopted with a probability of / 100.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 262 (B), in the case of the hold effect mode D at the time of losing, if the first special hold display HR1U is in the hold 3 position together with the button image BTN1, the main button 371 is pressed. The first special hold indication HR1U is derived with the probability of being promoted and changed to the second special hold indication HR1V with a probability of 16/256, and the first special hold indication HR1U with the probability of 240/256 is the second special hold. This indicates that the display mode is maintained without being promoted to the hold display HR1V. Further, in the case of the hold effect modes E and F at the time of losing, if the main button 371 is pressed when the first special hold display HR1U is at the hold 3 position together with the button image BTN1, the probability is 1/256. One special hold indication HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold indication HR1V, and the first special hold indication HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold indication HR1V with a probability of 255/256. Each of these shows that the display mode is maintained.

  Next, in the case of the hold effect mode D at the time of losing, if the main button 371 is pressed when the first special hold display HR1U is in the hold 2 position together with the button image BTN1, the probability is 64/256. The first special hold display HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and the display mode of the first special hold display HR1U is maintained without being promoted and changed with a probability of 192/256. Which indicates that. Alternatively, if the main button 371 is pressed when the second special hold display HR1V is in the hold 2 position together with the button image BTN1, the second special hold display HR1V is the third special hold display HR1W with a probability of 64/256. The second special hold display HR1V is maintained without being promoted and changed with a probability of 192/256. Similarly, in the case of the holding effect mode E at the time of losing, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the position of the hold 2, the first special hold at the position of the hold 2 has a probability of 32/256. The hold display HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted to the second special hold display HR1V, and the display of the first special hold display HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold display HR1V with a probability of 224/256. It shows that the aspect is maintained. Alternatively, if the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 2, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the third special hold display HR1W at the hold 2 position with a probability of 32/256. Derived in the form of being promoted and changed, it is shown that the display mode of the second special hold display HR1V is maintained without being promoted to the third special hold display HR1W with a probability of 224/256. Similarly, in the case of the hold effect mode F at the time of losing, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the hold 2 position, the first special hold probability is 1/256 at the hold 2 position. The hold indication HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold indication HR1V, and the display of the first special hold indication HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold indication HR1V with a probability of 255/256. It shows that the aspect is maintained. Alternatively, when the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 2, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the third special hold display HR1W with a probability of 1/256 at this hold 2 position. It is derived in the form of being promoted and changed, and the second special hold display HR1V is maintained at the probability of 255/256 without being promoted to the third special hold display HR1W.

  Then, in the case of the hold effect mode D at the time of the loss, the first special hold display HR1U, the second special hold display HR1V, or the third special hold display HR1W is held together with the button image BTN1. If the main button 371 is pressed while in the position, the corresponding hold display can be derived in a form of being promoted and changed over a plurality of stages with a probability of 1/256, and the corresponding hold display with a probability of 255/256 is one stage. It will be derived in the form of only being promoted and changed. That is, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the hold 1 position, the first special hold display HR1U becomes the fourth special hold display HR1X with a probability of 1/256 at the hold 1 position. It is derived in the form of being promoted and changed over three stages, and the first special hold indication HR1U is derived with the probability of 255/256 being promoted and changed to the second special hold indication HR1V. Alternatively, if the second special hold display HR1V is at the hold 1 position, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X with a probability of 1/256 at the hold 1 position. It is derived in the form of being promoted and changed over two stages, and the second special hold indication HR1V is derived with the probability of 255/256 being promoted and changed to the third special hold indication HR1W. However, if the third special hold display HR1W is at the hold 1 position, a display mode with a higher expectation than the fourth special hold display HR1X is not prepared, and the probability is 256/256. The third special hold display HR1W is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X.

  Similarly, in the case of the holding effect mode E at the time of losing, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the position of the hold 1, the first special hold at the position of the hold 1 has a probability of 128/256. The hold display HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and the display of the first special hold display HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold display HR1V with a probability of 128/256. It shows that the aspect is maintained. Or, if the second special hold display HR1V is in the position of hold 1, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the third special hold display HR1W at the hold 1 position with a probability of 128/256. Derived in the form of being promoted and changed, it is shown that the second special hold display HR1V is maintained at the probability of 128/256 without being promoted to the third special hold display HR1W. Alternatively, if the third special hold display HR1W is at the hold 1 position, the third special hold display HR1W is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X at the hold 1 position with a probability of 128/256. The third special hold display HR1W is derived in the form of being promoted and changed with a probability of 128/256, and the display mode is maintained without being promoted to the fourth special hold display HR1X.

  Similarly, in the case of the hold effect mode F at the time of losing, when the first special hold display HR1U is at the hold 1 position, at the hold 1 position, the first special hold has a probability of 64/256. The hold display HR1U is derived in the form of being promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and the display of the first special hold display HR1U is not promoted to the second special hold display HR1V with a probability of 192/256. It shows that the aspect is maintained. Alternatively, if the second special hold display HR1V is at the hold 1 position, the second special hold display HR1V is changed to the third special hold display HR1W at the hold 1 position with a probability of 64/256. Derived in the form of being promoted and changed, the probability of 192/256 indicates that the second special hold display HR1V is maintained in the display state without being promoted to the third special hold display HR1W. Alternatively, if the third special hold display HR1W is at the hold 1 position, the third special hold display HR1W is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X with a probability of 164/256 at the hold 1 position. The third special hold display HR1W is derived in the form of being promoted and changed with a probability of 192/256, and the display mode is maintained without being promoted to the fourth special hold display HR1X.

  Further, in the lost time promotion rate setting table T2, of the total 100 predetermined effect random numbers that can be acquired when a prior determination that the game is lost is 52 for the hold effect mode D. Random values are associated with each other, 30 random values are associated with the holding effect mode E, and 18 random values are associated with the holding effect mode F. Therefore, when the loss promotion rate setting table T2 is used, the hold effect mode D is adopted with a probability of 52/100, the hold effect mode E is adopted with a probability of 30/100, and the hold effect mode F is 18 Adopted with a probability of / 100.

  According to the hit promotion rate setting table T1 and the loss promotion rate setting table T2, the hold display mode is the most promoted among the hold effects at the positions 1 to 3 according to the operation of the main button 371. The hold effect that is easy to do is the hold effect at the position of hold 1, and the hold effect that is most difficult to promote the hold display mode is the hold effect at the position of hold 3. Therefore, in addition to a game technique in which the player operates the main button 371 to challenge (confirm) whether or not the hold display mode is promoted in all of the hold effects at the positions of hold 1 to 3, for example, If the main button 371 is operated only with the hold effect at the position of the hold 1 and the main button 371 is not operated with the hold effect at the positions of the hold 2 and 3, the probability is relatively high regardless of whether or not the jackpot is successful. Since the hold display mode is promoted, it is possible to enjoy the hold effect according to the operation of the main button 371 while suppressing the risk of lowering the expectation due to the non-promotion of the hold display mode.

  However, on the other hand, when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery (promotion rate setting table T1 at the time of winning), it is determined in advance that the jackpot is lost in the jackpot lottery The isolation rate of the probability (expected value) that the hold display mode is promoted when the main button 371 is operated with respect to the time when the hold effect (promotion rate setting table T2 when lost) is It is the largest and the holding effect at the position of holding 1 is the smallest. Therefore, for example, although the hold display mode is highly likely to be promoted in the hold effect at the position of hold 1, it is promoted with a relatively high probability not only when winning the jackpot but also when losing. Therefore, even if the hold display mode is promoted, the expected degree of jackpot does not increase so much. On the other hand, although it is unlikely that the hold display mode is promoted in the hold effect at the position of hold 3, it can be confirmed that the jackpot has been won with a very high probability when promoted, so the hold display mode is promoted. When it is done, the expectation of the jackpot will increase greatly.

  In this way, in the hold effect at the position of hold 3, it is necessary to take a large risk of lowering the expectation due to the fact that the hold display mode is not promoted, but when the hold display mode is promoted, the jackpot is won with a very high probability On the other hand, in the hold effect at the position of hold 1, instead of suppressing the risk of lowering the expectation due to the fact that the hold display mode is not promoted, even if the hold display mode is promoted, it is won a jackpot Expectation increases only to a certain extent. Accordingly, the player plays a game strategically while consulting with the production risk and the production return on at which display position or at all display positions the holding effect according to the operation of the main button 371 is performed. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in the gaming interests. In addition, since the strategy of such a game becomes wider as the number of holds increases, such as when the hold effect at the position of hold 3 is made executable only when there are three or more holds, the number of holds increases. It is possible to encourage the player to maintain the game at this point, thereby increasing the gaming efficiency of the whole hole.

  Further, in this modification, the probability that the hold display mode is promoted tends to increase as the shift from hold 3 to hold 1 both in the hit promotion rate setting table T1 and the loss promotion rate setting table T2. It is said that. However, as far as the holding effect mode C in the winning promotion rate setting table T1 is concerned, the holding display mode is more difficult to be promoted as the holding 3 shifts to the holding 1. Therefore, for example, as a result of challenge (confirmation) whether or not the hold display mode is promoted in all of the hold effects at the positions of the hold 1 to 3, when the hold display mode is promoted only by the hold 3 or the hold 3 Even when the hold display mode is promoted only by the hold 2, the jackpot expectation can be maintained high. Thereby, the value on the game effect that the hold display mode is promoted in the hold 3 and the hold 2, particularly the hold 3, is further increased. In addition, the player can enjoy the enjoyment of such an effect only after challenging whether or not the hold display mode is promoted in all of the hold effects at the positions of the hold 1 to 3.

  Further, in this modified example, in the holding effect at the position of holding 1, although there is a low probability that the effect pattern that can be promoted and changed over a plurality of stages to the fourth special holding display HR1X without depending on the holding display form before promotion. I try to have it. If the promotion is changed to the fourth special hold display HR1X over a plurality of stages in this way, the difference in the appearance ratio of the effect pattern between the winning promotion rate setting table T1 and the lost promotion rate setting table T2 Thus, it is possible to indicate that the jackpot is won with a relatively high probability even though it is a promotion effect in the hold effect at the position of the hold 1. Therefore, if the holding effect is performed only at the position of holding 1 (or holdings 1 and 2), it is recognized that a big win is won with a relatively high probability while suppressing the risk of lowering the expectation. In some cases, as a player, the strategy with respect to each holding effect at the positions of holdings 1 to 3 according to the operation of the main button 371 is further expanded. In particular, the hold effect that can be promoted and changed over a plurality of stages cannot be executed if the hold display mode is challenged in all of the hold effects at positions 1 to 3. That is, it is not an effect that the user only needs to operate the main button 371 during a period during which the operation of the main button 371 can be accepted. It is important to oppose each holding effect at the position of, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest.

  In addition, in this modification, the hold effect at the position of the hold 1 is not displayed in the hold effect at the position of the hold 3 or the promotion effect according to the operation of the main button 371 in the hold effect at the position of the hold 2. If an effect pattern that can be promoted and changed over a plurality of stages appears in the fourth special hold display HR1X, it is determined that the effect is the hold effect mode D in the loss promotion rate setting table T2. That is, in this case, an expectation degree (a specific hold display mode is selected from four types of the first special hold display HR1U, the second special hold display HR1V, the third special hold display HR1W, and the fourth special hold display HR1X). Despite the appearance of the 4th special hold display HR1X, which has the highest probability of winning a jackpot when it appears, only when it appears in such a way, it is an exception that greatly reduces the expectation It will be possible. Therefore, in the case where the promotion effect corresponding to the operation of the main button 371 does not appear in the holding effect at the position of the holding 3 or the holding effect at the position of the holding 2, It is also important to avoid such a large production risk without operating the main button 371, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment interest by making such a strategic sense.

  In this way, in the “button operation hold effect over multiple symbol variations”, even if the same hold display mode (expectation suggestion effect) appears, the degree of expectation changes greatly depending on the display position where it appears. Yes. In addition, when the promotion is not changed when the main button 371 is operated, the expectation level is basically lowered, but the expectation level is lowered so much depending on the production background and display position so far. There is also a production pattern that does not. Therefore, it is important for the player to memorize the production process such as the display position where the main button 371 is operated and the display position where the promotion is changed over a plurality of symbol variations. As a result, the conventional single-shot effect that allows you to understand the meaning of the production if you just look at the production status of the current fluctuation, even if you see the production effect that changes with a single symbol variation, or if you miss the production result of the past variation In contrast to this, an effect over a plurality of variations can be realized only after confirming all the production processes in a plurality of symbol variations, and the meaning of the effect can be understood.

In addition, in one effect over a plurality of variations according to the present invention, whether or not the main button 371 is operated for each display position as well as each effect result (whether promotion has been changed) in a plurality of symbol variations. Such information is also regarded as important as a production process. As a result, in starting the symbol variation associated with the digestion on hold, for example, even if the second special hold display HR1V appears,
After the second special hold display HR1V appears by the operation of the main button 371 at the position of the hold 3, the production pattern 1 in which the main button 371 is not operated at each position of the hold 1 and 2, and the hold 3 After the second special hold display HR1V appears by the operation of the main button 371 at the position of, the display of the second special hold display HR1V is maintained despite the operation of the main button 371 at the position of the hold 2 The production pattern 2 in which the main button 371 is not operated at the position of the hold 1, and the second special hold display HR1V appears by the operation of the main button 371 at the position of the hold 3, and then the main button at the position of the hold 2 Although the main button 371 is operated at the position of the hold 1 without operating the 371, the second special hold display HR1V After the second special hold display HR1V appears by the operation of the main button 371 at the position of the hold 3 and the display pattern 3 maintained, the main button 371 is operated at each of the hold 1 and 2 positions. Nevertheless, the production pattern 4 in which the display of the second special hold display HR1V is maintained.
・ After the main button 371 is operated at the position of the hold 3 but the display of the first special hold display HR1U is maintained, the result of the operation of the main button 371 at the position of the hold 2 is the first special The production pattern 5 in which the display of the second special hold display HR1V is maintained in spite of the operation of the main button 371 at the position of the hold 1 when the hold display HR1U is promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and・ After the main button 371 is operated at the position of the hold 3 but the display of the first special hold display HR1U is maintained, the result of the operation of the main button 371 at the position of the hold 2 is the first special The production pattern 6 in which the hold display HR1U is promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V and the main button 371 is not operated at the position of the hold 1, and the position of the hold 3 After the display of the first special hold display HR1U is maintained despite the operation of the main button 371, the first special hold display HR1U of the first special hold display HR1U is maintained even when the main button 371 is operated even at the position of the hold 2. As a result of operating the main button 371 at the position of the hold 1 while the display is maintained, the first special hold display HR1U is promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and the position of the hold 3 After the display of the first special hold display HR1U is maintained in spite of the operation of the main button 371, the main button 371 is not operated at the hold 2 position and the main button 371 is operated at the hold 1 position. As a result, the first special hold display HR1U is promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V. After operating the button 371, the main button 371 is operated at the hold 2 position. As a result, the first special hold display HR1U is promoted to the second special hold display HR1V. The production pattern 9 in which the display of the second special hold display HR1V is maintained even though the button 371 is operated, and the main button 371 is not operated at the position of the hold 3 and then at the position of the hold 2 As a result of operating the main button 371, the first special hold display HR1U is promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V, and the effect pattern 10 in which the main button 371 is not operated at the position of the hold 1 and hold 3 After the main button 371 is not operated at the position, the first special hold display HR is set at the hold 2 position despite the main button 371 being operated. The effect pattern 11 in which the first special hold display HR1U is promoted and changed to the second special hold display HR1V as a result of operating the main button 371 at the hold 1 position while the 1U display is maintained, and the hold 2 After the main button 371 is not operated at each of the positions 3, the first special hold display HR1U is promoted to the second special hold display HR1V as a result of operating the main button 371 at the hold 1 position. Changed production pattern 12
The degree of expectation varies greatly depending on which of the 12 production patterns has the production history. Therefore, as a player, it is possible to enjoy the production under a more strategic condition, such as whether to operate the main button 371 at which display position or whether to operate the main button 371 at all display positions. Will be able to.

  In addition, according to such “button operation hold effect over multiple symbol variations”, in the hold effect performed over multiple symbol variations, during the first symbol variation of the multiple symbol variations ( For example, when an advance effect result (whether promotion has been changed) according to the operation status of the main button 371 by the player is obtained in the hold 3), this advance effect result is the second of the plurality of symbol variations. To the symbol variation (next variation, for example, hold 2). That is, in the hold effect (preceding effect) at the next change (nth symbol change), the preceding effect result obtained by the hold effect (preceding effect) at the previous change ("n-1" symbol change). Is used as a reference (premise), and as a result of this adoption, it is executed as a takeover effect such as whether or not the expectation level further changes (where “n” is an integer).

  That is, in this case, in parallel with the original effect that the degree of expectation is reset each time the symbol variation is finished (the effect of the variation), the expectation degree is increased according to the operation situation by the player over a plurality of symbol variations. A preceding effect that can be stacked (or unloaded) is realized.

  In addition, in such a “button operation hold effect over multiple symbol variations”, coupled with a novel configuration with a relatively long operable time across multiple symbol variations, the player is shown at this stage. The main button 371 can be operated at a discretion while having a higher strategy on whether or not to perform the operation on the main button 371 in relation to the expected level and the production risk. Can be improved.

  In the “button operation hold effect over multiple symbol variations”, which is a modified example of the hold effect using the main button 371, the main button 371 is operated (pressed) only once at each display position of the hold 1 to 3. It is possible to make an effect result (whether promoted or not) based on the lottery probability registered in the tables T1 and T2 appear, or register in the tables T1 and T2. In such a production state that the player can be promoted only when winning with the selected lottery probability, the player can be promoted when the main button 371 is operated more than a predetermined number of times, or the main button 371 can be promoted. The hold effect may be realized by performing a lottery that is promoted with a predetermined probability each time an operation is performed.

  Further, in the “button operation hold effect over multiple symbol variations”, which is a modified example of the hold effect using the main button 371, even if the first special hold display HR1U appears at the display position of the hold 4, When the display position is 4, the button image BTN1 is not displayed repeatedly, and the hold effect cannot be executed. Then, when the first special hold display HR1U at the display position of the hold 4 shifts to the display position of the hold 3, the button image BTN1 is displayed in duplicate, and the hold effect can be executed. When the hold display at the display position of hold 1 shifts and is taken into the crystal image FCR by the hold digest, the hold display may be deleted, or further in the state taken into the crystal image FCR. You may be allowed to be promoted (or demoted).

  Further, in addition to the first special hold display HR1U, the second to fourth special hold displays HR1 may appear from the beginning. In this case, it is expected that a hold display with high expectation appears first. The expectation of jackpot may be higher than when the low-priced hold display appears first. However, when a hold display with a high degree of expectation appears first, when it is promoted with a hold effect in the hold 1 to 3, the expectation of jackpot is dramatically increased, but basically it is relatively difficult to be promoted. You may do it.

  In addition, such a special hold display is erased when entering the jackpot game when the jackpot display appears due to the symbol variation that is digested earlier, and has a normal display mode It will be displayed.

[Production using a distribution production device]
[1. Production during change]
Next, an effect using the distribution effect device 3125 performed by the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. First, an up and down effect that is an effect performed using the distribution effect device 3125 as one of the changing effects performed during the change of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the up / down effect. The up / down effect is an effect with a relatively high expectation level for jackpots, and for example, the expectation level for jackpots is set to about 40%. Whether or not to perform the up-and-down effect is determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a based on the peripheral control MPU 4140a (command indicating the variable pattern number) based on the information fluctuation pattern received from the main control MPU 4100a and the command indicating the special lottery result. Is determined by performing a predetermined production determination lottery.

  For example, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a command indicating a fluctuation pattern of a specific number (a fluctuation pattern of numbers 34 to 42, 168 to 171) in which the elevation effect is preliminarily incorporated, the specific control is performed based on the command. By performing an effect (an effect corresponding to any one of the variation patterns of numbers 34 to 42 and 168 to 171), the above-mentioned lifting effect is performed in the middle of the variation effect (see FIGS. 237 and 239). Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the lifting / lowering effect when winning the effect determination lottery in which the lifting / lowering effect is preliminarily incorporated, and when the command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the specific number is not received, the lifting / lowering effect is performed. Not performed. However, a predetermined effect lottery may be performed on the side of the peripheral control MPU 4140a based on information received from the main control MPU 4100a, and an elevating effect may be performed when winning in this effect lottery.

  The elevation effect is performed in the first display mode (FIG. 246) described above, that is, using only the main liquid crystal screen PNM without using the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. Instead, in the second display mode (FIG. 247), the sub liquid crystal screen PNS may be used in addition to the main liquid crystal screen PNM.

  Now, assuming that it is determined to perform an up / down effect (an effect corresponding to any of the change patterns of numbers 34 to 42, 168 to 171) based on a command indicating a change pattern of a specific number, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs Then, the variation effect of the symbol is started with the variation pattern of the specific number. Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the design variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 263 (A), the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are set to the main symbols. An image HRK representing a rock in the lower area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM after being reduced and displayed in a semi-transparent manner in the upper left area of the liquid crystal screen PNM (or after being changed and displayed in a reach manner) The image HRK) is displayed. At this time, the distribution effect device 3125 stands by at the lower stop position (see FIG. 204). As described above, the lower stop position is a position that is difficult to visually recognize from the player side, and is a position that does not prevent the player from visually recognizing the main liquid crystal screen PNM of the liquid crystal display device 1400. At the lower stop position, the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is kept substantially horizontal below the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the lifting mechanism 3126 to raise the sorting effect device 3125 as a movable effect device to the upper stop position (see FIG. 205) (FIG. 263 (B)). At this time, the distribution effect device 3125 moves up while keeping the guide member 3131 substantially horizontal. The peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the rock image displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM in conjunction with the ascent of the sorting effect device 3125 so as to express that the rock is lifted by the upper guide member 3131 of the sorting effect device 3125. Move HRK upward.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a may raise the distribution effect device 3125 and display a message M2 indicating that the effect of high jackpot expectation is high on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. In the example of FIG. 263 (B), a message TL4 “SUPER CHANCE” is displayed.

  At this time, since the distribution effect device 3125 is in front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the area (see FIG. 250) in which the hold display HR1, the crystal image FCR, and the decoration pattern 1157 are displayed becomes invisible. During the ascending / descending effect, the hold display HR1 and the crystal image FCR are erased from the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and the decorative design 1157 prevents the player from visually recognizing the distribution effect device 3125 as shown in FIG. 263 (B). In this embodiment, it is displayed at the center of the main liquid crystal screen PNM in the left-right direction and near the upper end in the up-down direction.

  In this up-and-down effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not operate the above-described game medium supply mechanism 3121 when the distribution effect device 3125 is raised. For this reason, the game ball is not supplied and is not placed on the guiding member 3131 of the ascending distribution effect device 3125. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, in the up-and-down effect when the symbol is varied, the expected degree of winning the jackpot in the varying effect of the symbol depending on whether the distribution effect device 3125 itself moves up and down Is controlled so as to be accompanied by the operation of the distribution effect device 3125 so that an effect effect that can be displayed in advance is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, when such an up-and-down effect is performed, when an effect image A that has successfully lifted a rock by the upper guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 appears on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, After a relatively high jackpot expectation such as Super Reach was subsequently performed, it was stopped with a combination of decorative symbols (left symbol row 1153a, middle symbol row 1153b, right symbol row 1153c) representing the jackpot on the main liquid crystal screen PNM It is displayed to indicate that the player has won either of the jackpots A or B, or is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols representing a loss, indicating that the player is a loss.
Alternatively, when the effect image B that succeeds in crushing the rock appears, although the rock is not successfully lifted by the guide member 3131 on the upper side of the distribution effect device 3125 on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, A symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols (left symbol row 1153a, middle symbol row 1153b, right symbol row 1153c) indicating that one of them has been won.
Or, when the effect image C that fails to lift the rock by the upper guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 appears on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, either the big hit D or the small win is won The symbols are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols (left symbol row 1153a, middle symbol row 1153b, right symbol row 1153c) indicated as.

  Depending on which of these three effect images A to C appears, the operation mode (particularly, the operation mode of the final part) of the distribution effect device 3125 may be partially different. For example, when the effect image A appears, the guide member 3131 on the upper side of the distribution effect device 3125 is raised to a higher position than when the effect image C appears, or when the effect image B appears, the distribution effect device 3125 It is possible to rotate the upper guide member 3131 left and right. Then, after any of the effect images A to C appears, the peripheral control MPU 4140a lowers the distribution effect device 3125 from the upper stop position to the lower stop position, and ends the ascending / descending effect.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after performing the above-described lifting effect, an effect with a relatively high expectation level such as super reach is displayed, and then a combination of decorative symbols representing the jackpot is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. The player is notified of the jackpot, or a combination of decorative symbols representing the loss is displayed to notify the player of the loss.

  In the up-and-down effect described above, the rear side with respect to the rolling surface of the shelf upper stage 2372 so as to appear to be a part of the rolling surface of the shelf upper stage 2372 (see FIG. 174) functioning as a so-called stage. The lower decoration part 3137 and the upper decoration part 3133 of the distribution effect device 3125 that the rolling surface of the guide member 3131 arranged in parallel to the main liquid crystal screen PNM rises to the front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM and are difficult for the player to see. Since the player can visually recognize the front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the guidance member 3131 (distribution effect device 3125) can realize an effect that can surprise the player by its own lifting operation.

  In addition, the rock image HRK displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM is displayed so as to move up in conjunction with the ascent of the sorting effect device 3125, so there is a powerful effect that makes the player feel a big expectation of big hit Can be realized. As a result, it is possible to display a bonus effect in which the high degree of expectation (about 40% in this case) for winning the jackpot in the symbol variation effect is displayed depending on whether the distribution effect device 3125 itself moves up and down. Will appear.

  Here, although not performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sorting effect device 3125 is lowered to the lower stop position to end the lifting effect, the lifting effect finishing process described below is executed. Also good. FIG. 264 is a flowchart illustrating the processing steps of the up / down effect end processing. When ending the lifting effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the lifting mechanism 3126 to lower the sorting effect device 3125 to the lower stop position (see FIG. 204) (step S601).

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the descending of the distribution effect device 3125 has been completed normally (without any trouble) to the lower stop position (step S602). Specifically, it receives a detection signal from the photosensor 2382 that detects whether or not the position of the distribution effect device 3125 provided in the lower accessory unit 3003 is the original position, that is, the lower stop position. Thus, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can recognize whether or not the distribution effect device 3125 is at the lower stop position. If the peripheral control MPU 4140a detects that the distribution effect device 3125 is at the lower stop position within a predetermined time after starting the control of lowering the distribution effect device 3125 by the lifting mechanism 3126, the distribution effect is displayed. It is determined that the device 3125 has been normally lowered to the lower stop position. On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a cannot detect that the sorting effect device 3125 is in the lower stop position within a predetermined time after the control of lowering the sorting effect device 3125 by the lifting mechanism 3126 is started, It is determined that the minute effect device 3125 has not lowered to the lower stop position due to a malfunction or the like.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the descending of the distribution effect device 3125 has been normally completed (step S602: YES), the peripheral effect MPU 4140a ends the elevating effect end process. On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the descending of the sorting effect device 3125 is not normally completed (step S602: NO), the peripheral control MPU 4140a exposes the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 to expose the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. Is made visible to the player. Specifically, the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 of the first accessory unit 2370 are moved downward, and the movable unit 2401 of the second accessory unit 2400 is rotated obliquely backward. Then, the state is switched from the state where the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is hidden so as not to be visible to the player (see FIG. 246) to the state where the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is exposed so as to be visible to the player (see FIG. 247). As can be seen from the above description, the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 of the first accessory unit 2370 and the movable unit 2401 of the second accessory unit 2400 conceal the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 from the player. It can be called a concealment exposure switching member that can be controlled to move to a concealment position to be performed and an exposure position at which the player can visually recognize the separate display means.

  When the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is exposed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the hold display HR1 together with the crystal image FCR on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 that is visible to the player (step S605). The effect termination process is terminated. At this time, the decorative design 1157 may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS together with the hold display HR1. Note that the display of the hold display HR1 and the like on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS performed in this step is continued until the problem or the like is resolved and it is detected that the distribution effect device 3125 is at the lower stop position.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the distribution effect device 3125 has not been normally lowered to the lower stop position due to a malfunction of the elevating mechanism 3126 of the lower accessory unit 3003 when the elevating effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 265, a scene after the fluctuation in which the elevation effect is performed is performed. As shown in FIG. 265, when the distribution effect device 3125 does not normally descend to the lower stop position, a part of the effect image that is supposed to be visually recognized by the player by the distribution effect device 3125. There is a possibility that the distribution effect device 3125 may be blocked from being visually recognized. In the example of FIG. 265, the lower region of the main liquid crystal screen PNM that should be visually recognized by the player in a normal state is in a state in which the player cannot visually recognize the obstacle due to the distribution effect device 3125. In the lower area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, as shown in FIG. 250, in the normal mode, a crystal image FCR, a hold display HR1, and a decoration pattern 1157 are displayed. These effect images are examples shown in FIG. Then, it is not visible to the player.

  However, according to the lifting / lowering effect end process described above, the crystal image FCR, the hold display HR1, and the decoration pattern 1157 that are originally displayed in the lower area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM are displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen as shown in FIG. Since it is displayed on the PNS, the player can continue the game without any trouble. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the effect image without losing the fun of the game by not being in the standby position when the movable effect device should be in the standby position due to a malfunction or the like. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which a pre-reading effect or the like using a hold display is performed, if the player cannot visually recognize the hold display, the pre-play effect of the gaming machine cannot be enjoyed. By performing the display, the player can sufficiently enjoy the reserved pre-reading effect even when the movable effect device is not in the standby position when it should be in the standby position due to a malfunction or the like.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS that has been concealed is exposed by operating the left movable portion unit 2378, the right movable portion unit 2379, and the movable portion unit 2401, and then the crystal image FCR and the hold display are displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. Since the display of HR1 and the decorative pattern 1157 is performed, there is an advantage that it is difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of a problem. When movable objects such as the left movable unit 2378, the right movable unit 2379, and the movable unit 2401 are operated and the concealed objects are exposed, the player is told that something is being produced. This is because it is easy to feel and it is difficult to recognize that a defect has occurred.

[2. Production during the jackpot game]
Next, an effect using the distribution effect device 3125 performed during the jackpot game that is performed after the first special lottery result is the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be described. When the big hit A or big hit B is won, at the end of the change, the decorative design's double stitches are displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. When the jackpot A is won, there are a case where the decorative symbol displayed with a doublet is a decorative symbol to which an odd number is added and a case that it is a decorative symbol to which an even number is added. On the other hand, when the big hit B is won, the decorative symbol displayed with a doublet is always a decorative symbol with an even number. Therefore, when the player is informed of the jackpot by the ornamental design with the even number attached, at that time, the player recognizes whether the jackpot A has been won or the jackpot B has been won. hard.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the jackpot game in the case of jackpot A, the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is repeated 11 times in a long-time opening / closing pattern. On the other hand, in the jackpot game in the case of jackpot B, opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is repeated 5 times in the long-time opening / closing pattern and then repeated 6 times in the short-time opening / closing pattern. Therefore, until the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 is repeatedly opened and closed five times in a long-time opening / closing pattern, the player sees the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 and the winning jackpot is the jackpot A It is difficult to identify whether it is a big hit B.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the player is notified of the jackpot by the decorative design with the even number attached, the jackpot A is reached until the fifth long-time opening / closing pattern ends. An effect of notifying the player whether the game is a jackpot B (a jackpot type notification effect) is performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a wins the jackpot A in the stage execution means including the main liquid crystal screen PNM and the sub liquid crystal screen PNS until the player is notified of the jackpot A or the jackpot B by the jackpot type notification effect. It is directed to conceal whether the jackpot B has been won. For example, until the player is informed of the jackpot A or jackpot B through the jackpot type notification effect, it is completely so that the player can hardly recognize whether the jackpot A is won or the jackpot B is won. Perform the same production. Since there are more balls out than the jackpot B, it is a jackpot that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot B. Therefore, the player watches the jackpot type notification effect while hoping that the jackpot A is notified.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot type notification effects are prepared. One of the multiple types of jackpot type notification effects is an effect performed using the distribution effect device 3125. Other jackpot notification effects are performed by displaying the main liquid crystal screen PNM without using the distribution effect device 3125.

  FIG. 284 is a time chart showing an aspect of effect control when a jackpot type notification effect using the distribution effect device 3125 is performed when either of the jackpots A or B is won.

  That is, now, if a decorative symbol with an even number on the main liquid crystal screen PNM is displayed with a double eye (a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), as shown in FIG. 284, for example, the jackpot game In the meantime, an image display congratulating you that you won the jackpot will appear.

  First, when the first round of jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 284, during this round (while the first long-time opening and closing pattern is performed), the type of jackpot type notification effect is set. A selection screen to be selected by the player is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. FIG. 266 is a diagram illustrating an example of the selection screen. In the example of FIG. 266 (A), two types of images SEL1 representing a jackpot type notification effect named “RED” and images SEL2 representing a jackpot type notification effect named “GREEN” are displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. ing. The player can select any jackpot type notification effect by moving the cursor KSL by operating the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370 as the operation receiving means.

  The jackpot type notification effect named “GREEN” is a jackpot type notification effect performed using the distribution effect device 3125. This effect is an effect performed using the game balls stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121 as the game ball storage mechanism together with the distribution effect device 3125. The game medium supply mechanism 3121 stores the game balls received at the second start port 2002 as described above. Therefore, if the game balls have not won the second start port 2002 after the power is turned on, No game balls are stored in the medium supply mechanism 3121. When game balls are not stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, the big hit type notification effect performed using the distribution effect device 3125 cannot be performed. Therefore, when no game balls are stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, the selection screen shown in FIG. 266 (B) is changed to the selection screen shown in FIG. Instead, it is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. The selection screen shown in FIG. 266 (B) suggests that there is a jackpot type notification effect named “GREEN”, but the player may select a jackpot type notification effect named “GREEN”. Not allowed.

  Note that the jackpot type notification effect named “RED” is a jackpot type notification effect that does not use the distribution effect device 3125. For example, when the game ball wins the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000, the jackpot type notification effect An effect of notifying whether the jackpot corresponding to the current jackpot game is jackpot A or jackpot B after displaying whether the lottery is A or jackpot B is being drawn (For example, whether or not a definite sound is produced). As mentioned above, since it is already determined whether the jackpot A or jackpot B has been determined in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation before the start of the jackpot game, the jackpot type notification In the production, the lottery is not actually performed, but is shown to the player as if the lottery is currently being performed.

  However, the period during which the operation on the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370 can be accepted is within a predetermined period when the second round jackpot game is being performed, and the player The main button 371 is operated and the cursor KSL is moved while the long-time open / close pattern is being performed, and one of the jackpot type notification effects is selected. When there is no operation on the main button 371 within a predetermined period when the second round of jackpot game is being performed, either of the jackpot type notification effects of “GREEN” and “RED” is displayed. Automatically selected.

  As a result, when the jackpot type notification effect named “RED” is selected on the selection screen shown in FIG. 266 (A), the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the fifth long-time opening / closing pattern from the selected time point. The jackpot corresponding to the current jackpot game is the jackpot A each time a game ball wins the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 while the jackpot game of the second to fifth rounds is being played. Or the effect which alert | reports whether it is jackpot B will be performed. In addition, about this production | presentation, when the production result which confirms which of the big hits A and B was won while the big hit game of the 2nd-5th round was performed, it is made to end at the time. May be.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type notification effect named “GREEN” is selected on the selection screen shown in FIG. 266 (A), the peripheral control MPU 4140a is performing the second and fifth long-time opening / closing patterns ( The jackpot type notification effect using the sorting effect device 3125 is performed during the second to fifth rounds of the jackpot game. The jackpot type notification effect using the distribution effect device 3125 is performed on the condition that the player has selected the jackpot type notification effect named “GREEN”.

  FIGS. 267 to 270 are diagrams illustrating a jackpot type notification effect using the distribution effect device 3125.

  Assume that a jackpot type notification effect named “GREEN” is selected in the selection screen shown in FIG. 266A within a predetermined period when the jackpot game of the second round is being played. Then, with this selection, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses display control for displaying a new display image on the main liquid crystal screen PNM at the selected timing t1, as shown in FIG. By performing control related to the operation of the supply mechanism 3121 (ball supply control), the big hit type notification effect using the distribution effect device 3125 is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first displays the background image HKC that excites the effect on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and also displays the jackpot type notification effect named “GREEN” selected by the player. An explanation image SMC is displayed. In addition, by performing control (ball supply control) related to driving of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 (see FIG. 195), the game balls K stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121 are guided to the guide passage portion 3178 ( FIG. 213) is supplied onto the guide member 3131 (rolling surface 3131a) through the game ball guide passage 3155 (FIG. 200). As a result, the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 receives the game ball K from the game medium supply mechanism 3121.

  Although the guide member 3131 is kept substantially horizontal, the rolling surface 3131a (FIG. 199) of the guide member 3131 is formed in a gentle arc shape that is the lowest in the vicinity of the central portion in the horizontal direction and high at both ends. Yes. For this reason, the game ball K received from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is located near the center in the horizontal direction of the guide member 3131. At this time, the distribution effect device 3125 stands by at the lower stop position (see FIG. 204). As described above, the lower stop position is a position that is difficult to visually recognize from the player side, and is a position that does not prevent the player from visually recognizing the main liquid crystal screen PNM of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 268 and 284, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a performs control (upward displacement control) related to driving of the lifting mechanism 3126, so that the distribution effect device 3125 is played on the guide member 3131. With the ball K placed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is raised from the lower stop position (see FIG. 204) to the upper stop position (see FIG. 205) overlapping the main liquid crystal screen PNM when viewed from the front side. As a result, the distribution effect device 3125 itself approaches the central portion of the main liquid crystal screen PNM watched by the player together with the game balls on the guide member 3131 (rolling surface 3131a) of the distribution effect device 3125. Is displaced upward and stopped at the upper stop position (see FIG. 205).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs display control so that an image display that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot type is jackpot A appears on the right side and the left side of the central portion in the height direction on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. To do. In the example shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, a message HMS1 “CHANCE” is displayed on the left side as viewed from the player, and a message HMS2 “SUPER CHANCE” is displayed on the right side. The right side is a display that suggests that the degree of expectation that is a big hit A is large, but the left side is a display that suggests that the degree of expectation that is a big hit A is large, or the right side and the left side are about the same In some cases, the display may indicate that the expected degree of.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a drives the motor 3171 (FIG. 201) of the swing mechanism 3170 to rotate the distribution unit 3130 provided with the guide member 3131 at the top. By doing so, a tilting operation is performed to tilt the guide member 3131 to the right and / or left from the substantially horizontal state (ball rolling effect control). When the guide member 3131 is tilted to the right (inclination such that the right end is low and the left end is high when viewed from the player), the game ball K on the guide member 3131 rolls to the right when viewed from the player. Move (see FIG. 269). On the other hand, when the guide member 3131 is tilted to the left (inclination such that the left end is low and the right end is high when viewed from the player), the game ball K on the guide member 3131 is left when viewed from the player. (See FIG. 270).

  However, there are a plurality of types of these tilting operations. In the first tilting operation, first, the game ball K on the guide member 3131 is moved by alternately performing right tilt and left tilt multiple times with a small tilt that does not cause the game ball K to fall from both ends of the guide member 3131. This is an operation of rolling the game ball K from the right end of the guide member 3131 by rolling the guide member 3131 so as to reciprocate and then tilting the guide member 3131 to the right.

  In the second tilting operation, first, the game ball K on the guiding member 3131 is moved by alternately performing a right tilt and a left tilt multiple times with a small tilt that does not cause the game ball K to fall from both ends of the guiding member 3131. This is an operation of rolling the game ball K from the left end of the guide member 3131 by rolling it back and forth on the guide member 3131 and then tilting the guide member 3131 largely to the left.

  Although the tilting operation may further include other patterns, in the present embodiment, a final falling pattern in which the game ball K on the guiding member 3131 is finally dropped from the right end of the guiding member 3131, and finally, The game ball K on the guide member 3131 is one of the left fall patterns in which the game ball K falls from the left end of the guide member 3131.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 284, the game ball K is guided by the first tilting operation or the second tilting operation from the timing t1 when the player's operation on the main button 371 is accepted. The time from 3131 to the timing t2 when falling is a fixed time, and within this time the movable accessory (game medium supply mechanism 3121, distribution effect device 3125) based on a predetermined active control schedule. Control (ball supply control, upward displacement control, ball rolling effect control, downward displacement control) and display control for the main liquid crystal screen PNM of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (cooperative effect with an accessory) are performed. . Such control is started in accordance with the timing (timing t1) when the operation by the player is accepted.

  Then, after the tilting operation is performed and the game ball K is dropped from the guide member 3131 (timing t2), the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control (see FIG. 284) for driving the lifting mechanism 3126 ( By performing the downward displacement control), the distribution effect device 3125 is difficult to see from the player side from the upper stop position overlapping the main liquid crystal screen PNM when the liquid crystal display device 1400 is viewed from the front side. Lower to the lower stop position.

  Next, at a timing t3 when a certain time has elapsed from the timing t2, the player is definitely notified whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot A or a jackpot B. The definite notification that the jackpot is A is performed, for example, by outputting an impressive definite sound from the speaker 121 and displaying a message notifying that the jackpot is A on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. The definite notification that the jackpot is B is performed, for example, by displaying a message notifying that the jackpot is B on the main liquid crystal screen PNM.

  Then, such a definite notification effect on the main liquid crystal screen PNM is continued until the fifth round jackpot game ends. And in the jackpot game after the sixth round, the jackpot effect images prepared in advance according to the winning type of the jackpot are displayed until the end of the jackpot game.

  Here, when the right falling pattern is performed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM in a state that the right side is expected to have a higher expectation level that is a big hit A, the right side has a higher expected degree that is a big hit A. The peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the pattern of the tilting operation so that the expectation level of being a big hit A is larger than when the left fall pattern is performed in a state that suggests that it is large. Similarly, when the left falling pattern is performed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM in a state in which the left side is expected to have a higher expectation level that is a big hit A, the left side has a higher expected degree that is a big hit A. The peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the pattern of the tilting operation so that the expectation level of being a big hit A is greater than when the right fall pattern is performed in a state that suggests that it is large. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects either the left fall pattern or the right fall pattern so as to suggest an expectation level that is a jackpot A.

  Note that the game ball K that has fallen from the guide member 3131 is sent to the first inlet 3153a or the second inlet 3154a of the swing drive unit 3145 (FIG. 200) that constitutes a part of the sorting effect device 3125, The game ball rolling production is complete. That is, the above-described game ball rolling effect is completed in front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, so that it is easy for the player to see the game ball rolling. However, the state in which the game ball K falls is made difficult to see from the player side by the decorative portion 3146 raised together.

  As described above, since the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol corresponding to the fluctuation before the start of the jackpot game has already been determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B, the distribution effect device In the jackpot type notification effect using 3125, the lottery is not actually performed in the direction in which the game ball K has fallen, and it is already determined whether it is a jackpot A or a jackpot B. This is to show the player as if a lottery is currently being held.

  Note that for the timings t2 and t3, during the second round of jackpot game, the jackpot type notification named “GREEN” at any timing within the period during which the operation of the operation button unit 370 with respect to the main button 371 can be accepted. Even if the effect is selected, the game ball K is dropped from the guiding member 3131 (timing t2) and the current jackpot game is a jackpot A before the fifth round jackpot game ends. It is set so that the player is surely notified whether there is a jackpot B or not (timing t3).

  Incidentally, FIG. 284 shows an example of performance in the case where 2-5 rounds of jackpot game are consumed at the fastest speed. Accordingly, when a big hit game is being executed and it is difficult for the big hit game to be digested without a game ball entering the big prize opening 2003, for example, the third round of the big win game is performed. It is also conceivable that the timings t2 and t3 arrive at the same time. That is, in this case, on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, a definite notification effect is started from the time when the third round jackpot game is performed, and the same effect is continued until the end of the fifth round jackpot game. Will be done. The production is realized as, for example, a video production having a predetermined time, but if this video production is finished before the big hit game of the fifth round is finished, for example, By continuing to display a still image (for example, the final image in a moving image effect), it is possible to continue the effect until the end of the fifth round jackpot game.

  According to the effect using the distribution effect device 3125 performed during the jackpot game described above, the distribution effect device 3125 receives the game ball from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 as the game ball storage mechanism, and receives the main liquid crystal screen PNM. Move together with the game ball received from the game medium supply mechanism 3121. As a result, compared to the case where the distribution effect device 3125 has moved alone in front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the movement of the distribution effect device is expected with novelty and surprise. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation, dispel the player's boredom, and suppress the monotony of the game.

  In addition, a game ball rolling effect is performed in which the game ball K rolls forward in front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM on the display means in a plurality of types of patterns. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effect pattern using the distribution effect device 3125. In particular, the rolling of the game ball in the game ball rolling effect has a thin impression that it is a predetermined effect, and it can make the player feel that it contains uncertain elements. The willingness to watch over the end of the production can be increased, and the game can be enthusiastic. In addition, by performing a game ball rolling effect that rolls the game ball K in front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the arrangement of the main liquid crystal screen PNM is limited in order to secure a space for performing the game ball rolling effect. This can be suppressed. As a result, various and attractive effects can be realized for the player, and the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed and the decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

  In addition, such an effect using the distribution effect device 3125 performed during the jackpot game is that game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 flow down one after another so that the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000 wins a game ball. It is aimed at the gaming situation you are doing.

  In other words, in a game situation where a highly anticipated performance is being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player is required to win a new game ball at the start ports 2001 and 2002 by winning the jackpot with the change. In consideration of the possibility that it is not necessary to launch a game ball, or to simply concentrate on the same production, the game ball 605 may be interrupted. On the other hand, in a game situation in which a big hit game is being performed, it is necessary to win a game ball in the opening / closing member 2006 of the attacker unit 2000, so that the game ball is continuously driven into the game area 605. Therefore, according to the effect using the distribution effect device 3125 performed during the jackpot game, the situation of the display image appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the game area provided so as to surround the liquid crystal display device 1400 Among the game balls that can be visually recognized by the player in a state in which the game is progressing while the situation of the game ball flowing down at 605 is confirmed by the player, the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131 is visible. Only the game ball K on the upper side is displaced in the upward direction opposite to the original flow direction as the game ball. That is, in this case, the distribution effect device 3125 itself approaches the central portion of the main liquid crystal screen PNM of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is watched by the player together with the game balls K on the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125. In this way, the stage is displaced upward, and in this manner, the stage can be displaced closer to the central portion of the main liquid crystal screen PNM. Thus, the expectation can be shown by the rolling mode of the game ball K on the guide member 3131. Since it is performed, it is possible to suitably avoid the monotonous effects of the main liquid crystal screen PNM as well as the movement of the game ball, thereby suppressing a decrease in the game entertainment interest. Will be able to.

  In addition, when no game balls are stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, the player is not allowed to select an effect using the distribution effect device 3125 including the game ball rolling effect. In spite of trying to execute the dynamic effect, there is no game ball to be used, and the problem that only the distribution effect device 3125 operates can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the selection screen of the jackpot type notification effect, if no game balls are stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, the selection image suggests the presence of an effect pattern including a game ball rolling effect. Since the player is not allowed to select the effect pattern, there is no game ball to be used and only the distribution effect device 3125 operates even though the game ball rolling effect is attempted. In addition to being able to suppress, the existence of the effect pattern is suggested to the player, so that it is possible to cause the player to want to see the effect pattern and to suppress the decrease in the game motivation.

  Furthermore, since the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131 is formed in a gentle arc shape that is the lowest in the vicinity of the central portion in the horizontal direction and the both end portions are high, It is possible to prevent the gaming ball K from falling from both ends of the guide member 3131 against the intention when performing an inclination operation.

  In addition, in this embodiment, not only the distribution unit 3130 (see FIG. 198) that swings the game ball K in the left-right direction, but also the game ball K that has fallen from the distribution effect device 3125 is collected and routed therethrough. The swing drive unit 3145 (see FIG. 198) having the collection ports 3153a and 3154a (see FIGS. 206 and 207) for guiding to the forming unit 3122 is also lifted and lowered by the lifting mechanism 3126 (see FIG. 197). Yes. In addition, with respect to the swing drive unit 3145, when the distribution effect device 3125 performs the tilting operation with a small inclination, the gap between the collection ports 3153a and 3154a is narrowed by the guiding member 3131 having the small inclination. This is provided in a form that can be opened (a form in which the game ball K cannot be widened to the front). That is, the collection port 3153a of the swing drive unit 3145 communicates with the rolling surface 3131a of the guide member 3131 with a front port through which the game ball K can pass only when the sorting effect device 3125 is greatly tilted to the left. Similarly, the collection port 3154a also has a front opening that allows the game ball K to pass only when the distribution effect device 3125 is greatly tilted to the right. It is formed so as to communicate with the surface 3131a (see FIG. 207). Accordingly, it is possible to more reliably avoid the gaming ball K falling from both ends of the guide member 3131 contrary to the intention when performing a tilting operation with a small tilt.

  Further, even when the game ball K falls to the side opposite to the intention of the guide member 3131, after that, the player determines whether the current jackpot game is the jackpot A or the jackpot B Therefore, it is avoided that information apologizing to the player is provided without being corrected.

  In addition, the game ball rolling effect is executed in front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM in conjunction with the display of the expected level displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. By preparing a plurality of types, it is possible to further diversify the production pattern, so that the monotony of the game can be eliminated and the decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

  In the case where the game ball rolling effect is repeatedly performed using the enclosed game ball, if the surface of the game ball becomes dirty or the surface of the game ball rusts with use, the appearance of the game ball will look good. May deteriorate, and the production effect may be impaired. In particular, the game ball rolling effect performed by the distribution effect device 3125 draws attention to the behavior of the game ball, so that the dirt and rust become conspicuous, which causes a decrease in visual interest. However, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 214, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the game balls stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121 are discharged, and a new start port is newly created. Since the game balls accepted in 2002 can be stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, the game balls used for the game ball rolling effect can be constantly replaced to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the game balls. Deterioration of the appearance of the dynamic performance can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game is in an external advantageous game state, a game ball is won at a high frequency at the second starting port 2002 (short-time function), and it is easy to win a jackpot. In view of the fact that the jackpot game where the game ball rolling effect can be executed by the (probability change function) can be frequently performed, the game ball won at the second start opening 2002 is newly stored and the game ball A rolling effect is performed.

  That is, in the accessory device including the above-described game medium supply mechanism 3121 and the passage formation unit 3122 that forms a return path for the game medium supply mechanism 3121, the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily turned off and turned on. Unless the time process is started, the same game ball is repeatedly used in the game ball rolling effect. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a new symbol is created every time symbol variation is performed, for example (twice), even in the external advantageous gaming state (period in which symbol variation for five times is performed). At the start of the fluctuation, the distribution unit 3130 of the distribution effect device 3125 is rotated counterclockwise so that the rolling surface 3131a is in communication with the first inflow port 3153a (see FIG. 214). In this state, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is controlled for a short time such that only one game ball is supplied onto the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, thereby digesting the symbol variation for five times. Thus, during the game period until the external advantageous game state is ended, all of the seven game balls initially stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121 are discharged. In this external advantageous game state, game balls are won at the second start port 2002 with a high frequency, and therefore, new game balls are immediately stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121. There is no trouble in the execution of the game ball rolling effect. By the way, in this embodiment, whenever the symbol variation is performed only 10 times, for example, at the start of a new symbol variation, the remaining number of times that the symbol can be varied in the external advantageous gaming state is shown to the player by the effect. Therefore, it is devised so that the discharge control of the game balls stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is not conspicuous due to such effects.

  In addition, the distribution effect device 3125 waits at a position that does not prevent the player from visually recognizing the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and in the changing effect, when the effect execution conditions are satisfied, the front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM is displayed. In the effect during the jackpot game, in addition to the ascending operation that moves forward of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the tilting operation different from the ascending operation is performed after the ascending operation. Execute in front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM. That is, since the distribution effect device 3125 performs operations unique to the jackpot game during the jackpot game, it is possible to increase the joy of winning the bonus by drawing the jackpot to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game and suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Furthermore, the movable effect device is linked to the movement display of the rock image HRK on the main liquid crystal screen PNM by moving the guidance effect device 3125 upward while keeping the guide member 3131 substantially horizontal in the changing effect. Then, the distribution effect device 3125 expresses that the rock image HRK is lifted. On the other hand, in the effect during the jackpot game, the distribution effect device 3125 moves upward while keeping the guide member 3131 substantially horizontal, and then moves to the front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and then the main liquid crystal screen PNM. By performing a tilting operation in which the guiding member 3131 is tilted to the right or left in front, it can be suggested whether the type of jackpot game is a jackpot A that is a high-value privilege or a jackpot B that is low in value. As a result, it is possible to achieve a completely different effect while using the same distribution effect device 3125 for the effect during the change and the effect during the jackpot game. While the performance during the fluctuation is performed for the purpose of suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot, the performance during the jackpot game is performed for the purpose of suggesting the type of winning. If the distribution effect device 3125 performs this with the same movement, it leads to monotonization of the effect, and the joy of the player who has won the jackpot game is halved, but in the gaming machine of this embodiment, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation of the player by eliminating such a factor that decreases the game motivation.

  In the present embodiment, the same movable accessory (game medium supply mechanism 3121, distribution effect) is used when the symbol variation effect (during variation effect) is being performed and when the jackpot process is being performed. In spite of the effects that are performed with the operation of the device 3125), the effects are different from each other. More specifically, the effect target when the symbol variation effect is performed is “distribution effect device 3125”, whereas the effect target when the jackpot process is being executed is “game ball K”. It is said that. That is, in this case, even if the operation of the distribution effect device 3125 itself is monotonous, the player's attention object is between the “distribution effect device 3125” and the “game ball K” depending on the game situation. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the “production accompanied by the operation of the distribution production device 3125” from being monotonous by such a variety of production methods. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball rolling effect during the jackpot game is used as an effect suggesting whether the jackpot A with a lot of balls or the jackpot B with a small number of balls. In pachinko machines where there is a normal jackpot where the function does not operate and a probability variation jackpot where the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game, during the jackpot game, it indicates whether the jackpot is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot It may be used as a production.

[Special mode]
If the predetermined condition is satisfied from the above-described normal mode, the mode may shift to the special mode. For example, in the normal mode, when one of the “small hit” and “big hit D” is won, the special mode may be entered after the end of the small hit game or the big hit game. In addition, after winning either “small hit” or “big hit D”, within a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, within four fluctuations, etc., within the number of times the probability variation operation continues when the probability variation operation is activated (in this embodiment, It is preferable that the number of times is within 5 times).)) The normal mode is shifted to the special mode. Hereinafter, the special mode will be described.

  FIG. 271 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the main liquid crystal screen PNM and the sub liquid crystal screen PNS in the special mode. When shifting from the normal mode to the special mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 of the first accessory unit 2370 downward and the movable unit of the second accessory unit 2400. By rotating 2401 diagonally backward, the display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode (see FIG. 247). That is, the player can visually recognize the sub liquid crystal screen PNS in addition to the main liquid crystal screen PNM.

  When the special mode is entered, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the drive unit 3090 to close the shutter-type accessory 3002 in front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM (FIG. 271). That is, the front of the main liquid crystal screen PNM is covered by the left inner shutter 3010, the left outer shutter 3050, the right inner shutter 3030, and the right outer shutter 3070. At this time, a special effect image is displayed over the entire display area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM (in FIG. 271, illustration is omitted to avoid complication of the drawing). Here, “a special effect is displayed over the entire main liquid crystal screen PNM” is an extremely small image like the decorative pattern 1157, and it is considered that the display substantially hinders the special effect. Even if the desired image is included in the main liquid crystal screen PNM, it is substantially included in the concept that “a special effect is displayed over the entire main liquid crystal screen PNM”. Actually, although not shown in the present embodiment as well, in the special mode, the decorative symbol and the hold display are not displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, but the decorative symbol 1157 is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. Therefore, strictly speaking, the special effect image is displayed over the entire display area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM excluding the display area of the decoration pattern 1157. Each shutter 3050, 3010, 3030, 3070 is composed of a transparent plate as described above, except for the electric decorations 3012, 3013, 3052, 3072. Even when the shutter type accessory 3002 is closed, Through this, the player can visually recognize the special effect image. The special effect image does not include the decorative design, the crystal image FCR, and the hold display HR1 that are displayed in the normal mode. That is, the special effect image is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM without displaying the decorative design, the crystal image FCR, and the hold display HR1. The reason why the decorative design, the crystal image FCR, and the hold display HR1 are deleted from the main liquid crystal screen PNM is to prevent the player from visually recognizing the special effect image on the main liquid crystal screen PNM.

  In the special mode, when a player launches a game ball and plays a game, and the game ball enters one of the start ports 2001 and 2002, the special symbol display units 641 and 642 display a change display and a stop display of the special symbol. In spite of being performed, on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the effect by the special effect image is continuously performed without the display of the decorative symbols being changed and stopped. Instead, the decorative symbol change display and stop display are performed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS in response to the special symbol change display and stop display in the special symbol displays 641 and 642. That is, in the same manner as the decorative symbol change display and stop display displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM in the normal mode, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS has three symbol rows, namely, the left symbol row 1153a and the middle symbol row 1153b. The right symbol row 1153c is displayed, and in each of the symbol rows 1153a to 1153c, a plurality of decorative symbols 0 to 9 are sequentially arranged and displayed in a variable manner or stopped (FIG. 271). As a result, in the special mode, the player's attention is mainly gathered in the special effect in which the special effect image on the main liquid crystal screen PNM is linked with the opening / closing operation of the shutter-type accessory 3002 and the light emission of the electric ornament. On the other hand, the player can confirm that the special symbol lottery is being performed by visually recognizing the change display and stop display of the decorative symbols on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS.

  Furthermore, in the special mode, the crystal image FCR and the hold display HR1 displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM in the normal mode are also displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS (FIG. 271). The decorative design, crystal image FCR and hold display HR1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS are smaller than the decorative design, crystal image FCR and hold display HR1 displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM in the normal mode, but the design is substantially the same. It is. In other words, the decorative design, crystal image FCR, and hold display HR1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS are substantially similar to the decorative design, crystal image FCR, and hold display HR1 displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM in the normal mode. It has become. As a result, in the special mode, the player's attention is mainly gathered in the special effect in which the special effect image on the main liquid crystal screen PNM is linked with the opening / closing operation of the shutter-type accessory 3002 and the light emission of the illumination body. Can confirm the number of reservations and the digestion status of the reservations on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS.

  For example, in a gaming machine in which the hold display is performed by a lamp or the like different from the liquid crystal panel, the hold display is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen, and only the decorative symbol display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen. good.

  In this way, when the normal mode is switched to the special mode, it appears that the screen on which the decorative symbols are changed and stopped is switched from the main liquid crystal screen PNM to the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. When the mode is switched from the normal mode to the special mode, it appears that the screen on which the crystal image FCR is displayed and held is switched from the main liquid crystal screen PNM to the sub liquid crystal screen PNS.

  On the other hand, in the special mode, on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, on the basis of the state in which the shutter-type accessory 3002 is closed, the electric power provided to each shutter 3050, 3010, 3030, 3070 constituting the shutter-type accessory 3002 is used. Special effects are performed while the decorative bodies 3012, 3013, 3052, and 3072 are caused to emit light. FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram for explaining special effects. FIGS. 272 (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining the operation of the shutter type accessory 3002 (each shutter 3050, 3010, 3030, 3070) in the special effect, and FIGS. 272 (D) to (E) It is a figure explaining the display content of the main liquid crystal screen PNM in a special effect. In FIGS. 272 (A) to (C), the display contents of the main liquid crystal screen PNM and the lighting elements 3012, 3013, 3052, and 3072 of the shutters 3050, 3010, 3030, and 3070 are not shown in order to avoid complexity of the drawing. Omitted. On the contrary, in FIGS. 272D to 272E, the illustration of the shutter type accessory 3002 (the shutters 3050, 3010, 3030, and 3070) is omitted in order to avoid the complexity of the drawing. In FIGS. 272 (A) to (C), a hatched area OPW is an area that is not covered by the shutter-type accessory 3002 (each shutter 3050, 3010, 3030, 3070), that is, the player uses the main liquid crystal screen PNM. Is also referred to as an area that can be directly viewed (hereinafter referred to as an open area OPW).

  In this special effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is based on, for example, controlling the shutters 3050, 3010, 3030, and 3070 to be completely closed, and occasionally the shutters 3050, 3010, 3030, and 3070 are partially opened. Control to become the state. For example, as shown in FIGS. 272 (A) to (C), the half-opened state can take a plurality of types of states in which the degree of half-opening, that is, the size of the open region OPW is different. Then, depending on the size of the open area OPW, it is suggested that the gaming state may be an external normal gaming state B (so-called latent probability state) in which the probability changing function is activated. Specifically, it represents that the game state is more likely to be a latent state as the size of the open area OPW is controlled over a longer period of time.

  Further, in this special effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays a symbol as a probability change suggestion image that suggests the possibility that the game state is the external normal game state B (so-called latent probability state) in which the probability change function is activated on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. The mark SMM is displayed. Specifically, in the background image BGC, the symbol mark SMM is displayed in a relatively dim state, and occasionally the symbol mark SMM pops forward from the back side of the main liquid crystal screen PNM. It is displayed while being enlarged so that it looks like. For example, as shown in FIGS. 272D to 272F, the symbol mark SMM that is enlarged and finally displayed clearly can have a plurality of sizes. Then, the size of the symbol mark SMM suggests the possibility that the gaming state is a latent state. Specifically, the larger the symbol mark SMM is displayed, the more likely it is that the gaming state is a latent state.

  Furthermore, in this special effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can change the color of the background image BGC displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM into a plurality of types. Specifically, for example, the color of the background image BGC can be four types of “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, and “red”. Then, the color of the background image BGC suggests the possibility that the gaming state is a latent state. Specifically, the color of the background image BGC indicates that the gaming state is more likely to be a latent state in the order of “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, and “red”.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a combines the above-mentioned operation of the shutter-type accessory 3002, the display of the symbol mark SMM, and the change in the color of the background image BGC at the same time, or each of them independently, while the game state is latent. A special effect that suggests whether or not a certain state is in effect is executed.

  Part or all of the area covered by the shutters 3050, 3010, 3030, and 3070 in the special effect image displayed over the entire main liquid crystal screen PNM may be controlled to a single color (black) or the like. good.

  This special effect is continuously performed over a plurality of special symbol variations. In other words, it is performed over a relatively long period of time regardless of a plurality of special symbol fluctuation / stop cycle breaks. For this reason, a highly flexible and continuous production (for example, a production with a narrative or a production including a long time) is performed as a special production without sacrificing the time efficiency of pending digestion. be able to.

  By the way, in the variation corresponding to the lottery in the special mode, when a variation pattern with a high jackpot expectation such as so-called super reach is selected, the reach state (final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol sequence) is displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. The display of the special effect on the main liquid crystal screen PNM is interrupted after the decorative symbols 1153b) are displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative symbols in the symbol row other than the final stop symbols are displayed. Then, after the shutter type accessory 3002 is opened, a super reach effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. When the change is completed, the shutter-type accessory 3002 is closed again, a special effect is performed over the entire display area on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and the decoration pattern change / stop display is displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. And hold display HR1 is performed.

  The special mode is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and returns to the normal mode described above. The predetermined conditions include, for example, winning the special mode end lottery, staying in the special mode for a predetermined number of fluctuations, and the like. When returning from the special mode to the normal mode, first, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is made invisible to the player from the state in which the player can visually recognize the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. That is, the left movable part unit 2378 and the right movable part unit 2379 of the first accessory unit 2370 are moved upward, and the movable part unit 2401 of the second accessory unit 2400 is rotated obliquely forward, so that the sub liquid crystal Conceal unit 2350. Then, in the fluctuation after returning to the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 250, the decoration symbols are changed and stopped on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and the hold display HR1 and the crystal image FCR are displayed in the lower area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM. Is displayed.

  In the special mode in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display and stop display, the crystal image FCR, and the hold display HR1 are displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS, and the decorative symbol variation display and stop display on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the crystal image FCR. Since the special effect described above is performed without performing the hold display HR1, the player feels surprised when the normal mode is shifted to the special mode. And it can be made to recognize that the special production is performed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and the attention and expectation to a special production can be raised.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the external normal gaming state A, when the “small hit” is won and when the “big hit D” is won, the effects performed and the operation of the attacker unit 2000 are the same. It is said that. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether he / she has won “Small Win” or “Big D”. However, as described above, when “Small Bonus” is won, the subsequent game state is maintained in the normal normal gaming state A in which the probability variation function does not operate, whereas “Big Jack D” is won. In such a case, the subsequent game state is controlled to the external normal game state B in which the probability changing function is activated. For this reason, the player has great interest in whether the gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B after winning the “small hit” or “big hit D”. The game of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be caused to cause the player to be intimidated or inferred whether the current gaming state is the external normal gaming state A or the external normal gaming state B. It has become one of sex. In such a gaming machine, the enhancement of the production suggesting the gaming state greatly contributes to the improvement of the entertainment of the game.

  In the conventional gaming machine of this type, the player's interest is not only whether the lottery result of the lottery process corresponding to the fluctuation is a big hit, but what is the current gaming state. Is also directed. For this reason, in addition to the effect which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the lottery result of the lottery process corresponding to a fluctuation | variation, the effect which suggests a gaming state is performed with display apparatuses, such as a liquid crystal panel. However, if various effects are performed at the same time, the display content of the display device becomes complicated, and it may be difficult for the player to grasp which effect should be noticed, and as a result, the intention of the effect is not sufficiently communicated to the player. As a result, the interest of the game could not be improved and there was a risk that the willingness to play would be reduced.

  In that respect, in the special mode in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal screen PNM is in the external normal gaming state B without displaying the decorative symbol variation display and stop display, the crystal image FCR, and the hold display HR1 on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. Or a special effect indicating whether the game is in the external normal gaming state A. As a result, it is possible to realize a special effect that has an impact on the player without giving a complicated impression. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation. Furthermore, for a player who has been interested in the display of the change of the decorative symbol indicating whether or not it is a big hit and the display of the stop until now, the current game state is the external normal game state A or an external that is more advantageous for the player An interest can also be given to whether the game state B is normal. As a result, the player can enjoy the playability of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above. In addition, gameability using small hits, latency (big hit D), etc. is difficult for beginners and elderly people to understand. Is an important aspect of game play, without displaying decorative designs etc. on the main LCD screen PNM, and using the entire area of the main LCD screen PNM for special effects that are suggestive of the gaming state, Informing the player that the game state is an important situation now, so that the player can understand the somewhat difficult game and enjoy the game machine more Can do.

  In addition, in the gaming machines having the above-described gaming characteristics, a gaming state in which the probability changing function is activated rather than whether or not the fluctuation becomes a big hit, such as immediately after a small hit or a latent probability. However, in such a case, a special effect, which is a suggestion effect of the gaming state, is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM without displaying decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal screen PNM. It can be said that an effect that the player is likely to be interested in is performed on the large main liquid crystal screen PNM, and a decorative pattern that makes the player's interest relatively thin is transferred to the sub liquid crystal. In other words, in consideration of the player's interest, the player's willingness to play is controlled by controlling the main liquid crystal screen PNM so that the production related to the high interest of the player is performed along the transition of the player's interest. Can be maintained.

  Furthermore, whether or not the gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated is to attract the player's interest over a plurality of variations, and the gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated. If the effect that suggests whether or not is performed for a long time over a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to realize more diverse and interesting effects for the player. Here, if the decoration pattern change / stop corresponding to the change / stop cycle of the special symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM where the special effect is being performed, the effect for a long time with a continuity is special. Even if it is displayed as an effect, the player feels that the special effect is a fine effect due to the change / stop cycle of the decorative design, and the special effect may be lost. In this embodiment, since the special effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM without displaying the variation and stop of the decorative symbols on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, it is continuously performed over a plurality of special symbol variations. In addition to clearly recognizing that the special performance is a single long-time performance, the game efficiency is not sacrificed.

  In addition, even if the special mode is underway and the interest in fluctuations in the decorative pattern is diminished, when a performance with a high expectation level (such as Superreach) is displayed, the expectation level for the jackpot increases and is changing. Since the degree of expectation for the effect can be higher than the suggestion effect of the game state, in that case, the effect with a high expectation level for the jackpot is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM instead of the effect suggestion of the game state. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can maintain the player's willingness to play by changing the effect to be emphasized along with the change in interest of the player.

  On the other hand, since the decorative symbol change display and stop display and hold display HR1 are performed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS provided separately from the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the progress of the game, that is, the progress of the lottery and the hold Can be confirmed on the sub-liquid crystal screen PNS, so that the player can proceed with the game with peace of mind.

  Furthermore, the special effect is performed based on a state in which the main liquid crystal screen PNM is covered with the shutter-type accessory 3002, so that when the decorative symbol or the hold display HR1 is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, the shutter-type accessory 3002 is displayed. Each of the shutters 3050, 3010, 3030, and 3070 and the decorative symbol and the hold display HR1 overlap each other, so that the decorative symbol and the hold display HR1 are difficult to see and may cause discomfort to the player. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the special mode in which special effects are performed, the decoration pattern and the hold display HR1 are displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS provided separately from the main liquid crystal screen PNM. Such inconvenience can be avoided.

  By the way, although not performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when shifting from the special mode to the normal mode, the distribution effect device 3125 should be in the lower stop position, but due to a malfunction or the like. When not in the lower stop position (see FIG. 265), control may be performed so that the hold display HR1 and the crystal image FCR are continuously displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS without hiding the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. The case where the distribution effect device 3125 should be in the lower stop position but is not in the lower stop position due to a malfunction or the like is, for example, the ascending / descending effect of the distribution effect device 3125 described above during the special mode. Is executed, and when the distribution effect device 3125 is lowered to the lower stop position at the end of the elevation effect, the distribution effect device 3125 does not return to the lower stop position due to a problem. Whether or not the distribution effect device 3125 has not returned to the lower stop position due to a problem is determined by whether the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal from the photosensor 2382, so that the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the lower stop position. It can be determined by detecting whether or not there is.

  If the distribution effect device 3125 does not normally descend to the lower stop position, the distribution effect device 3125 prevents the distribution effect device 3125 from partially providing an effect image that should be visually recognized by the player. There is a possibility that it is not visually recognized. Specifically, when returning to the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 265, the lower region of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, which should be visually recognized by the player in the normal state, is blocked by the distribution effect device 3125, and the player May become invisible. In the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 250, in the lower area of the main liquid crystal screen PNM, in the normal mode, the crystal image FCR, the hold display HR1, and the decoration pattern 1157 are displayed. There is a possibility that it cannot be visually recognized.

  As described above, when shifting from the special mode to the normal mode, if the distribution effect device 3125 should be in the lower stop position but is not in the lower stop position due to a malfunction or the like, If control is performed so that the hold display HR1 and the crystal image FCR are continuously displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS without hiding the liquid crystal screen PNS, the player can continue the game without any trouble. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the effect image without losing the fun of the game by not being in the standby position when the movable effect device should be in the standby position due to a malfunction or the like. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which a pre-reading effect or the like using a hold display is performed, if the player cannot visually recognize the hold display, the pre-play effect of the gaming machine cannot be enjoyed. By performing the display, the player can sufficiently enjoy the reserved pre-reading effect even when the movable effect device is not in the standby position when it should be in the standby position due to a malfunction or the like. Furthermore, since the display of the hold display HR1 and the crystal image FCR that have been displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS until then continues to be displayed as they are, there is an advantage that it is difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of a problem.

  Based on the same idea, for example, because the shutter type object 3002 has not returned from the closed state to the open state due to a malfunction, a part or all of the effect image that should be visually recognized by the player is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. In the state, the portion of the effect image that can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player because at least the shutter-type accessory 3002 is not in the open state may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal screen PNS.

[Example of production when reach is established]
FIG. 273 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect when the reach of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is established. An example described here is a reach establishment effect that develops into a reach effect with a relatively high expectation level of jackpot. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the reach achievement effect with a predetermined probability when the selection of the variation pattern corresponding to the reach effect having a relatively high expectation level is notified by a command from the main control MPU 4100a. To do.

  When the reach reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 273 (A), the moving image of the main character SPM is displayed in a band-like region extending from the center in the vertical direction of the main liquid crystal screen PNM to the left and right ends. At the same time, the decorative symbols are variably displayed from the top to the bottom in the middle symbol row 1153b. At this time, a majestic theme song is output from the speaker 121.

  Next, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b is split into two for both the predetermined sound effect and the effect image at a predetermined timing, one moves to the left symbol row 1153a and the other moves to the right symbol row 1153c. (FIG. 273 (B)). Thereafter, the decorative symbol is displayed in the downward direction in the left symbol row 1153a, and the decorative symbol is displayed in the upward direction in the right symbol row 1153c (FIG. 273 (C)).

  Thereafter, the moving direction of the decorative symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the moving direction of the decorative symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are rapidly reversed, the decorative symbol is moved and displayed upward in the left symbol row 1153a, and the right symbol row 1153c. , The decorative symbol is moved and displayed downward (FIG. 273 (D)).

  Then, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in both the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c, and reach is established (FIG. 273 (E)). After the production when the reach is established, a reach production with a relatively high expectation is executed. This series of symbol movements is performed according to the rhythm of the theme song. For example, the decoration symbols are divided in accordance with the first strong beat of a bar in the first half of the theme song (FIGS. 273 (A) and (B)). And reach is established at the first strong beat of the bar with the theme song (FIG. 273 (E)).

  In addition to the above-described effects at the time of reach establishment, the effects at the time of reach establishment and the effects up to FIG. 273 (D) are the same effects. There is a reach non-realization effect in which a different type of decorative symbol is stopped and reach is not achieved. After the reach non-realization effect is performed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, and the deviation of the change is notified.

[Battle production inclusion production]
Next, an example of a battle effect inclusion effect performed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4140a determines (selects) one effect display pattern including a battle effect including effect with a predetermined probability based on the change type and the change pattern transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a. Below, the effect display pattern including a battle effect is also called a battle inclusion effect display pattern. The peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the battle effect inclusion effect on the main liquid crystal screen PNM based on the battle inclusion effect display pattern. In the battle effect inclusion effect, a battle effect (offense / defense effect or confrontation effect) is performed by an ally character that provides an effect display favorable to the player and an enemy character that provides an effect display more malicious to the player than the ally character. Based on the winning or losing result, the battle production is performed again, the production is reached as a reach production, or the production is finished. In the battle effect inclusion effect, one pseudo-variable effect (or pseudo-continuous effect) is performed during one battle effect. This pseudo-variation effect is an effect that fluctuates the decorative symbol and ends the variation of the decorative symbol in a pseudo manner. Note that “pseudo termination of decoration design” means, for example, a mode in which at least a part of the decoration design is stopped or displayed, or the decoration design is gradually made transparent during the variation of the decoration design. A mode is included in which the player is made to recognize that the fluctuation of the game has ended.

  In this battle effect inclusion effect, the battle effect is repeated and the battle effect is performed up to three times. Accordingly, the battle effect inclusion effect is a battle effect first process described later including the first battle effect, a battle process second process described later including the second battle effect, and a battle described later including the third battle effect. Three effects of the third effect process can be executed. That is, the above-mentioned battle inclusion effect display pattern is a pattern in which after the first battle effect is performed, the effect is terminated through a predetermined effect (such as a jackpot or a loss notification effect described later) (see the battle effect first process), the second time After performing a battle effect, a pattern that ends the effect after a predetermined effect (see the second process of the battle effect), and a pattern that ends the effect after a predetermined effect after performing the third battle effect (battle effect) Including a plurality of patterns. In the battle inclusion effect display pattern, the pattern that ends in the first battle effect process is when the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the battle effect inclusion effect, and the variation type transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 238, etc.). The pattern that is selected when is “normal” and ends in the second process of the battle effect is selected when the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the battle effect inclusion effect and the variation type is “double”. The pattern ending in the third effect process is selected when the peripheral control MPU 4140a selects the battle effect inclusion effect and the variation type is “triple”. 274 to 276 show flowcharts of this battle effect inclusion effect. Specifically, FIG. 274 is a flowchart of the first battle effect process, FIG. 275 is a flowchart of the second battle effect process, and FIG. 276 is a flowchart of the third battle effect process. FIGS. 277 to 283 are views showing frame images constituting a moving image displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM as the effect including the battle effect. This battle effect inclusion effect will be described along the flowcharts of FIGS. 274 to 273, and specific examples of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 283. In FIGS. 277 to 283, when the decorative symbols in the left symbol row 1153 a, the middle symbol row 1153 b, and the right symbol row 1153 c are changing at high speed, this is indicated by three vertical lines.

<Battle production first process>
In this battle effect inclusion effect (battle effect first process), first, after the left symbol row 1153a, middle symbol row 1153b, and right symbol row 1153c fluctuate at high speed, suddenly the enemy character CRA1 as shown in FIG. The enemy appearance effect that appears with the weapon BKA is performed (FIG. 274: Step S10H). The decorative symbols in each symbol row indicate numerals, and hereinafter, the decorative symbols are called by combining the numerals and “symbols”. For example, the decorative symbol of the number “7” is also referred to as 7 symbols.

  In this enemy appearance effect, as shown in FIG. 277, in addition to the enemy character CRA1, a title TTL1 indicating “BATTLE CHANCE” indicating that a battle effect will be executed, and a title indicating the common name of the enemy character CRA1 TTL2, TTL3 representing “battle power”, and a battle power parameter PM1 representing the battle power of the enemy character CRA1 are shown. The battle power parameter PM1 represents the strength of the enemy character CRA1, and for example, the larger this value, the stronger the enemy character CRA1, and the smaller this value, the weaker the enemy character CRA1. The relationship between the combat power parameter PM1 and the effect display pattern will be described later.

  Subsequently, after the enemy appearance effect, as shown in FIG. 278, the attacking side selection that shows that the teammate character CRA2 and the enemy character CRA1 are facing each other and selects which side is the attacking side is selected. An effect is performed (FIG. 274: Step S20H).

  In this attack side selection effect, as shown in FIG. 278, in addition to the teammate character CRA2 and the enemy character CRA1, the title TTL4 indicating “BATTTLE MODE” indicating that the player has entered the battle effect and the first battle effect are displayed. A title TTL5 representing “1st BATTLE” indicating a battle effect is displayed.

  In the attack side selection effect, one of the teammate character CRA2 and the enemy character CRA1 is selected as the attacking character.

  First, the case where the enemy character CRA1 is selected as the attacking character will be described below. When the enemy character CRA1 is selected as the attacking side in the attack side selection effect, as shown in FIG. 279, an enemy attack effect in which the enemy character CRA1 attacks the teammate character CRA2 is performed (FIG. 274). Step S30H).

  In this enemy attack production, as shown in FIG. 279, in addition to the enemy character CRA1 and the weapon BKA, the title TTL6 representing “enemy A beam” which is a special technique of the enemy character CRA1, and “risk level” are set. A TTL 7 representing the risk and a risk parameter PM2 representing the risk are shown. More specifically, the risk parameter PM2 represents the danger level of the enemy A beam, which is a special technique of the enemy character CRA1, and for example, the higher this value, the more the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (the special technique “enemy A beam”). )) Is high, and there is a high possibility that the teammate character CRA2 will fall. The smaller this value, the lower the risk of the enemy character CRA1's attack (the “killing technique“ Enemy A beam ”). Indicates that the possibility of falling is low. The relationship between the risk parameter PM2 and the effect display pattern will be described later.

  In the enemy attack production, when the attack of the enemy character CRA1 hits (hits) the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 274: Step S40H), the teammate character CRA2 avoids the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 274: Step). S90H).

  If the attack of the enemy character CRA1 hits the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 274: Step S40H), the teammate character CRA2 further resists the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 274: Step S50H). There is a case where CRA2 falls due to the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 274: Step S70H).

  When the teammate character CRA2 withstood the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 274: Step S50H), as shown in FIG. I do. In this teammate patience effect, as shown in FIG. 280, in addition to the teammate character CRA2, a title TTL8 representing "I can't lose!" Is shown. The image shown in FIG. 280 is included in the next pseudo variation suggestion image in the scope of the claims.

  If this ally patience effect appears, the battle effect becomes a draw (draw), the battle effect continues to be confirmed, and the process shifts to the battle effect second process (FIG. 275) (FIG. 274: Step S60H).

  If the attack of the enemy character CRA1 hits the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 274: Step S40H), and the teammate character CRA2 has fallen by the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 274: Step S70H), A teammate character fall effect is shown that shows that the character CRA2 has fallen due to the attack of the enemy character CRA1. When this allied character fallen effect is performed, a lose notification effect (FIG. 274: Step S80H) for notifying a lost symbol array indicating a loss is immediately performed, and this battle effect included effect (the first process of the battle effect). And a case of performing a resurgence effect indicating that the fallen ally character CRA2 is revived (FIG. 274: Step S85H). In the revival effect, after an effect that a teammate character different from the teammate character CRA2 calls is performed, an effect that the teammate character CRA2 responds to the call is performed. This revival effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot C. After the revival effect, the jackpot C symbol array representing the jackpot C is stopped and the jackpot notification effect (FIG. 274: step S87H) is performed. After this production, a jackpot game of jackpot C is performed. After the end of the battle effect inclusion effect, the change (effect based on the battle inclusion effect display pattern) ends, and the process proceeds to the next change. In addition, this revival effect is not limited to the case where the ally character falls effect is performed immediately after the ally character collapse effect, but after the ally character collapse effect is performed, the losing notification effect is once executed and then performed. .

  When the enemy character CRA1 performs an enemy attack effect that attacks the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 274: Step S30H), the teammate character CRA2 avoids the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 274). : In step S90H), an avoidance effect indicating that the teammate character CRA2 has avoided the attack of the enemy character CRA1 is performed. If this avoidance effect appears, the battle effect becomes a draw (draw), the battle effect continues to be confirmed, and the process proceeds to the battle effect second process (FIG. 275) (FIG. 274: Step S100H).

Next, a case where the teammate character CRA2 is selected as the attacking character in the attacking side selection effect will be described below.
When the teammate character CRA2 is selected as the attacking side in the attack side selection effect, as shown in FIG. 281, a teammate attack effect is performed in which the teammate character CRA2 attacks the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 274: Step S110H). ). In this ally attack effect, as shown in FIG. 281, the ally character CRA2 emits the beam BM1 toward the enemy character CRA1.

  In the teammate attack production, the teammate character CRA2's attack (beam BM1) always hits (FIG. 274: Step S120H).

  When the attack of the teammate character CRA2 is hit in the teammate attack production, when the enemy character CRA1 falls down due to the attack of the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 274: Step S130H), the enemy character CRA1 is attacked by the teammate character CRA2. There is a case of enduring (FIG. 274: Step S160H).

  When the enemy character CRA1 falls down due to the attack of the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 274: Step S130H), as shown in FIG. An uplifting effect is shown. In this enthusiasm production, as shown in FIG. 282, in addition to the teammate character CRA2, a title TTL9 representing “Let's leave the next incident!” Which is an affirmative word for expecting future productions is shown. In the symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, a decorative symbol (0 symbol in the example of FIG. 282) is displayed to indicate a reach state (reach establishment) (FIG. 274: Step S140H). Then, after the reach state is indicated (after reach is established), the process shifts to reach production (FIG. 274: Step S150H). The image shown in FIG. 282 is included in the next pseudo-variation negative image in the claims.

  If this (this time) battle inclusion effect display pattern is based on a deviation variation pattern, after performing this reach effect, a lose notification effect (FIG. 274: Step S152H) for notifying the lost symbol arrangement is performed, and this battle is performed. The first production process ends. If the battle inclusion effect display pattern is based on the jackpot variation pattern, after performing this reach effect, a jackpot notification effect (FIG. 274: Step S153H) for notifying the jackpot symbol arrangement is performed, and this battle effect inclusion effect is displayed. finish. After the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot A or jackpot B game is played.

  When the teammate character CRA2 is hit by the teammate attack production and the enemy character CRA1 has endured the teammate character CRA2 attack (FIG. 274: Step S160H), as shown in FIG. An enemy patience effect is shown that shows how the friendly character CRA1 has endured the attack of the friendly character CRA2. The image shown in FIG. 283 is included in the next pseudo variation suggestion image in the claims.

  If this enemy side patience effect appears, the battle effect becomes a draw (draw), the battle effect continues to be confirmed, and the process shifts to the battle effect second process (FIG. 275) (FIG. 274: Step S170H). .

  The above is the flow of the first battle effect process. If the teammate character CRA2 has endured even if the attack of the teammate character CRA2 hits the teammate via the enemy attack stage in the first process flow of the battle stage (FIG. 274: Step S60H), the team will pass through the teammate attack stage. When the teammate character CRA2 avoids the attack (FIG. 274: Step S100), and when the enemy character CRA1 that has been attacked by the teammate character CRA2 through the teammate attack effect endures (FIG. 274: Step S170H). That is, when the battle effect is a draw, the battle effect second process is continued. Next, the battle effect second process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Battle production second process>
When entering the second battle effect process, the attack side selection effect is performed again (FIG. 275: Step S200H).

  First, the case where the enemy character CRA1 is selected as the attacking character will be described below. When the enemy character CRA1 is selected as the attack side in the attack side selection effect, the enemy attack effect is performed (FIG. 275: Step S210H).

  In the enemy attack production, when the attack of the enemy character CRA1 hits (hits) the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 275: Step S220H), the teammate character CRA2 avoids the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 275: Step). S280H).

  When the attack of the enemy character CRA1 hits the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 275: Step S220H), the teammate character CRA2 further resists the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 275: Step S230H). There is a case where CRA2 falls due to the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 275: Step S250H).

  When the teammate character CRA2 endures the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 275: Step S230H), the teammate patience effect is performed.

  If this ally patience effect appears, the battle effect becomes a draw (draw), the battle effect continues to be confirmed, and the process shifts to the battle effect third process (FIG. 276) (FIG. 275: Step S240H).

  If the attack of the enemy character CRA1 hits the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 275: Step S220H), and the teammate character CRA2 falls down due to the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 275: Step S250H), the above Directs the fall of a friendly character. When this teammate character fall effect is performed, a lose notification effect (FIG. 275: step S260H) for notifying the loss symbol arrangement indicating the disparity is immediately performed, and this battle effect inclusion effect (battle effect second process). And a case where a reviving effect indicating a state in which the fallen ally character CRA2 is revived is performed (FIG. 275: Step S270H). In this revival effect, after an effect that a teammate character different from the teammate character CRA2 calls is performed, an effect that the teammate character CRA2 responds to the call is performed. This revival effect is an effect that suggests a jackpot C. After the revival effect, the jackpot C symbol array representing the jackpot C is stopped and a jackpot notification effect (FIG. 275: step S277H) is performed. After this production, a jackpot game of jackpot C is performed. After the end of the battle effect inclusion effect, the change (effect based on the battle inclusion effect display pattern) ends, and the process proceeds to the next change. In addition, this revival effect is not limited to the case where the ally character falls effect is performed immediately after the ally character collapse effect, but after the ally character collapse effect is performed, the losing notification effect is once executed and then performed. .

  When the enemy character CRA1 performs an enemy attack effect that attacks the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 275: Step S210H), the teammate character CRA2 avoids the attack of the enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 275). : In step S280H), the avoidance effect is performed. If this avoidance effect appears, the battle effect becomes a draw (draw), the battle effect continues to be confirmed, and the process shifts to the battle effect third process (FIG. 276) (FIG. 275: Step S290H).

Next, a case where the teammate character CRA2 is selected as the attacking character in the attacking side selection effect will be described below.
When the ally character CRA2 is selected as the attack side in the attack side selection effect, the above-mentioned ally attack effect is performed (FIG. 275: Step S300H). In the teammate attack production, the teammate character CRA2 is always hit (FIG. 275: Step S310H).

  When the attack of the teammate character CRA2 is hit in the teammate attack production, when the enemy character CRA1 is knocked down by the teammate character CRA2 attack (FIG. 275: Step S320H), the enemy character CRA1 is attacked by the teammate character CRA2. There is a case of enduring (FIG. 275: Step S350H).

  When the enemy character CRA1 falls down due to the attack of the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 275: Step S320H), the above-described uplifting effect is performed. In this uplifting effect, a reach state (reach establishment) is shown (FIG. 275: Step S330H). Then, after the reach state is indicated (after reach is established), the process shifts to reach production (FIG. 275: Step S340H).

  If this (this time) battle inclusion effect display pattern is based on a deviation fluctuation pattern, after performing this reach effect, a lose notification effect (FIG. 275: step S342H) for notifying the lost symbol arrangement is performed, and this battle is performed. The effect inclusion effect (battle effect second process) is terminated. If the battle inclusion effect display pattern is based on the jackpot variation pattern, after performing this reach effect, the jackpot notification effect (FIG. 275: Step S343H) for notifying the jackpot symbol arrangement is performed, and this battle effect inclusion effect is displayed. finish. After the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot A or jackpot B game is played.

  If the teammate character CRA2 is hit by the teammate attack effect and the enemy character CRA1 has endured the teammate character CRA2 attack (FIG. 275: step S350H), the enemy side patience effect is performed.

  If this enemy side endurance effect appears, the battle effect becomes a draw (draw), the battle effect continues to be confirmed, and the process proceeds to the third process of the battle effect (FIG. 276) (FIG. 275: Step S360H).

  The above is the flow of the battle effect second process. If the teammate character CRA2 endures even if the attack of the teammate character CRA2 hits the teammate through the enemy attack stage in the flow of the battle stage second time process (FIG. 275: Step S240H), the team will pass through the teammate attack stage. When the teammate character CRA2 avoids the attack (FIG. 275: Step S290), and when the enemy character CRA1 that has been attacked by the teammate character CRA2 through the teammate attack effect endures (FIG. 275: Step S360H). That is, when the battle effect is a draw, the process enters the third battle effect process. Next, the third battle effect process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Battle production third process>
When entering the third battle effect process, the attack side selection effect is performed again (FIG. 276: Step S400H). However, in the third battle effect process, the attacking character is always selected to be the teammate character CRA2.

  When the teammate character CRA2 is selected as the attack side in the attack side selection effect, the above-mentioned teammate attack effect is performed (FIG. 276: Step S410H). In the teammate attack production, the teammate character CRA2 is always hit (FIG. 276: Step S420H).

  When the attack of the teammate character CRA2 is hit in the teammate attack production, when the enemy character CRA1 falls down due to the attack of the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 276: Step S430H), the enemy character CRA1 is attacked by the teammate character CRA2. There is a case of escaping after enduring (FIG. 276: Step S460H).

  When the enemy character CRA1 falls down due to the attack of the teammate character CRA2 (FIG. 276: Step S430H), the above-described uplifting effect is performed. In this uplifting effect, a reach state (reach establishment) is shown (FIG. 276: step S440H). Then, after the reach state is indicated (after reach is established), the process proceeds to reach production (FIG. 276: Step S450H).

  If this (this time) battle inclusion effect display pattern is based on the deviation fluctuation pattern, after performing this reach effect, a lose notification effect (FIG. 276: step S453H) for notifying the lost symbol arrangement is performed, and this battle is performed. The effect inclusion effect (battle effect third process) is terminated. If the battle inclusion effect display pattern is based on the jackpot variation pattern, after performing the reach effect, the jackpot notification effect (FIG. 276: step S453H) for notifying the jackpot symbol arrangement is performed, and this battle effect inclusion effect ( The battle effect third process) is terminated. After the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot A or jackpot B game is played.

  When the attack of the teammate character CRA2 is hit in the teammate attack production and the enemy character CRA1 withstood the attack of the teammate character CRA2, the enemy character CRA1 withstood the attack of the teammate character CRA2. After that, an escape effect is performed in which the enemy character CRA1 escapes (FIG. 276: Step S460H).

  When this escape effect appears, immediately, a lose notification effect (FIG. 276: Step S470H) for notifying the lost symbol arrangement indicating the disparity is performed, and this battle effect inclusion effect (battle effect third process) is ended. And a case where a resurrection effect indicating victory of the teammate character CRA2 is performed by capturing the escaped enemy character CRA1 (FIG. 276: step S480H). This revival effect is an effect that suggests a jackpot C. After the revival effect, the jackpot C symbol array representing the jackpot C is stopped and a jackpot notification effect (FIG. 276: step S487H) is performed. After this production, a jackpot game of jackpot C is performed. After the end of the battle effect inclusion effect, the change (effect based on the battle inclusion effect display pattern) ends, and the process proceeds to the next change. In addition, this resurrection effect is not limited to the case where the escape effect is performed immediately after the escape effect, but after the escape effect is performed, the loss notification effect may be once executed and then performed.

  As described above, in the battle effect inclusion effect, the battle effect and the pseudo variation are linked, and the continuation of the pseudo variation (battle effect) is referred to as the draw effect (see FIG. 280 in step S50H, FIG. 283 in step S160H, etc.). On the other hand, the end of the pseudo fluctuation (battle effect) is indicated by the above-described enthusiasm effect (FIG. 282 in step S130H, etc.). In this way, whether or not to continue the pseudo-variation effect is a technique different from the technique of performing the display stop display mode of the symbol, which is a common way, such as "I suggest to the player using an image different from the symbol It is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with respect to the pseudo-variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game effect with a fresh taste by suppressing the change of the pseudo variation effect. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be prevented from decreasing, and the player can be prevented from leaving the game.

Further, in the battle effect inclusion effect, the effect that the teammate character CRA2 falls in the battle effect (step S70H) or the effect that the enemy character CRA1 escapes (step S460H) (these effects are disadvantageous for the friend character CRA2). In the following, when the disadvantage expression effect is performed), the battle effect inclusion effect is terminated without performing the expectation effect (establishment of reach or reach effect) on the jackpot. Also, in the battle effect inclusion effect, an effect (step S50H, etc.) that becomes a draw (draw) in the battle effect (this effect is neutral effect for the teammate character CRA2, and is hereinafter also referred to as a neutral expression effect). In such a case, the battle effect is temporarily terminated without establishing reach, that is, without performing the reach effect, but the battle effect is executed again. On the other hand, in the battle effect inclusion effect, the enemy character CRA1 falls due to the attack of the teammate character CRA2 in the battle effect (steps S130H and S430) (Since these effects are advantageous effects for the teammate character CRA2, the following advantageous expressions are given. If it is also referred to as production), reach is subsequently established and reach production is performed. As a result, if the advantageous expression effect is performed in the battle effect, the reach effect is performed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In this case, an advantageous expression effect may be performed in the first battle effect, so even if the effect before the reach effect (reach establishment) is a short effect, it is possible to give the player a sufficient expectation is there. On the other hand, in the battle effect, when the neutral expression effect is performed, the battle effect is performed again. Therefore, the battle effect can be performed a plurality of times. In addition, even if the battle effect is made many times, if the disadvantage expression effect is performed, the expectation effect on the jackpot is not made, so the player cannot be relieved. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension over a long period of time.
That is, in the above-mentioned battle effect inclusion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big jackpot even if the effect is a short period before the reach effect (reach establishment), and over a long period of time. It is also possible to give a reach effect to the player after giving a sense of tension. In addition, if an adverse expression effect is made in the battle effect, the player will not give a sense of expectation, but the effect will end without performing a reach effect. It is possible to realize a sharp game without continuing to show and extending the game. From the above, it is possible to suppress the player from losing his willingness to play.

Here, the jackpot expectation degree corresponding to a certain effect display pattern (hereinafter also referred to as an effect display pattern expectation degree) will be described. This effect display pattern expectation degree is a jackpot expectation degree when the player sees the effect display based on the effect display pattern, and is specified as follows. That is, the probability XA that a jackpot effect display pattern based on the jackpot variation pattern is selected and the probability YA that a loss effect display pattern that defines the same type of effect display as the jackpot effect display pattern is selected. Based on this, the following formula is used.
Expectation of jackpot = XA / (XA + XB)
Note that “the same type of effect display” is not limited to the same effect display, but includes an effect display in which the decorative pattern variation time is substantially the same and the main part of the effect is the same. Indications that differ in so-called chance-up effects, such as differences in the appearance and appearance of a predetermined character, are also included. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree is the expectation degree to the apparent jackpot when the player views the effect display based on the effect display pattern, that is, the hit pattern and the same type of effect display loss as the hit pattern. When a pattern can be executed, it can also be referred to as a hit pattern execution probability (selection probability).

  By the way, in this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is different from the battle effect inclusion effect that can suggest the continuation of the pseudo-variation by using an image different from the decorative symbol such as a draw effect and a high spirited effect. The normal pseudo variation effect that suggests the continuation or end of the pseudo variation is executed, and then the normal pseudo variation effect display pattern for executing the reach effect is also executable. The normal pseudo variation effect display pattern includes a pattern L1 for executing the reach effect after executing the normal pseudo variation effect once, and a pattern L2 for executing the reach effect after executing the normal pseudo variation effect a plurality of times. The pattern L2 is configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than the pattern L2. Therefore, when the normal pseudo-changing effect is finished immediately, the subsequent effect is likely to be an effect with a low degree of expectation that a privilege is given.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, in the battle effect including effect, the reach effect in the first process of the battle effect, in other words, the reach effect after performing the advantageous expression effect in the first battle effect, the normal pseudo-change effect once. The jackpot expectation is higher than the reach production after the execution.
Thus, if the reach effect performed after the advantageous expression effect in the battle effect appears, the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the reach effect performed after one normal pseudo-variable effect appears. Therefore, if an advantageous expression effect is simply performed, it will develop into a reach effect with a high expectation level of jackpot, and give a great sense of expectation to the player even if the effect is as short as one normal pseudo-variable effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing his willingness to play.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the normal pseudo-variation effect once in the battle effect inclusion effect, regardless of the battle effect first process, and the reach effect in the battle effect second process or the battle effect third process. The jackpot expectation may be higher than that of the reach production. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a higher expectation degree of the jackpot of the reach effect after the pseudo variation in the battle effect including effect when the pseudo variation in the battle effect including effect is the same as the number of the pseudo variations in the normal pseudo variation. It may be configured as follows. In this case, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured such that, in the battle effect inclusion effect, the reach effect in the second process of the battle effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach effect after the normal pseudo-variable effect is executed twice. In the battle effect inclusion effect, the reach effect in the third process of the battle effect is configured to have a higher jackpot expectation than the reach effect after the normal pseudo-variable effect is executed three times.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a compares the case where the number of times the battle effect is repeated with the same effect expression effect (the effect that the enemy character CRA1 falls) and the expectation effect (such as reach establishment or reach effect) on the jackpot. After that, the probability of winning the jackpot (in this case, the jackpot A or the jackpot B) is a jackpot (jackpot C) after the revival effect is made after the adverse expression effect (the effect that the teammate character CRA2 falls or the escape effect of the enemy character CRA1). It is configured to be higher than the probability.
That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured as follows.
In the battle effect display pattern ZA1 for performing the jackpot notification effect after the reach effect in the first battle effect process, the battle inclusion effect display pattern ZA2 for performing the jackpot notification effect after the revival effect in the first battle effect process, and the battle effect second process A battle inclusion effect display pattern ZB1 for performing the jackpot notification effect after the reach effect, a battle inclusion effect display pattern ZB2 for performing the jackpot effect after the revival effect in the second battle effect process, and a jackpot notification effect after the reach effect in the third battle effect process The battle inclusion effect display pattern ZC1 to be performed and the battle inclusion effect display pattern ZC2 to perform the jackpot notification effect after the revival effect in the third battle effect process are configured to be executable.
Further, the selection probability of selecting (executing) the battle inclusion effect display pattern ZA1 in the first battle effect process is XZA1, the selection probability of selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern ZA2 in the first battle effect process is XZA2, and the battle effect 2 The selection probability for selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern ZB1 in the second process is XZB1, the selection probability for selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern ZB2 in the second battle process is XZB2, and the battle inclusion effect display pattern in the third battle effect process. The selection probability for selecting ZC1 is XZC1, and the selection probability for selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern ZC2 in the third battle effect process is XZC2.
In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured such that the selection probability XZA1 is higher than the selection probability XZA2, the selection probability XZB1 is higher than the selection probability XZB2, and the selection probability XZC1 is higher than the selection probability XZC2. Yes.
If it does in this way, it can be ensured that it is advantageous for a player that an advantageous expression production is made in a battle production. Therefore, in the process of the battle effect, the player can always be eager for the advantageous expression effect, and the contradiction that the player desires to be the disadvantage expression effect can be prevented.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is notified of a loss even though a disadvantage expression effect (steps S70H, S250H, S460H) (an effect that the teammate character CRA2 falls or an escape effect by the enemy character CRA1) is made in the battle effect. The probability of executing a resurrection effect (steps S85H, S270H, S480H) that notifies the jackpot without passing the expectation effect on the jackpot instead of the effect is the number of times that the battle effect is repeated prior to the disadvantage expression effect. It is configured to increase as the number increases.
That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured as follows.
A battle inclusion effect display pattern YA1 that performs a resurrection effect after a disadvantage expression effect in the first battle effect process, a battle inclusion effect display pattern YA2 that performs a loss notification effect directly after the disadvantage expression effect in the first battle effect process, and a second battle effect In the process, the battle inclusion effect display pattern YB1 for performing the resurrection effect after the disadvantage expression effect, the battle inclusion effect display pattern YB2 for performing the loss notification effect as it is after the disadvantage expression effect in the second battle effect process, and the disadvantage expression in the third battle effect process A battle inclusion effect display pattern YC1 for performing a revival effect after the effect and a battle inclusion effect display pattern YC2 for performing a loss notification effect as it is after the disadvantage expression effect in the third process of the battle effect are configured to be executable.
The probability of selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern YA1 is XYA1, the probability of selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern YA2 is XYA2, the probability of selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern YB1 is XYB1, and the battle inclusion effect display pattern YB2 XYB2, the probability of selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern YC1 is XYC1, and the probability of selecting the battle inclusion effect display pattern YC2 is XYC2, after the disadvantage expression effect of the first battle effect processing, Execution probability XX1 of executing the revival effect of either the notification effect or the revival effect, execution of executing the revival effect of either the loss notification effect or the revival effect after the adverse expression effect of the second process of the battle effect Probability XX2, and adverse expression effect of the third process of battle effect In execution probability executes revival effect of any resurrection effect the loss notification effect XX3 can be shown by the following equation.
XX1 = XYA1 / (XYA1 + XYA2)
XX2 = XYB1 / (XYB1 + XYB2)
XX3 = XYC1 / (XYC1 + XYC2)
In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured such that the execution probability XX3> the execution probability XX2> the execution probability XX1.
In this way, the player's dissatisfaction and discomfort are more suitable for not expecting the jackpot expectation effect (reach establishment or reach effect) as the battle effect is repeated many times. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that can be performed before the expectation effect on the jackpot, while suppressing the dissatisfaction and discomfort of the player suitably, and providing a variety of effects that does not get the player bored. it can. Furthermore, if the battle effects are performed many times, even if the adverse expression effect is made at the end, the probability that it will lead to the revival effect (big hit C) is high, so the player will repeat the battle effect. You will have a sense of expectation without feeling redundant. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation without getting the player bored.

Peripheral control MPU4140a performs the said battle production based on a battle inclusion production display pattern (fluctuation pattern). Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a high possibility that the battle power parameter PM1 is set to be relatively low in the battle effect when the battle inclusion effect display pattern has a reach effect with a relatively high expectation degree. It is comprised so that it may become. In addition, when the battle inclusion effect display pattern has a reach effect with a relatively low expectation level, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a high possibility that the battle power parameter PM1 is set relatively high in the battle effect. It is configured as follows. Further, in the case where the battle inclusion effect display pattern is a pattern in which the reach effect is not performed (in the case where the reach is not established), the peripheral control MPU 4140a has an effect display pattern in which the battle power parameter PM1 has the reach effect. It is configured to be more likely to be set higher than that.
For example, a battle inclusion effect display pattern AA1 having a reach effect with relatively high expectation, a battle inclusion effect display pattern BB1 having a reach effect with a lower jackpot expectation than the reach effect of the battle inclusion effect display pattern AA1, and reach When there is a battle inclusion effect display pattern CC1, which is a pattern in which no effect is given, the level of expectation of jackpot of these effect display patterns is: battle inclusion effect display pattern AA1> battle inclusion effect display pattern BB1> battle inclusion effect The display pattern CC1 is obtained. Therefore, the numerical value of the combat power parameter PM1 in each effect display pattern is set so that the battle inclusion effect display pattern CC1> the battle inclusion effect display pattern BB1> the battle inclusion effect display pattern AA1.
As described above, if the fighting force parameter PM1 is low, the expectation level for reaching the reach will increase, and further, the expectation degree for the jackpot will increase. Conversely, if the fighting force parameter PM1 is high, the expectation for reaching the reach effect will increase. Expectation level declines, and jackpot expectation level also falls.
As a result, the player comes to watch the battle power parameter PM1, that is, comes to watch the beginning of the battle effect, and can enjoy the battle effect using the battle power parameter PM1 as a barometer. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is full of interest, and it is possible to prevent the player from damaging the game motivation.

Peripheral control MPU4140a performs the said battle production based on a battle inclusion production display pattern (fluctuation pattern). Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured such that when the battle inclusion effect display pattern has a reach effect, the risk parameter PM2 is likely to be set relatively low in the battle effect. . Further, when the battle inclusion effect display pattern is a pattern in which the reach effect is not performed (in the case of a pattern in which the reach is not established), the peripheral control MPU 4140a has an effect display pattern in which the risk parameter PM2 has the reach effect. It is configured to be more likely to be set higher.
For example, when there is a battle inclusion effect display pattern AA2 having a reach effect and a battle inclusion effect display pattern CC2 which is a pattern that does not perform a reach effect, the height of the numerical value of the risk parameter PM2 in each effect display pattern is The battle inclusion effect display pattern CC2> the battle inclusion effect display pattern AA2.
As described above, if the risk parameter PM2 is low, it becomes a draw (draw), and the degree of expectation to shift to the next battle production increases, that is, the degree of development expectation to reach production increases, conversely, If the risk parameter PM2 is high, there is no possibility of drawing (drawing), and the possibility that the change will end increases, that is, the expectation level for shifting to the next battle effect is lowered, and the development expectation level for the reach effect is lowered. To do.
As a result, the player comes to watch the risk parameter PM2, and can enjoy the battle effect by setting the risk parameter PM2 as one barometer. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is full of interest, and it is possible to prevent the player from damaging the game motivation.

  In the present embodiment, in the battle effect inclusion effect, the battle effect is performed only up to three times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the battle effect inclusion effect, the battle effect may be executed twice or four times or more. Even if it does in this way, the effect of the said battle production inclusion effect can be show | played.

[Chance continuous production]
Next, a pseudo continuous effect performed using the main liquid crystal screen PNM and the sub liquid crystal screen PNS will be described. In the pseudo continuous effect, the variation of the decorative symbol is performed, and the variation of the decorative symbol is terminated a plurality of times during one variation of the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator 642. Production. “Ending the variation of the decorative design” includes a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decorative design is once completed, such as a mode in which a part or all of the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

  The pseudo continuous effect is executed when the variation type (see FIG. 238, etc.) transmitted as a command from the main control MPU 4100a is “2 stations”, “3 stations”, “4 stations”, “5 stations”. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a that has recognized that the variation type is “four stations” by a command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a repeats and displays the variation and stop of the ornament symbol three times, and then displays the fourth ornament symbol. In this variation, a reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed on the main liquid crystal screen PNM, and finally a combination of decorative symbols representing a jackpot or a decorative symbol combination representing a loss is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, at a predetermined chance (combination of decorative symbols), after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol is started again by repeating the variation of the decorative symbol according to the variation type. A so-called chance eye pseudo-continuous production is prepared as a pseudo-continuous production. In this chance-like pseudo-continuous production, the higher the expected number of jackpots is set, the greater the number of decorative symbol variations and stop repetitions. For example, the jackpot reliability of “2 stations”, “3 stations”, “4 stations” and “5 stations” is set to 5%, 15%, 50% and 100%, respectively. In this pseudo-continuous production, in the case of “3 stations”, “4 stations”, and “5 stations”, reach is always established in the last variation of the decorative symbols (so-called gusset does not occur).

  Therefore, when this pseudo-continuous production occurs, the player will watch the production while hoping that many of the decorative symbols will change and stop before the reach is established, and the decorative symbols will change and stop. Every time it is repeated, the expectation for the jackpot will be raised.

  By the way, the following technical idea can be extracted from the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above. Specific examples corresponding to the terms of the following technical idea will be described in parentheses as appropriate, but this is for ease of understanding and does not limit the terms representing the technical idea.

[Technology 1]
Detection means (a first start port sensor 2011, a second start port sensor 2349) for detecting that a game ball has passed a predetermined area;
Lottery information acquisition means (first special random number generation means 4212, second special random number generation means 4222) for acquiring lottery information based on detection of game balls by the detection means;
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a lottery is performed based on the lottery information for which a start condition is established, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including jackpots and loses. Lottery means (main control MPU 4100a executing step S1310 of FIG. 229);
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, lottery information storage unit (first special symbol hold storage unit) that can store a lot of lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition until the start condition is satisfied. 4214, second special symbol holding storage means 4224),
When the lottery result is a jackpot, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to the player (FIG. 244: main control MPU 4100a performing a special electric utility jackpot control process);
An effect deriving means (liquid crystal display device 1400, sub liquid crystal unit 2350, shutter-type accessory 3002, lower-side accessory unit 3003, etc.) capable of deriving an effect;
Production control means (main control MPU 4100a and peripheral control MPU 4140a) for determining the content of the production and deriving the production of the production content determined by the production derivation means;
An operation accepting means (such as the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370) for accepting the player's operation;
In a gaming machine comprising
The production control means includes
An effect that suggests an expectation that the lottery result of the lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means is a big hit, and is derived to the effect derivation means prior to establishment of the start condition for the lottery information. Specific expectation suggestion effect deriving means capable of deriving a specific expectation suggestion effect (the main control MPU 4100a performing the first and second special symbol advance processes shown in FIGS. 227 and 228, and the periphery performing the hold display process shown in FIG. 251 Control MPU 4140a),
Prior to the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect deriving means by the specific expectation suggestion effect deriving means, an operation promotion notification means (pending display shown in FIG. 251) capable of performing an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operation accepting means. Peripheral control MPU 4140a) that performs step S506 of processing,
Have
The specific expectation suggestion effect derivation means is the start of the lottery information corresponding to the specific expectation suggestion effect while the operation promotion notification is being made as a pattern for deriving the specific expectation suggestion effect. The specific expectation suggesting effect can be derived to the effect deriving unit when a deriving condition including that a player's operation by the operation accepting unit has been received before the condition is satisfied is satisfied. (See FIG. 252), a gaming machine.

  In the above gaming machine, lottery information is acquired based on detection that a game ball has passed a predetermined area. Then, among the acquired lottery information, a lottery based on the lottery information for which the start condition is satisfied is performed, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including a jackpot and a loss. The predetermined area includes a winning opening that triggers a lottery of special symbols, a gate (through) that triggers a lottery of ordinary symbols, and the like.

  In addition, the gaming machine has a lottery information storage means that can store a lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition among the lottery information until the start condition is satisfied. In this case, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege (awarding of a prize ball, an operation of a probability changing function, an operation of a short time function, etc.) to the player is provided.

  In addition, the gaming machine is an effect deriving unit (liquid crystal display) capable of deriving an effect including a specific expectation suggestion effect (display of a specific character image, etc.) that is a specific effect suggesting an expectation that the lottery result is a big hit. An image display device such as a display device, a decorative body having a light emitter such as an LED, a movable accessory, etc.) and an effect control means for determining the content of the effect and deriving the effect of the effect content determined by the effect deriving means ( Computer for controlling the effect deriving means) and operation accepting means for accepting the player's operation (for example, buttons provided on the gaming machine).

  The effect control means is an effect suggesting an expectation that the lottery result of the lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means is a big hit, and is derived to the effect derivation means prior to the establishment of the start condition for the lottery information. A specific expectation suggestion effect can be derived. Further, prior to the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect, an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operation accepting unit can be performed. Then, the effect control means is an operation accepting means during the operation promotion notification as a pattern for deriving the specific expectation effect and before the start condition for the lottery information corresponding to the specific expectation effect is established. When the derivation condition including that the player's operation is accepted is satisfied, the specific expectation suggestion effect can be derived to the effect deriving means.

  As a result, it is possible to provide a new effect of entrusting the player with the choice of whether or not to see the expectation suggestion effect indicating the expectation degree of jackpot for the lottery information for which the start condition is not satisfied before the start condition is satisfied. be able to. For example, if the player wants to concentrate on lottery information for which the start conditions have already been established, or if he / she is informed that his / her expectations for future lottery are low, he / she should not operate the operation accepting means. Thus, it can be selected not to derive the expectation suggestion effect. On the other hand, when it is desired to quickly obtain the jackpot expectation degree for the future lottery, it is possible to select to derive the expectation suggestion effect by not operating the operation receiving means.

  As a result, it is possible to select the player's preference how long before the player knows the degree of expectation before the player knows that the lottery result has been definitely notified and the player has won the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for various players, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

[Technology 2]
Detection means (a first start port sensor 2011, a second start port sensor 2349) for detecting that a game ball has passed a predetermined area;
Lottery information acquisition means (first special random number generation means 4212, second special random number generation means 4222) for acquiring lottery information based on detection of game balls by the detection means;
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a lottery is performed based on the lottery information for which a start condition is established, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including jackpots and loses. Lottery means (main control MPU 4100a executing step S1310 of FIG. 229);
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, lottery information storage unit (first special symbol hold storage unit) that can store a lot of lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition until the start condition is satisfied. 4214, second special symbol holding storage means 4224),
Accumulation display means (liquid crystal display device 1400 (lower region in FIG. 250) for displaying an accumulation display indicating that the lottery information is accumulated by the lottery information accumulation means;
An accumulation display mode control unit (peripheral control MPU 4140a for executing a hold process shown in FIG. 251) for controlling a display mode of the accumulation display displayed on the accumulation display unit;
When the lottery result is a jackpot, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to the player (FIG. 244: main control MPU 4100a performing a special electric utility jackpot control process) and an operation accepting means for accepting the player's operation (operation A main button 371 of the button unit 370),
In a gaming machine comprising
The accumulated display mode control means includes:
A first mode control unit (peripheral control MPU 4140a) capable of displaying the accumulated display in an operation promotion display mode that is a mode associated with a display that prompts the player to operate the operation reception unit when a specific condition is satisfied. : Refer to FIG. 252)
While the accumulated display is displayed in the operation promotion display mode, the change display condition is displayed when a change condition including that a player's operation is received by the operation receiving unit is satisfied. Second mode control means (peripheral control MPU 4140a: see FIG. 252) that can change the accumulated display to an expected level suggesting display mode that suggests an expected level that the lottery result based on the lottery information corresponding to the accumulated display is a big hit; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above gaming machine, lottery information is acquired based on detection that a game ball has passed a predetermined area. Then, among the acquired lottery information, a lottery based on the lottery information for which the start condition is satisfied is performed, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including a jackpot and a loss. The predetermined area includes a winning opening that triggers a lottery of special symbols, a gate (through) that triggers a lottery of ordinary symbols, and the like.

  In addition, the gaming machine includes a lottery information accumulating unit capable of accumulating a lottery information in which the start condition is not established among the lottery information until an upper limit number (for example, four) is established until the start condition is established; And an accumulation display means for displaying an accumulation display indicating that the lottery information is accumulated, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is given a privilege (awarding of a prize ball, operation of the probability changing function, A privilege granting means for giving a function operation and the like, and an operation accepting means for accepting a player's operation.

  The accumulation display mode control means is a mode associated with a display that prompts the player to operate the operation receiving means when a specific condition (for example, when a predetermined lottery is won) is satisfied. The accumulated display can be displayed in an operation promotion display mode. Then, the accumulation display displayed in the operation promotion display mode when the change condition including that the player's operation by the operation receiving means is received while the accumulation display is displayed in the operation promotion display mode is displayed. Then, the display can be changed to an expectation suggestion display mode that suggests an expectation that the lottery result based on the lottery information corresponding to the accumulated display is a big hit.

  As a result, whether or not the lottery information for which the start condition is not satisfied is expected to be displayed on the accumulation display (pending display or the like) indicating that the lottery information is accumulated, indicating whether the lottery information is accumulated. It is possible to provide a new production that is left to the selection of the person. For example, if the player wants to concentrate on lottery information for which the start conditions have already been established, or if he / she is informed that his / her expectations for future lottery are low, he / she should not operate the operation accepting means. Thus, it can be selected not to derive the expectation suggestion effect. On the other hand, when it is desired to quickly obtain the jackpot expectation degree for the future lottery, it is possible to select to derive the expectation suggestion effect by not operating the operation receiving means.

  As a result, it is possible to select the player's preference how long before the player knows the degree of expectation before the player knows that the lottery result has been definitely notified and the player has won the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for various players, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

[Technology 3]
Detection means (a first start port sensor 2011, a second start port sensor 2349) for detecting that a game ball has passed a predetermined area;
Lottery information acquisition means (first special random number generation means 4212 and first special symbol hold storage means 4214, second special random number generation means 4222 and second special symbol) for acquiring lottery information based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Holding storage means 4224);
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a lottery is performed based on the lottery information for which a start condition is established, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including jackpots and loses. Lottery means (main control MPU 4100a executing step S1310 of FIG. 229);
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, lottery information storage unit (first special symbol hold storage unit) that can store a lot of lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition until the start condition is satisfied. 4214, second special symbol holding storage means 4224),
When the lottery result is a jackpot, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to the player (FIG. 244: main control MPU 4100a performing a special electric utility jackpot control process);
An effect deriving means (liquid crystal display device 1400, sub liquid crystal unit 2350, shutter-type accessory 3002, below) that can derive an effect including a specific expectation suggestion effect that is a specific effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit Side accessory unit 3003),
Production control means (main control MPU 4100a and peripheral control MPU 4140a) for determining the content of the production and deriving the production of the production content determined by the production derivation means;
An operation accepting means (such as the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370) for accepting the player's operation;
In a gaming machine comprising
The production control means includes
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information stored in the lottery information storage unit later than the first lottery information is established. Specific expectation suggestion effect derivation deciding means (FIG. 227) that can determine whether or not the production content for the first lottery information whose start condition is established earlier than the second lottery information is determined. 228, the main control MPU 4100a that performs the first and second special symbol advance processing shown in FIG. 228, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a that performs Step S505 of the hold display processing shown in FIG.
The specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information is determined although the specific expectation suggestion effect derivation determination means determines that the specific expectation suggestion effect is derived for the second lottery information. Production derivation standby control means (peripheral control MPU 4140a) capable of causing the production derivation means to wait.
An operation promotion notice for a specific expectation suggestion effect for urging the player to operate the operation accepting means when the deriving of the specific expectation suggestion effect is waiting by the effect derivation standby control means (shown in FIG. 252) A specific expectation degree suggesting operation promotion notification means (peripheral control MPU 4140a) for performing the button image BTN1),
Release condition determination means (peripheral control MPU 4140a) that determines whether or not a release condition including that the player's operation by the operation reception means has been received while waiting for the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect has been established )When,
When it is determined by the release condition determination means that the release condition is satisfied, the start condition is established later than the first lottery information and the first lottery information, and the start condition is determined from the second lottery information. If there is other lottery information that is quickly established, whether or not the production contents for the other lottery information have been determined, and if there is the first lottery information and the other lottery information, Regardless of whether or not the effect on other lottery information is derived to the effect deriving unit, the waiting by the effect deriving standby control unit is canceled and the derivation is determined by the specific expectation suggesting effect deriving determining unit. Standby release control means (peripheral control MPU 4140a) capable of causing the effect deriving means to derive a specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information being
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the above gaming machine, lottery information is acquired based on detection that a game ball has passed a predetermined area. Then, among the acquired lottery information, a lottery based on the lottery information for which the start condition is satisfied is performed, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including a jackpot and a loss. The predetermined area includes a winning opening that triggers a lottery of special symbols, a gate (through) that triggers a lottery of ordinary symbols, and the like.

  In addition, the gaming machine has a lottery information storage means that can store a lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition among the lottery information until the start condition is satisfied. In this case, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege (awarding of a prize ball, an operation of a probability changing function, an operation of a short time function, etc.) to the player is provided.

  In addition, the gaming machine is an effect deriving unit (liquid crystal display) capable of deriving an effect including a specific expectation suggestion effect (display of a specific character image, etc.) that is a specific effect suggesting an expectation that the lottery result is a big hit. An image display device such as a display device, a decorative body having a light emitter such as an LED, a movable accessory, etc.) and an effect control means for determining the content of the effect and deriving the effect of the effect content determined by the effect deriving means ( Computer for controlling the effect deriving means) and operation accepting means for accepting the player's operation (for example, buttons provided on the gaming machine).

  The effect control means includes a specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means that is later established than the first lottery information among the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. The derivation can be determined regardless of whether or not the production content for the first lottery information whose start condition is established earlier than the second lottery information is determined.

  In addition, the production control means determines the specific expectation degree for the second lottery information even though the specific expectation suggestion effect derivation decision means determines the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information. It is possible to wait for the suggestion effect to be derived to the effect deriving means. Then, when the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect is awaited, an operation promotion notification for the specific expectation suggestion effect for prompting the player to operate the operation accepting unit is performed.

  Then, the effect control means includes a release condition (a button provided on the gaming machine by the player) including that the player's operation is accepted by the operation accepting means while the specific expectation suggesting effect is being derived. If the operation accepting means such as the first lottery operation is established, the start condition is established more slowly than the first lottery information and the first lottery information, and the start condition is established earlier than the second lottery information. If there is information, the effect on the other lottery information has been determined, and if there is the first lottery information and other lottery information, the effect on the other lottery information is produced. Regardless of whether or not it has been derived by the deriving means, it is possible to cancel the waiting for deriving and cause the effect deriving means to derive the specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information.

  As a result, the derivation of the specific expectation suggesting effect is derived for the second lottery information whose establishment of the start condition is later than that of the first lottery information, and the effect of the first lottery information whose establishment of the start condition is earlier than that of the second lottery information. Regardless of whether or not the content has been decided, it is determined and waited, and at the timing when the release condition involving the player is established, the start condition is established later than the first lottery information and the first lottery information. Whether or not the production contents for other lottery information whose start condition is established earlier than the second lottery information has been determined, and the production for the first lottery information and other lottery information are derived to the production deriving means. Regardless of whether or not, the specific expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree of jackpot can be derived for the second lottery information, so that the effective period of establishment of the release condition can be ensured for a long time.

  Therefore, during the effective period of establishment of the release condition that is secured for a long time, the player can establish the release condition that the player is involved at the desired timing, and can see the jackpot expectation suggestion effect at that timing. For example, if the player does not want to know the jackpot expectation level, the release condition may not be satisfied, and if the player wants to know the jackpot expectation level early, the release condition may be satisfied earlier. As a result, it is possible to select the player's preference how long before the player knows the degree of expectation before the player knows that the lottery result has been definitely notified and the player has won the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for various players, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

[Technology 4]
Detection means (a first start port sensor 2011, a second start port sensor 2349) for detecting that a game ball has passed a predetermined area;
Lottery information acquisition means (first special random number generation means 4212 and first special symbol hold storage means 4214, second special random number generation means 4222 and second special symbol) for acquiring lottery information based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Holding storage means 4224);
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a lottery is performed based on the lottery information for which a start condition is established, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including jackpots and loses. Lottery means (main control MPU 4100a executing step S1310 of FIG. 229);
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, lottery information storage unit (first special symbol hold storage unit) that can store a lot of lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition until the start condition is satisfied. 4214, second special symbol holding storage means 4224),
Special symbol display means (first special symbol display 641, second special symbol display 642) for displaying the change and stop of special symbols for each lottery by the lottery means,
When the lottery result is a jackpot, a bonus granting unit (Fig. 244: main control MPU 4100a for performing a special electric utility jackpot control process) for granting a bonus to the player after the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed;
An effect deriving means (liquid crystal display device 1400, sub liquid crystal unit 2350, shutter-type accessory 3002, below) that can derive an effect including a specific expectation suggestion effect that is a specific effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result is a big hit Side accessory unit 3003),
Production control means (main control MPU 4100a and peripheral control MPU 4140a) for determining the content of the production and deriving the production of the production content decided by the production derivation unit;
An operation accepting means (such as the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370) for accepting the player's operation;
In a gaming machine comprising
The production control means includes
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition unit, derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information stored in the lottery information storage unit later than the first lottery information is established. Specific expectation suggestion effect derivation deciding means (FIG. 227) that can determine whether or not the production content for the first lottery information whose start condition is established earlier than the second lottery information is determined. 228, the main control MPU 4100a that performs the first and second special symbol advance processing shown in FIG. 228, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a that performs Step S505 of the hold display processing shown in FIG.
The specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information is determined although the specific expectation suggestion effect derivation determination means determines that the specific expectation suggestion effect is derived for the second lottery information. Production derivation standby control means (peripheral control MPU 4140a) capable of causing the production derivation means to wait.
An operation promotion notice for a specific expectation suggestion effect for urging the player to operate the operation accepting means when the deriving of the specific expectation suggestion effect is waiting by the effect derivation standby control means (shown in FIG. 252) A specific expectation degree suggesting operation promotion notification means (peripheral control MPU 4140a) for performing the button image BTN1),
Release condition determination means (peripheral control MPU 4140a) that determines whether or not a release condition including that the player's operation by the operation reception means has been received while waiting for the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect has been established )When,
When it is determined by the release condition determination means that the release condition is satisfied, the start condition is established later than the first lottery information and the first lottery information, and the start condition is determined from the second lottery information. If there is other lottery information that is quickly established, whether or not the production contents for the other lottery information have been determined, and if there is the first lottery information and the other lottery information, Regardless of whether or not the effect on other lottery information is derived to the effect deriving unit, the waiting by the effect deriving standby control unit is canceled and the derivation is determined by the specific expectation suggesting effect deriving determining unit. Standby release control means (peripheral control MPU 4140a) capable of causing the effect deriving means to derive a specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information being
Have
The effective period in which the operation accepting unit accepts the player's operation is started from the time when the specific expectation suggesting effect operation promotion notification is performed, and may be over a plurality of times of the variation time of the special symbol. A gaming machine.

  In the above gaming machine, lottery information is acquired based on detection that a game ball has passed a predetermined area. Then, among the acquired lottery information, a lottery based on the lottery information for which the start condition is satisfied is performed, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including a jackpot and a loss. The predetermined area includes a winning opening that triggers a lottery of special symbols, a gate (through) that triggers a lottery of ordinary symbols, and the like.

  In addition, the gaming machine includes lottery information storage means that can store lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition among the lottery information by an upper limit number (for example, four) until the start condition is satisfied, and lottery by the lottery means. Special symbol display means to display the change and stop of the special symbol every time, and when the lottery result is a win, a privilege (awarding of a prize ball, operation of the probability variation function, operation of the short-time function, etc.) is given to the player Privilege granting means.

  In addition, the gaming machine is an effect deriving unit (liquid crystal display) capable of deriving an effect including a specific expectation suggestion effect (display of a specific character image, etc.) that is a specific effect suggesting an expectation that the lottery result is a big hit. An image display device such as a display device, a decorative body having a light emitter such as an LED, a movable accessory, etc.) and an effect control means for determining the content of the effect and deriving the effect of the effect content determined by the effect deriving means ( Computer for controlling the effect deriving means) and operation accepting means for accepting the player's operation (for example, buttons provided on the gaming machine).

  The effect control means includes a specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means that is later established than the first lottery information among the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means. The derivation can be determined regardless of whether or not the production content for the first lottery information whose start condition is established earlier than the second lottery information is determined.

  In addition, the production control means determines the specific expectation degree for the second lottery information even though the specific expectation suggestion effect derivation decision means determines the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect for the second lottery information. It is possible to wait for the suggestion effect to be derived to the effect deriving means. Then, when the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect is awaited, an operation promotion notification for the specific expectation suggestion effect for prompting the player to operate the operation accepting unit is performed.

  Then, when the release condition including that the player's operation by the operation accepting unit is accepted while waiting for the derivation of the specific expectation suggesting effect is awaited, the effect control unit has the first lottery information and If there is other lottery information whose start condition is established later than the first lottery information and the start condition is established earlier than the second lottery information, whether or not the production content for the other lottery information has been determined, And when there is the first lottery information and the other lottery information, the second waiting state is canceled regardless of whether or not the effect on the other lottery information is derived to the effect deriving means. It is possible to cause the effect deriving means to derive a specific expectation suggestion effect for the lottery information.

  Here, the valid period during which the operation accepting means accepts the player's operation is started from the time when the specific expectation suggesting effect operation promotion notification is made, and may extend over a plurality of special symbol fluctuation times. It is possible to ensure a long effective period of establishment.

  Therefore, during the effective period of establishment of the release condition that is secured for a long time, the player can operate the operation accepting means at the desired timing to establish the release condition, and can see the jackpot expectation suggestion effect at that timing. it can. For example, if the player does not want to know the jackpot expectation level, the release condition may not be satisfied, and if the player wants to know the jackpot expectation level early, the release condition may be satisfied earlier. As a result, it is possible to select the player's preference how long before the player knows the degree of expectation before the player knows that the lottery result has been definitely notified and the player has won the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for various players, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

[Technology 5]
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4,
The effect control means is a means for deriving to the effect deriving means a changing effect that is an effect related to the lottery information corresponding to the change during the change of the special symbol, and the operation as the changing effect It is possible to derive an operation reception effect that is performed in response to the player's reception by the reception unit, and is a notification that is different from the operation promotion notification for the specific expectation suggestion effect, and for the operation reception effect, There is a changing effect deriving means (peripheral control MPU 4140a for executing the changing effect process in FIG. 254) capable of performing an operation promotion notification for changing effect for prompting the player to perform an operation,
The in-fluctuation effect operation promotion notification during the in-fluctuation effect deriving unit and the specific expectation-indicating effect operation promotion notification by the specified expectation degree suggestion operation promotion notification unit are simultaneously performed. A case can occur (see FIG. 255),
When the operation-promoting notification for changing effects during the effect-in-progress during the changing-effects deriving means and the operation-promoting notification for specific expectation-indicating effects by the operation-promoting notifying means for the specific expectation-inducing effect are performed at the same time The release condition determining means establishes the release condition for releasing the waiting for the specific expectation suggestion effect even when the player's operation by the operation accepting means is accepted during the change. By not doing so, the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect is waited until at least the next change of the change.

  According to the above gaming machine, an operation promotion notification for changing effects for changing effects related to the lottery information for which the start condition is satisfied (for example, display of a button image that triggers a so-called cut-in display in the changing effects), A specific expectation suggestion effect operation promotion notification for a specific expectation suggestion effect regarding the second lottery information (pending lottery information) (for example, a button image displayed on a hold display corresponding to the second lottery information) Can be made at the same time, so the player feels that there is a possibility that a high degree of expectation can be produced with multiple fluctuations. It can connect the expectation to the later change. In addition, the derivation of the specific expectation suggestion effect can be maintained over a long period of time by counting on the next change.

[Technology 6]
In the gaming machine described in technical idea 5,
When the operation-promoting notification for changing effects during the effect-in-progress during the changing-effects deriving means and the operation-promoting notification for specific expectation-indicating effects by the operation-promoting notifying means for the specific expectation-inducing effect are performed at the same time In this change, the player operates the operation receiving means during the change by changing the display mode of the operation expectation notification for the specific expectation suggesting effect by the operation promotion notifying means for the specific expectation suggesting effect during the change. Even so, it is suggested that the specific expectation suggestion effect is not derived until the next change of the change (see FIGS. 256 and 257).

  According to the above gaming machine, during the change, the player can change the display mode of the specific expectation suggestion effect operation promotion notification by the specific expectation suggestion operation promotion notification means so that the player can operate the operation during the change. Even if the accepting means is operated, the specific expectation suggesting effect suggests that it is not derived until the next change of the change. Therefore, if the player operates the operation accepting means, the operation promotion notification for the effect during change is performed. It is understood that the operation acceptance effect as the changing effect corresponding to is derived, and the specific expectation suggesting effect for the second lottery information is not derived, so the player's confusion due to a plurality of operation promotion notifications Can be suppressed.

[Technology 7]
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 4 to 6,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect control means includes an operation validity period suggesting means for displaying an operation validity period suggestion display that suggests to the player an effective period in which the operation acceptance means accepts a player's operation.

  According to the gaming machine, the operation accepting unit can receive the player's operation over a plurality of variable periods, and the player can see the specific expectation suggestion effect at a timing that the player likes. The player does not know whether the valid period for accepting the player's operation is long or short if only the operation promotion notification for the specific expectation suggestion effect is made. You won't get. Therefore, since the operation effective period suggestion display that suggests the effective period to the player is displayed, the player understands that the effective period of the button is long, and can feel the specific expectation suggestion effect at a desired timing with peace of mind.

[Technology 8]
Detection means (a first start port sensor 2011, a second start port sensor 2349) for detecting that a game ball has passed a predetermined area;
Lottery information acquisition means (first special random number generation means 4212 and first special symbol hold storage means 4214, second special random number generation means 4222 and second special symbol) for acquiring lottery information based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Holding storage means 4224);
Among the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a lottery based on lottery information for which a predetermined start condition is established is performed, and one type of lottery result is selected from a plurality of types of lottery results including winning and losing. Lottery means to determine (main control MPU 4100a executing step S1310 of FIG. 229);
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the lottery information storage means (first special symbol hold storage means 4214, second one) that can store the lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition until the start condition is satisfied. Two special symbol storage means 4224),
When the lottery result is a win, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege to the player;
An operation accepting means (such as the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370) for accepting the player's operation;
When a lottery based on the lottery information stored in the lottery information storage unit is performed by the lottery unit, the type of lottery result that can be taken by the lottery result is determined using the lottery information and Prior determination means for determining prior to the lottery by the lottery means (main control MPU 4100a performing the first and second special symbol advance processing shown in FIGS. 227 and 228),
Prior to using the preceding determination result to determine whether or not to perform an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that the lottery result of the lottery is a win prior to the establishment of the start condition and the lottery by the lottery means Production determination means (FIG. 251: peripheral control MPU 4140a executing steps S502 and S503);
When it is determined by the preceding effect determining means that an expected degree suggesting effect is to be performed, an operation promotion display that prompts the player to operate the operation accepting means can be displayed prior to the expectation suggesting effect, and the operation Preceding effect means (peripheral control MPU 4140a: see FIG. 252) capable of executing the expectation suggestion effect when the player's operation is accepted by the operation accepting means while displaying the promotion display;
Having a gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine, the lottery information is acquired based on the detection that the game ball has passed the predetermined area. And among the acquired lottery information, a lottery based on lottery information for which a predetermined start condition is established is performed, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including winning and losing. Furthermore, lottery information storage means that can store lottery information for which the start condition is not satisfied among the acquired lottery information until the start condition is satisfied is provided. Furthermore, it has a preceding determination means for determining the types of lottery results that can be taken by the lottery result of the lottery based on the lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means prior to the establishment of the start condition and the lottery.

  Then, using the preceding determination result, prior to the establishment of the start condition and the lottery by the lottery means, it is determined whether or not to perform an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation that the lottery result of the lottery is a hit. When it is determined that an expectation suggestion effect is to be performed, an operation prompt display that prompts the player to operate the operation accepting means is displayed prior to the expectation suggestion effect, and an operation is performed while the operation prompt display is displayed. When the player's operation is received by the receiving means, the expectation suggestion effect can be executed. As a result, the player operates the operation accepting means at a desired timing from the timing when the operation promotion display is displayed until the start condition is established for the target lottery process, and the expectation indication is displayed at that timing. Can see. For example, if the player does not want to know the degree of expectation until the actual lottery process is performed, the player does not have to operate the operation accepting unit. Just operate. As a result, it is possible to select the player's preference as to how long the player expects the winning expectation before the player knows that the winning is actually notified by the display means or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for various players, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation.

[Technology 9]
Detection means (a first start port sensor 2011, a second start port sensor 2349) for detecting that a game ball has passed a predetermined area;
Lottery information acquisition means (first special random number generation means 4212 and first special symbol hold storage means 4214, second special random number generation means 4222 and second special symbol) for acquiring lottery information based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Holding storage means 4224);
Among the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a lottery based on lottery information for which a predetermined start condition is established is performed, and one type of lottery result is selected from a plurality of types of lottery results including winning and losing. Lottery means to determine (main control MPU 4100a executing step S1310 of FIG. 229);
Of the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the lottery information storage means (first special symbol hold storage means 4214, second one) that can store the lottery information that does not satisfy the start condition until the start condition is satisfied. Two special symbol storage means 4224),
An accumulation display means (holding display such as FIG. 250) for displaying an accumulation display (holding display HR1, HR2, etc. such as FIG. 250) indicating that the lottery information is stored by the lottery information storage means;
Accumulation display mode control means (peripheral control MPU 4140a for holding display in FIG. 251) for controlling the display mode of the accumulation display displayed on the accumulation display means;
When the lottery result is a win, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege to the player (FIG. 244: main control MPU 4100a performing a special electric utility jackpot control process);
An operation accepting means (such as the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370) for accepting the player's operation;
When a lottery based on the lottery information stored in the lottery information storage unit is performed by the lottery unit, the type of lottery result that can be taken by the lottery result is determined using the lottery information and Prior determination means for determining prior to the lottery by the lottery means (main control MPU 4100a performing the first and second special symbol advance processing shown in FIGS. 227 and 228),
With
The accumulated display mode control means includes:
Using the determination result of the preceding determination means, a normal display that does not suggest the expected degree that the lottery result based on the lottery information is win, the accumulated display corresponding to the lottery information determined by the preceding determination means Display mode determining means for determining whether to set an aspect or an expectation suggestion display form that suggests an expected degree of winning based on the lottery information (FIG. 251: peripheral control MPU 4140a that executes steps S502 and S503) )When,
When the display mode determining means determines that the accumulated display is the expected level suggesting display mode, prior to displaying the accumulated display in the expected level suggesting display mode, the operation of the operation accepting unit is performed on the accumulated display. Display when the player's operation is received by the operation receiving means while the accumulated display is displayed in the operation promotion display mode. Display mode changing means (peripheral control MPU 4140a: see FIG. 252) capable of changing the accumulated display displayed in the operation promotion display mode to the display in the expectation suggestion display mode;
Having a gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine, the lottery information is acquired based on the detection that the game ball has passed the predetermined area. And among the acquired lottery information, a lottery based on lottery information for which a predetermined start condition is established is performed, and one type of lottery result is determined from a plurality of types of lottery results including winning and losing. Further, among the acquired lottery information, lottery information for which the start condition is not satisfied can be stored until the start condition is satisfied, and storage for displaying an accumulation display indicating that the lottery information has been stored. Display means are provided. Furthermore, it has a preceding determination means for determining the types of lottery results that can be taken by the lottery result of the lottery based on the lottery information stored in the lottery information storage means prior to the establishment of the start condition and the lottery.

  Then, the accumulated display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the accumulated display uses the determination result of the preceding determination means to set the accumulated display to the normal display mode or to the expectation level for winning (for example, big hit). If it is determined whether the expected indication suggesting display mode is to be used and the accumulated display is determined to be the expected indication display mode, the accumulated display is displayed prior to displaying the accumulated display in the expected indication display mode. It is possible to change the accumulated display that is displayed in the operation promotion display mode and displayed in the operation promotion display mode when the player's operation is received to the display in the expectation level suggestion display mode. As a result, the player operates the operation accepting means at a desired timing until the start condition is established for the lottery information corresponding to the accumulated display from the timing when the accumulated display is displayed in the operation promotion display mode. Accumulated display in an expected level suggestion mode can be seen at the timing. For example, if the player does not want to know the degree of expectation until the actual lottery process is performed, the player does not have to operate the operation accepting unit. Just operate. As a result, it is possible to select the player's preference as to how long the player expects the winning expectation before the player knows that the winning is actually notified by the display means or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for various players, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation. Further, in the operation promotion display mode, the display that prompts the player to operate the operation accepting unit is performed in a mode associated with the accumulated display. Therefore, the display in which the player prompts the player to operate the operation accepting unit satisfies the start condition. Whether it is related to lottery information (related to current lottery information) or to lottery information for which start conditions are not satisfied (related to lottery information that is stored (held)) Recognition can be suppressed.

[Configuration of game board in the present embodiment]
FIG. 285 shows an external configuration of the game board 4 in the present embodiment.

  The game board 4 includes a game area 605. In the center of the game area 605, a center accessory 2300 is installed, and a decorative symbol display unit 1400 is installed inside the center accessory 2300.

  Around the center accessory 2300, there are a number of obstacle nails 605A, a first gate 2200A, a second gate 2200B, a first start port 2001, a second start port 2002, a normal electric accessory 2337, and a special electric accessory 2000. Installed.

  A number of obstacle nails 605A are scattered and installed in the game area 605, and the game balls P launched in the game area 605 are caused to flow down while rolling. The first gate 2200A and the second gate 2200B are respectively installed on the left and right sides with the center accessory 2300 as the center.

  The first start port 2001 is arranged at the center lower side of the center accessory 2300. The second start port 2002 is arranged on the right side of the center accessory 2300.

  The ordinary electric accessory 2337 is arranged on the right side with the center accessory 2300 as the center. The ordinary electric accessory 2337 is configured to include a movable piece 2337A, and opens and closes the second start port 2002 by operating the movable piece 2337A. The special electric accessory 2000 is arranged below the center accessory 2300. The special electric accessory 2000 includes an opening / closing member 2000A, and opens / closes the big prize opening 2003 by operating the opening / closing member 2000A.

  In the case of a normal game, the player fires the game ball P so that the game ball P flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2300 so that the game ball P enters the first start port 2001. This is called “left-handed”. When left-handed, the possibility that the game ball P passes through the second gate 2200B is high, and the possibility that it passes through the first gate 2200A is low.

  When the game ball P passes through the second gate 2200B by left-handed, the normal symbol changes with this. This fluctuation of the normal symbol is called “specific lottery”. When a winning symbol predetermined in the specific lottery is won, the movable piece 2337A is opened, and the game ball P can easily enter the second start port 2002.

  Further, when the game ball P enters the first start port 2001 by left-handed, the first special symbol changes with this. The fluctuation of the first special symbol is called “special lottery”. When a predetermined winning symbol is won in the special lottery, the opening / closing member 2000A is opened, and the game ball P can easily enter the big winning opening 2003. In addition, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state. The “special gaming state” referred to here is a gaming state including a so-called “big hit gaming state” and a “probability varying gaming state” after the jackpot gaming state, and does not include a so-called “short-time gaming state”. Say.

  In the case of a special game state, the player fires the game ball P so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2300 in order to enter the game ball P into the grand prize winning port 2003. This is called “right-handed”. When hitting right, the possibility that the game ball P passes through the first gate 2200A is high, and the possibility that the game ball P passes through the second gate 2200B is low.

  When the game ball P enters the big winning opening 2003 by right-handed, the player is given a privilege of paying out the game ball.

  When the game ball P enters the second starting port 2002 by right-handed, the player is given a privilege of paying out the game ball and the second special symbol changes. Changing the second special symbol is referred to as “special lottery” as in the case of the first special symbol. Then, when a winning symbol predetermined in the special lottery is won, a privilege such as continuation of the special gaming state is given.

  Here, in the case of the special gaming state, the winning probability of the special lottery varies, and the winning probability of the specific lottery also varies. Specifically, the opening probability of the movable piece 2337A is higher in the special gaming state than in the normal gaming state, and the opening time is longer. Therefore, in the special game state, the movable piece 2337A is opened and the game ball P can easily enter the second starting port 2002. And more specific lotteries will be performed than in the normal gaming state.

  Generally, in the normal gaming state, the game ball P is made to enter the first starting port 2001 by left-handed to change the first special symbol, and in the special game state, the game ball P is moved to the right by first-handing. A game is played in which the second special symbol is changed by entering the second starting port 2002. That is, a game is performed in which two different special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are changed according to the gaming state. This is because there are differences such as that the jackpot with the second special symbol has more balls than the jackpot with the first special symbol, and the additional condition of the short-time function is preferential, etc. It is for granting.

  In the short-time game state after the special game state, the right hand is continued. As a result, the probability that the game ball P enters the first start port 2001 corresponding to the first special symbol is low, so even if the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted, It is possible to prevent the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the second special symbol with respect to the sphere, from fluctuating.

  By the way, as described above, in the special game state, the game is played by right-handed. Accordingly, the game ball P passes through the first gate 2200A, thereby opening the movable piece 2337A, and opening the movable piece 2337A makes it easier for the game ball P to enter the second starting port 2002. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the game is played by left-handed. Therefore, even if the game ball P passes through the second gate 2200B and the movable piece 2337A is thereby opened, the game ball P does not enter the second start port 2002 only by making a left turn.

  In the normal gaming state, the player is watching the decorative symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 1400 and various effects, so that the game ball P passes through the second gate 2200B, thereby opening the movable piece 2337A. Even if you do, you often don't notice the opening itself. Even if the user notices that the movable piece 2337A has been opened, it is difficult to cause the game ball P to enter the second start port 2002. This is because in the normal gaming state, the movable piece 2337A is opened only for about 0.1 seconds, and it is almost instantaneous, so the player temporarily notices that the movable piece 2337A is open and rushes to the right This is because the movable piece 2337A is closed by the time the game ball P launched at the switching timing reaches the second start port 2002 even if the hit is switched.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a launch direction suggestion effect process for displaying the launch direction suggestion effect on the decorative symbol display unit 1400 is performed. The launch direction suggestion effect process is, for example, a privilege given to a player who is given a certain point, and is a process that suggests the timing when the movable piece 2337A is released.

  Through the launch direction suggestion effect process, the player can recognize the timing for switching from left-handed to right-handed, and can receive a prize ball by causing the game ball P to enter the second start port 2002. Further, the player can receive an opportunity to change the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the first special symbol with respect to the winning ball.

[Specifications of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment operates with the following specifications under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

Payout: 3 balls (starting port)
: 10 balls (ordinary winning entrance)
: 15 balls (big prize opening)
Jackpot probability: Normal gaming state (1/399)
: Special gaming state with probability change function activated (1 / 9.925)
Small hit probability: 1st special symbol (1 / 99.25)
: Second special design (none)
Number of rounds: 5R (round) constant Count number: 7 pieces per round Time-saving function: 1st special design (actually 0 or 30 times depending on the design)
: 2nd special symbol (activate 30 times after all jackpots)
Probability function operation rate: 100% (ST5 times)
Normal symbol winning probability: Normal (1 / 50.5)
: High accuracy (1 / 1.0)

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability in the normal gaming state is “1/399”, and a gaming machine adopting this jackpot probability of 1/399 is generally called “Max”. Max is probabilistically difficult to win, and by applying the present invention to this Max gaming machine, it is possible to give the player a performance and payout of the game ball, so until the jackpot is pulled It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play which can be reduced during the period.

[Opening / closing pattern of normal electric accessory (movable piece)]
FIG. 286 (A) shows an opening / closing pattern A of the movable piece 2337A that causes the ordinary electric accessory 2337 to open / close in the normal gaming state. The opening / closing pattern A is stored in advance by the main control MPU 4100a, and is referred to during the specific lottery.

  The opening / closing pattern A is composed of a symbol field, a random number field, an opening frequency field, and an opening / closing pattern field. A predetermined winning symbol is stored in the symbol column, a random number corresponding to the winning symbol is stored in the random number column, and the number of releases corresponding to the winning symbol is stored in the number-of-opens column. Stores an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the winning symbol.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 286 (A), for example, “symbol 3” is won when the random number acquired in the normal gaming state is “30 to 33”, and when winning with “symbol 3”, the movable piece 2337A Is opened "one time" that allows the game ball P to enter except for the fake that is opened for 0.1 second, and the opening / closing pattern for that one opening is "0.1 second open", "2 second closed" ”,“ 1.7 second open ”,“ 2 second closed ”, and“ 0.1 second open ”.

  In addition, after “0.1 second release”, which is the first fake release, is performed, “second closure” is performed, so that the player has time to recognize the launch direction suggesting effect. Can do. And even if it is a case where any symbol of “symbol 1” to “symbol 7” is won, the first time when the normal symbol of “symbol 1” is won by the opening of the first fake. The opening of the fake acts as a “fake”.

  Further, the “fake” in the case where the normal symbol of “symbol 1” is won can suppress the player's irregular game. For example, when the player is left-handed in the normal gaming state, if the player recognizes “0.1 second release” that is the first fake release of the movable piece 2337A, then the second time after “second closure” At the time of opening “1.7 seconds open”, the game ball P is to be switched from the left-handed to the right-handed in order to enter the second starting port 2002. However, if there is “fake” in the first release at this time, the second release “1.7 second release” may not be performed even if it is right-handed. Therefore, if the player has such experience, even if the winning symbol “symbol 3” is won, the irregular game that switches from left-handed to right-handed will not be performed.

  Also, when the normal symbol of “symbol 3” is won, “0.1 second release” that is the first fake release and “1.7 second release” that is the second release (substantially the first release). Since there is a “closed for 2 seconds”, a “launching direction suggesting effect” described later can be performed. Then, the game ball P fired after switching from left-handed to right-handed by the launch direction suggesting effect is displayed at the second start opening 2002 at the time of “1.7 second release” which is the second release (substantially the first release). It can be reached.

  In addition, the time of “2 second closing” after “0.1 second opening” that is the first fake opening and “1.7 second opening” that is the second opening (substantially the first opening) is the launch time. When the direction suggestion effect is not performed, even when switching from left-handed to right-handed, the game ball P is opened to the second starting port 2002 at the time of “1.7 second release” which is the second release (substantially the first release). It must be set so that it cannot be reached.

  Of the “symbols 1 to 7”, “symbol 1” may be referred to as a pseudo-hit symbol, and “symbols 2 to 7” may be referred to as a true hit symbol.

  FIG. 286 (B) shows an opening / closing pattern B of the movable piece 2337A that is opened / closed by the ordinary electric accessory 2337 in the short-time gaming state after the special gaming state. The opening / closing pattern B is stored in advance by the main control MPU 4100a, and is referred to during the specific lottery.

  The open / close pattern B, like the open / close pattern A, includes a symbol field, a random number field, an open count field, and an open / close pattern field. A predetermined winning symbol is stored in the symbol column, a random number corresponding to the winning symbol is stored in the random number column, and the number of releases corresponding to the winning symbol is stored in the number-of-opens column. Stores an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the winning symbol.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 286 (B), for example, “symbol 2” is won when the random number acquired in the short-time gaming state is “25-49”, and when winning with “symbol 2”, the movable piece 2337A Is opened “one time”, and the opening / closing pattern in the one opening is “open for 5 seconds”.

[Regular lottery (specific lottery)]
In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a uses the following random numbers for the specific symbol specific lottery.
Random number per normal symbol: 0-100
Win value: 0, 2 at low probability
: High accuracy time 0-100
Design random numbers: 0-49
Design 1: 0-24
Other designs (design 2 etc.): 25-49

  According to this random number of normal symbols, for example, the winning probability of winning symbols in the case of low probability is about “100” random numbers per normal symbol and “2” hit values of 0 and 2 Therefore, it is “1/50”. If the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds on average (see FIG. 287), it can fluctuate 6 times at the maximum in 60 seconds (1 minute), so that it fluctuates 360 times per hour (60 minutes). Accordingly, the winning symbol winning count in terms of probability is calculated as 7 times per hour (60 minutes) (“1/50” × “360 times”). Therefore, when the symbol 1 and other symbols (for example, symbol 2) are selected with a probability of 1: 1, the number of opening of the movable piece 2337A is 3 to 4 times. In the special gaming state or the short-time gaming state, the opening time of the movable piece 2337A is set to the same time regardless of whether the symbol 1 is won or the other symbols are won.

  FIG. 287 shows a normal symbol variation pattern. The normal symbol variation pattern is stored in advance by the main control MPU 4100a, and is referred to during the specific lottery.

  The normal symbol variation pattern is composed of a variation pattern column, a random number column, and a variation seconds column. The variation pattern column stores a variation pattern prepared in advance, the random number column stores a random number corresponding to the variation pattern, and the variation seconds column stores the variation seconds corresponding to the variation pattern. .

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 287, “variation 1” is won when the acquired random number is “0 to 24”, and the normal symbol fluctuates over “5 seconds”. As shown in FIG. 287, the variation pattern in the present embodiment includes “4” patterns from “variation 1” to “variation 4”, and the total number of variation seconds of each variation pattern is “40” seconds. Therefore, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol is “10” seconds (40 seconds / 4 patterns).

[Special design lottery (Special lottery)]
In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 4100a uses the following random numbers for the special symbol special lottery.
Jackpot random number: 0 to 398
Big hit value: 0 at low probability
: High accuracy time 0-39
Small hit value: 100 to 103

[Outline of special lottery]
The main control MPU 4100a acquires a random number when the game ball P enters the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, and based on the acquired random number, A special lottery is performed to determine which of the symbols. Examples of random numbers to be acquired include “reach random numbers” and “design variation random numbers”. The main control MPU 4100a determines the variation pattern based on the symbols determined in the special lottery. Examples of the variation pattern to be determined include a “loss variation pattern” and a “reach variation pattern”. The main control MPU 4100a performs a reach lottery regarding whether or not to perform a reach effect after performing a special lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the probability that a reach effect is performed (reach probability) varies depending on whether or not there is a hold when a special symbol start condition is satisfied (at the start of fluctuation). The reach probability is as low as 1/20, for example, when four holds are stored, and the fluctuation pattern of the shortest time is easily selected. On the other hand, when there is no hold at the start of the change, the reach effect is easily executed. The reach probability in this case is as high as 1/10, for example, and a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected. With such a specification, the hole can increase the efficiency of fluctuation and improve the sales, and the player can continue the game smoothly.

  For reach production, for example, after the decorative patterns on the left and right stop, the central decorative design simply stops after a delay, and the villain appears after the hero of the animated character appears as a reach production that further enhances the expectation. There is a super reach production that will be a big hit when defeated, and as a reach production that further enhances expectations, there is a live-action reach production where live-action heroes appear.

[Pending prefetch processing]
The main control MPU 4100a performs a hold-ahead read-ahead process when the game ball P enters the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002. The main control MPU 4100a shows a normal expectation degree hold on the decorative symbol display unit 1400 by, for example, white “o” by the hold pre-reading process, and a high expectation hold such that the winning symbol is won in the special lottery. Is represented by “o” in red or blue, for example. Thus, by differentiating the display between the normal hold and the hold with high expectation, the player's feeling of excitement when the hold with high expectation is digested can be given and the game motivation can be maintained.

[Type of first special symbol]
FIG. 288 (A) shows a random number table A for the first special symbol. The first special symbol is a special symbol that is changed when the game ball P enters the first starting port 2001.

  The random number table A for the first special symbol is composed of a type column, a random number column, a probability variation column, and a time reduction column. In the type column, a predetermined winning symbol is stored, and in the random number column, a predetermined random number is stored. Also, the probability change column stores the presence / absence of the probability change corresponding to a predetermined winning symbol and the number of rounds, and the time reduction column stores the presence / absence and number of times of the short-time game.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 288 (A), for example, “symbol 3” is won when the acquired random number is “55 to 104”, and if it is won by “symbol 3”, the special game state is reached after the big hit game is over. The period continues until the special lottery is performed five times ("probability change (5)"). In addition, it is shown that when winning in “symbol 3”, the game will be in a short-time gaming state until the special lottery is performed “30” times after the jackpot game ends.

[Type of second special symbol]
FIG. 288 (B) shows a random number table B for the second special symbol. The second special symbol is a special symbol that is changed when the game ball P enters the second starting port 2002.

  The random number table B for the second special symbol is composed of a type column, a random number column, a probability variation column, and a time reduction column. In the type column, a predetermined winning symbol is stored, and in the random number column, a predetermined random number is stored. Also, the probability change column stores the presence / absence of the probability change corresponding to a predetermined winning symbol and the number of rounds, and the time reduction column stores the presence / absence and number of times of the short-time game.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 288 (B), for example, “symbol 1” is won when the acquired random number is “0 to 199”, and if it is won by “symbol 1”, the special game state is reached after the big hit game is over. The period continues until the special lottery is performed five times ("probability change (5)"). In addition, it is shown that when winning with “symbol 1”, the special lottery is always executed “30” times after the jackpot is over.

[Opening / closing pattern of special electric accessory (opening / closing member)]
FIG. 289 shows an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2000A that causes the special electric accessory 2000 to open / close during the jackpot game. The opening / closing pattern is stored in advance by the main control MPU 4100a and is referred to during the jackpot game.

  The open / close pattern is composed of a symbol field and a round field. A predetermined winning symbol is stored in the symbol column, and a predetermined number of rounds is stored in the round column.

  The opening / closing pattern A is an opening pattern that opens the opening / closing member 2000A only once for 29 seconds per round. When the opening member 2000 </ b> A is opened by the opening / closing pattern A, it becomes easy for the game ball P to enter the big winning opening 2003.

  In addition, the opening / closing pattern B is an opening pattern in which the opening / closing member 2000A is opened five times for 0.06 seconds per round and then opened once for 25 seconds. When the opening / closing member 2000A is opened by the opening / closing pattern B, it is difficult to win the game ball P in the big winning opening 2003 in the first five-time opening fake, but in the sixth 25-second opening, the gaming ball P is put in the big winning opening. Easy to win 2003.

  The opening / closing pattern C is an opening pattern in which the opening / closing member 2000A is opened once for 0.06 seconds per round. When the opening / closing member 2000 </ b> A is opened by the opening / closing pattern C, it is difficult to win the game ball P in the big winning opening 2003.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 289, for example, “symbol 1” has round numbers from “1R to 5R”, and the open / close pattern in all rounds is “A”. Therefore, the open / close member 2000A is open for “29 seconds” in each round. Has been shown to be.

  As shown in FIG. 289, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is uniformly 5R (5 rounds) regardless of whether the winning symbol is “symbol 1” to “symbol 6”. However, the open / close patterns “A” to “C” for each round differ depending on the winning symbols “symbol 1” to “symbol 6”.

  Thus, while making the number of rounds uniform, by making the opening / closing pattern for each round different depending on the winning symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a big hit or a small hit. As a result, it is possible to relatively increase the expectation for the small hits, and to widen the range of effects. Note that the winning symbols of “symbol 1” to “symbol 5” are referred to as “big hit”, and the case of “symbol 6” is referred to as “small hit”. Also, in order to show the jackpot as a small hit, when the winning symbol is “symbol 5”, the opening / closing member 2000A behaves the same as the jackpot, and further, no short-time game is given.

[First special design]
The main control MPU 4100a shows a behavior (opening / closing pattern B: 0.06 second opening × 5 times) that seems to be a small hit for the player in the first round as in the case of design 2 with respect to the first special symbol. It is shown to the player as if winning the symbol 5 (opening / closing pattern C: 0.06 second opening × 1 × 5 rounds). The main control MPU 4100a opens the opening / closing member 2000A once for 25 seconds so that it can be recognized as a big hit at the time of the sixth opening.

  That is, multiple types of first special symbols are prepared, and these multiple types of first special symbols are used as winning symbols for transitioning to the small hit gaming state and for winning the big hit gaming state. Includes a jackpot symbol. When winning by the small hit symbol, the opening / closing member 2000A performs 0.06 seconds opening only 5 times. On the other hand, in the case of winning with the jackpot symbol, the opening / closing member 2000A performs the opening for 0.06 seconds only 5 times and then the opening for 25 seconds only once.

  As a result, the player who thought that the opening and closing member 2000A had won 0.06 seconds opening × 5 times in the first round, and that he thought that he won the jackpot, was a big hit by the next long opening that he had not predicted. Recognizing this, I am surprised and more interested in games.

[Second special design]
The main control MPU 4100a makes the selectable symbol only the symbol 1 for the second special symbol (see FIG. 288), and the winning ball speed in the state where the probability variation function is activated or the time-shortening function is activated. By increasing the value, it is possible to give a privilege called a prize ball without causing the player to feel stress, and to give satisfaction to the player who has been given the privilege.

  In the present embodiment, for example, after the jackpot game is over, there is a 100% probability that the game will be shifted to the special game state, that is, the probability variation state, but the probability variation state is set until the special symbol changes five times. Therefore, if the winning symbol is not won again in the special lottery during this period, the probability variation state ends. Therefore, although it is guaranteed that the jackpot game is shifted to the probable change state, the next hit is not guaranteed.

[Direction under non-rotating conditions]
In the present embodiment, peripheral control board 4140 includes a timer (not shown) inside. When the peripheral control board 4140 obtains a variation pattern command from the main control board 4100, it starts a timer.

  Here, the timer can process an information amount of 2 bytes (16 bits). The 16-bit information amount is an information amount corresponding to continuous 2 ^ 16 = 65536 integers. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 performs one steady process at intervals of 32 ms. The steady process is, for example, a process of performing an effect based on the obtained variation pattern command by obtaining the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100.

  That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 performs one steady process at a cycle of 32 ms, the timer cumulatively counts one count every 32 ms. For example, when the count is 2, the count is 2 counts × 32 ms. The elapsed time can be counted as = 64 ms. Therefore, according to this 2-byte timer, it is possible to count up to 65536 integers, and thus it is possible to count up to 65536 counts × 32 ms≈35 minutes.

  Then, the peripheral control board 4140 determines that it does not turn if the special lottery is not performed once even if the elapsed time counted by the timer has passed a predetermined set time, and then the specified The “designation direction suggestion effect” is displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 1400 when triggered by the lottery.

  In addition, as another method for determining “does not rotate”, for example, the peripheral control board 4140 acquires the time (referred to as time A) and the current time (referred to as time B) when the last special lottery was performed from the RTC 4140e. And the peripheral control board 4140 is a case where the elapsed time between the acquired time A and time B exceeds a predetermined set time, and is special once between time A and time B. If the lottery is not performed and the current state is reached, it may be determined that “does not rotate”.

  Also, in order to strictly "do not turn", it is a condition that the player is playing. For example, when a player leaves his / her table temporarily due to a toilet break or the like, even if the elapsed time becomes longer than the set time, it cannot be said that “does not turn”. Therefore, strictly speaking, it is determined not to "turn" on condition that the elapsed time exceeds the set time and the player is playing.

  When determining whether or not the situation is “not rotating”, the peripheral control MPU 4140a acquires information on elapsed time from the timer, and acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 4100a. When determining whether or not the situation is not strictly rotating, the peripheral control MPU 4140a further acquires a rotation operation detection signal from the touch sensor 420.

  In addition, the “launching direction suggestion effect” refers to an effect suggesting that the game method that has been left-handed until now is switched to right-handed. By performing this launch direction suggesting effect, the player can switch from left-handed to right-handed at an appropriate timing, and can enter the game ball P at the second start opening 2002 in the normal gaming state.

  With regard to the appearance rate of the launch direction suggestion effect, in order to solve the problem of the present invention of maintaining the player's game motivation, when a specific lottery is won after a non-turning situation has continued for a certain period of time, a certain probability is given. The launch direction suggesting effect is set to be performed.

  Specifically, if the predetermined set time is “15 seconds”, when the specific lottery is won when “15 seconds” has passed, the launch direction suggesting effect is performed with a probability of 100%. To be set. Since the launch direction suggesting effect is performed with a probability of 100%, the player can enjoy the privilege of enjoying the effect and the privilege of receiving the payout of the game ball, so the present invention of maintaining the player's gaming motivation The problem can be solved.

  Hereinafter, a series of flows from when the situation does not turn to when the launch direction suggesting effect is performed will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 290 shows the external configuration of the game board 4 and the counter 2400.

  The counter 2400 is usually installed above the game board 4. The counter 2400 inputs a count value based on a signal output from the pachinko machine 1, and displays the big win count, the small win count, the special lottery count, and the like on the counter display screen 2401. The number of special lotteries displayed on the counter display screen 2401 is the number of special lotteries performed up to the present time after winning the winning symbol in the previous special lottery.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 290, it is indicated that the number of special lotteries performed from the last time the special lottery is performed to the present time is “5 times”. The number of special lotteries displayed here is reset when the special lottery is won.

  FIG. 291 shows the external configuration of the game board 4 and the counter 2400 when the decorative symbol (first special symbol) changes. It is shown that the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is rotated when the game ball P enters the first starting port 2001.

  Accordingly, in the case of FIG. 291, the decorative symbol (first special symbol) has changed, and the special lottery number is added “6 times” from “5 times” displayed so far. Has been.

  FIG. 292 shows the external appearance of the game board 4 and the counter 2400 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of special lotteries has reached “6”. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 292, even if a certain period of time has passed since the last special lottery was performed, the special lottery has not yet been performed so far, indicating that the situation does not turn. Yes.

  When the main control MPU 4100a detects that the game ball P has passed through the gate 2200B in this situation where it does not rotate, the main control MPU 4100a performs a specific lottery to change the normal symbol using this as a trigger. The main control MPU 4100a performs a launch direction suggesting effect based on the result of the specific lottery. The appearance probability of the launch direction suggesting effect performed at this time is set in advance to 100% as described above.

  Hereinafter, the production necessity determination process triggered by the fact that the specific lottery has been performed in a situation that does not turn will be described.

[Direction necessity determination processing]
FIG. 293 shows the processing procedure of the necessity / unnecessity determination processing. The effect necessity determination process is performed as part of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 224) by the peripheral control MPU 4140a that has input the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 4100a. Note that the timer interrupt process is performed every 2 ms, for example.

  The variation pattern command is a command that is output from the main control MPU 4100a and input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a. For example, in the special lottery and the specific lottery, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and whether the winning symbol is won or not Etc. are included. For example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can perform control related to the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 2337 based on the variation pattern command.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a periodically performs an assignment condition determination process, for example, every 32 ms (S3000).

FIG. 294 shows a processing procedure for the provision condition determination processing.
The peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not it is in a non-rotating state based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control MPU 4100a and the information on the elapsed time from the timer (S3001).

  Specifically, peripheral control MPU 4140a starts a timer when it acquires a variation pattern command from main control MPU 4100a.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the elapsed time counted by the timer exceeds a predetermined set time (for example, 15 seconds).

  As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can determine whether or not the elapsed time has exceeded the set time, that is, whether or not the situation is such that it does not rotate.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the provision condition determination processing, and ends the effect necessity determination processing (see FIG. 293). On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a positive result in this determination, it next determines whether or not there has been a specific lottery (S3002).

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a negative result in this determination, it waits until there is a specific lottery. In contrast, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a positive result in this determination, it returns to the effect necessity determination process (see FIG. 293), and proceeds to step S3110.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a gives points to the player, and displays a point giving effect that suggests that the player has given points on the decorative symbol display unit 1400 (S3110).

  Note that the peripheral control MPU 4140a gives points to the player by temporarily storing the point values.

  FIG. 295 shows an external configuration of the game board 4 when the point giving effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 1400. In the point giving effect, the point 1400H is displayed large in the center of the decorative symbol display unit 1400. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that the points have been awarded. In addition, the player can continue the game while expecting a launch direction suggestion effect (see FIG. 298) to be performed soon.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the internally counted total points are equal to or greater than a specified point (S3120).

  In the present embodiment, the specified point is preset as one point. Therefore, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a gives even one point to the player in step S3110, the total point becomes equal to or more than the specified point. The specified point may be set in advance as 10 points, for example. In this case, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a gives 10 points to the player in step S3110, the total points become equal to or more than the specified points.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a negative result in the determination at step S3120, the peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the effect necessity determination process and proceeds to a timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a positive result in the determination at step S3120, it performs an effect execution instruction (S3130).

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the effect execution instruction flag from “0” to “1”. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a launch direction suggesting effect process.

[Direction suggestion direction]
FIG. 296 shows the processing procedure of the launch direction suggesting effect process. The launch direction suggesting effect process is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a as part of the timer interrupt process. Note that the timer interrupt process is performed every 2 ms, for example.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether there is an effect execution instruction based on the effect execution instruction flag (S3201).

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that there is no effect execution instruction when the effect execution instruction flag is “0”, and has an effect execution instruction when the effect execution instruction flag is “1”. to decide.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the launch direction suggesting effect process and proceeds to a timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a positive result in the determination in step S3201, it determines whether or not the normal symbol specific lottery is won based on the variation pattern command from the main control board 4100a (S3202). .

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a negative result in this determination, the peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the launch direction suggesting effect and proceeds to a timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains a positive result in the determination in step S3202, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a first displays the execution suggesting effect on the decorative symbol display unit 1400.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays, on the decorative symbol display unit 1400, a launch direction suggesting effect that suggests that the player should make a right stroke based on a predetermined timing with reference to a timing at which the movable piece 2337A is opened (see FIG. S3203).

  FIG. 297 shows an external configuration of the game board 4 when the execution suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 1400. In the execution suggestion effect, an execution suggestion display object 1400G is displayed large in the center of the decorative symbol display unit 1400. Therefore, the player can continue the game while expecting the launch direction effect (see FIG. 298) to be performed sooner than this, and can prepare to switch from left-handed to right-handed. In the execution suggestion effect, the launch direction suggestion display object 1400D is displayed small on the upper left of the decorative symbol display unit 1400. In addition, here, a visual method is used as a method for prompting the right strike, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an auditory or visual method may be used.

  FIG. 298 shows an external configuration of the game board 4 when the launch direction suggesting effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 1400. In the launch direction suggestion effect, the launch direction suggestion display 1400D moves from the upper left side to the right side of the decorative symbol display unit 1400. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize the launch direction suggestion display object 1400D, and can grasp the timing of switching from left-handed to right-handed and the switching according to the movement of the launch direction suggestion display object 1400D.

  At this time, the main control MPU 4100a controls the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 2337A based on the winning symbol winning in the specific symbol specific lottery. Accordingly, the player can cause the game ball P to enter the second start port 2002 by the launch direction suggesting effect by the peripheral control MPU 4140a and the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 2337A by the main control MPU 4100a. Then, when the game ball P enters the second start opening 2002, the player pays out the game ball P with the benefit and the payout control board 1186 that a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol with a lot of balls is obtained in the case of a big hit. You can get the privilege of getting.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a to display the launch direction suggesting effect on the decorative symbol display unit 1400, and then resets the total points given to “0”. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a ends the launch direction suggesting effect and shifts to a timer interrupt process.

  The main control MPU 4100a terminates the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 2337A and closes the movable piece 2337A as the control independent of the launch direction suggesting effect when the launch direction suggesting effect ends. After that, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a command indicating that the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 2337A has been completed to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In response to this, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a to display on the decorative symbol display unit 1400 an end effect that suggests returning the gaming method from right-handed to left-handed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a resets the effect execution instruction flag to “0”.

  FIG. 299 shows an external configuration of the game board 4 when the end effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 1400. In the end effect, an end message is displayed at the top of the decorative symbol display unit 1400. Accordingly, the player can clearly recognize that the launch direction effect has ended, and can switch from right-handed to left-handed at an appropriate timing.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery is won in a so-called non-turning situation, the launch direction suggesting effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 1400 installed in the center of the game board 4. The Therefore, the player can receive the privilege of enjoying the production.

  The launch direction suggesting effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display unit 1400 in accordance with the timing when the movable piece 2337A is opened. Therefore, the player can enter the game ball P into the second starting port 2002 and can receive a privilege of paying out the game ball P.

  In addition, the player can obtain an opportunity for a special lottery to change the second special symbol by causing the game ball P to enter the second start port 2002. Since the special lottery that changes the second special symbol is more advantageous with respect to the winning ball than the special lottery that changes the first special symbol (see FIG. 288), the player has a chance to receive more profit. be able to.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can maintain the player's willingness to play even under non-rotating conditions.

  In this embodiment, as a configuration for maintaining the player's willingness to play, when a specific lottery is won in a situation where it does not turn, a configuration in which a launch direction suggesting effect is performed with a certain probability is adopted. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine in which the burden on the player increases due to continued stagnation of the game for a long time, it is an effect of the present invention by adopting a configuration that performs some effect with a certain probability. The player's willingness to play can be maintained. "

[Other examples that trigger launch direction suggestion processing]
In the present embodiment, the launch direction suggesting effect is performed when triggered by the situation that does not turn as described above. A direction suggestion effect may be performed.

[Granted by reach lose]
The peripheral control MPU 4140a may perform a launch direction suggesting effect triggered by reach loss.

[Granted by pressing a button]
Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may perform the launch direction suggesting effect when the pressing operation of the operation button unit 370 is pressed a predetermined number of times.

[Granted if the mission is not completed]
Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may perform a launch direction suggesting effect when the player cannot clear the mission.

[Granted by specific number of fluctuations after big hit and after small hit]
In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a gives a point to the player when the number of special lotteries has reached the specified number since the end of the previous jackpot or the previous jackpot, and launches when the assigned point reaches the specified point A direction suggestion effect may be performed.

[Granted when special symbols are difficult to change]
Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may perform a launch direction suggesting effect when it is determined that the number of special lotteries is equal to or less than a specified value with respect to the number of game ball firing signals received from the main control MPU 4100a.

[Granted if the jackpot lottery is not won in a probable state with a limited number of fluctuations]
Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not win the special lottery within the specified number of fluctuations at the time of probability change, and gives a point to the player when the probability change state is over, and when the granted point reaches the specified point The launch direction suggesting effect may be performed.

[As an event at a specific time]
Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may give a player a point as a special event when a specific time has elapsed, and may perform a launch direction suggesting effect when the given point has reached a specified point.

[Granted to players who contributed to operation]
In addition, when the special lottery is performed from the state where the special lottery has not been performed, the peripheral control MPU 4140a points to the player when the special lottery is performed more than the specified number of times after the special lottery is performed. The launch direction suggesting effect may be performed when the given point has reached the specified point.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated based on embodiment, above-described embodiment of this invention is for making an understanding of this invention easy, and does not limit this invention. The present invention can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. However, it is a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, specifically a pachislot machine, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined, or the like. However, the present invention is applicable. In consideration of the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the “game ball” in each of the above-described configurations may be a “game medium”.

  Note that a pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which a throwing medium such as a game ball, which is a medium that a player throws into the gaming machine, and a gaming medium, which is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player, are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using an inserted medium such as a game ball. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state detection). Means), a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the entry is detected by the entrance state detecting means, and a special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. "Additional things" or "Additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols in a variable manner and causing a character or the like to appear at a predetermined timing" Generally equipped with “lottery means for lottery by lottery by distribution of game balls in the role and lottery means for lottery by winning at the start opening, represented by what is generally called“ multifunction machine ” In general, one game is performed by a predetermined number of game balls such as 16 that are typified by what is commonly called “Alepatchi”, depending on the manner of entering the game balls into a plurality of entrances in one game For example, the “payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal, which is a game medium, is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed according to the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever), and then stopped. It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence according to the operation of the operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of the fluctuation stop of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) gaming balls as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium is input, operation means for starting (for example, an operating lever) In response to the above operation, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and thereafter, the symbol string variation is stopped in accordance with an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Although it seems, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that a game played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be an EL display device, a plasma display device, a display device such as a CRT, or the like.

Claims (3)

A specific operation means for performing a specific operation by the player;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the reception of the game ball at the start port;
Jackpot determination means for performing jackpot determination processing based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means;
A jackpot game executing means for performing a jackpot game in which a privilege is given to the player based on the result of the jackpot determination process by the jackpot determination means;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a game holding means for waiting for the jackpot determination processing by the jackpot determination means corresponding to the acquired random number until the execution condition is satisfied,
When the execution condition related to the jackpot determination process is established and the hold state is released, the fluctuation display control means for performing control related to the symbol fluctuation,
Preceding effect determination means for performing an effect determination for a specific preceding effect that causes a specific aspect to be shown before the execution condition is satisfied, with respect to the jackpot expectation process for the jackpot determination process that is put on hold by the game holding means;
When the first determination result is obtained by the effect determination by the preceding effect determination means, the special operation image that can cause the special image display to appear at the hold display timing of the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect Display means;
A first preceding effect control unit capable of performing control related to execution of the specific preceding effect when the specific operation with respect to the specific operation unit is received while the special operation image display by the special operation image display unit appears. and,
When the second determination result is obtained by the effect determination by the preceding effect determination means, the control related to the execution of the specific preceding effect is performed at a predetermined effect timing without accepting the specific operation for the specific operation means. Second predecessor effect control means,
Production design control means for performing production that suggests the result of the jackpot determination process according to the display mode when the production design is confirmed and stopped in a predetermined display area ,
The special operation image display means includes:
When there are a plurality of jackpot determination processes whose digestion order precedes the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect, the special operation image display is changed to the plurality of jackpot determination processes that exist. A plurality of variable specific prompting display means capable of executing a control that can identify and appear which is the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect in a plurality of corresponding symbol variations. And
The first preceding effect control means includes
Even if the specific operation is performed on the specific operation means in spite of the fact that the plurality of symbol variations in which the special image display appears is within the period in which digestion has not yet been completed, the specific operation is accepted. Having non-acceptance control means capable of executing control to prevent
The multiple variation specific prompting display means is
Control that the special operation image display is not displayed after all the symbol variations according to the jackpot determination process whose digestion order is ahead of the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect is digested. Is feasible,
The Tokumisao Tokumisao image display by the image display means, as said, which can be output as a particular display mode in any of the absence in the period and when in the period in which the specific operation is not accepted by the non-reception control means Because
further,
The position where the special image display appears is different from the position where the effect symbol is confirmed and stopped in the predetermined display area,
When the specific preceding effect is performed by the control by the first preceding effect control means and when the specific preceding effect is performed by the control by the second preceding effect control means, both of the special modes are special. A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect of the above can appear . A specific operation means for performing a specific operation by the player;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the reception of the game ball at the start port;
Jackpot determination means for performing jackpot determination processing based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means;
A jackpot game executing means for performing a jackpot game in which a privilege is given to the player based on the result of the jackpot determination process by the jackpot determination means;
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a game holding means for waiting for the jackpot determination processing by the jackpot determination means corresponding to the acquired random number until the execution condition is satisfied,
When the execution condition related to the jackpot determination process is established and the hold state is released, the fluctuation display control means for performing control related to the symbol fluctuation,
Preceding effect determination means for performing an effect determination for a specific preceding effect that causes a specific aspect to be shown before the execution condition is satisfied, with respect to the jackpot expectation process for the jackpot determination process that is put on hold by the game holding means;
When a special determination result is obtained in the effect determination by the preceding effect determination means, a special image display that allows the special image display to appear at the hold display timing of the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect Means,
A predecessor effect control unit capable of performing control related to execution of the specific predecessor effect when the specific operation with respect to the specific operation unit is accepted while the special operation image display by the special operation image display unit appears. ,
The special operation image display means includes:
When there are a plurality of jackpot determination processes whose digestion order precedes the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect, the special operation image display is changed to the plurality of jackpot determination processes that exist. A plurality of variable concealment prompting display means capable of executing control that can conceal which of the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect is caused by a plurality of corresponding symbol variations. And
The preceding effect control means includes
Even if the specific operation is performed on the specific operation means in spite of the fact that the plurality of symbol variations in which the special image display appears is within the period in which digestion has not yet been completed, the specific operation is accepted. Having non-acceptance control means capable of executing control to prevent
The multiple variable concealment prompting display means is
Control that the special operation image display is not displayed after all the symbol variations according to the jackpot determination process whose digestion order is ahead of the jackpot determination process that is the target of the specific preceding effect is digested. Is feasible,
The special operation image display by the special operation image display means can be output as a specific display mode both when the specific operation is not accepted by the non-acceptance control means and when it is not. A gaming machine characterized by In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A gaming machine further comprising a lamp device that performs a predetermined light emission effect.